2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 7-1 Keys and Locks ...... 1-2 Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4 Climate Control Systems ...... 7-1 Doors ...... 1-8 Controls ...... 4-6 Air Vents ...... 7-6 Vehicle Security...... 1-12 Warning Lights, Gages, and Exterior Mirrors ...... 1-14 Indicators ...... 4-12 Driving and Operating ...... 8-1 Interior Mirrors ...... 1-15 Information Displays ...... 4-27 Driving Information ...... 8-2 Windows ...... 1-16 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-31 Starting and Operating ...... 8-28 Roof ...... 1-19 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-39 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-34 OnStar® System ...... 4-44 Automatic Transmission ...... 8-35 Seats and Restraints ...... 2-1 Drive Systems ...... 8-38 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Lighting ...... 5-1 Brakes ...... 8-38 Front Seats ...... 2-3 Exterior Lighting ...... 5-1 Ride Control Systems ...... 8-41 Rear Seats ...... 2-9 Interior Lighting ...... 5-4 Cruise Control ...... 8-44 Safety Belts ...... 2-10 Lighting Features ...... 5-4 Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-46 Airbag System ...... 2-25 Fuel ...... 8-53 Child Restraints ...... 2-41 Infotainment System ...... 6-1 Towing...... 8-57 Introduction ...... 6-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-64 Storage ...... 3-1 Radio ...... 6-11 Storage Compartments ...... 3-1 Audio Players ...... 6-19 Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 6-33 Roof Rack System ...... 3-2 Phone ...... 6-42 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care ...... 9-1 Technical Data ...... 11-1 General Information ...... 9-2 Vehicle Identification ...... 11-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 9-4 Vehicle Data ...... 11-2 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-33 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Electrical System ...... 9-37 Customer Information ...... 12-1 Wheels and Tires ...... 9-43 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13 Jump Starting ...... 9-74 Vehicle Data Recording and Towing...... 9-78 Privacy...... 12-15 Appearance Care ...... 9-81 Index ...... i-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1 General Information ...... 10-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 10-7 Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 Introduction iii

Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the Motors of Canada Limited” for Manufactured under license GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the Chevrolet Motor Division wherever under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; CHEVROLET Emblem, the name it appears in this manual. 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; Equinox and the Equinox Emblem Keep this manual in the vehicle for 6,487,535 & other U.S. and are registered trademarks of quick reference. worldwide patents issued & General Motors. pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks This manual describes features that and the DTS logos and Symbol may or may not be on your specific are trademarks of DTS, Inc. vehicle either because they are © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights options that you did not purchase Reserved. or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.

limited viewing uses only unless Canadian Vehicle Owners otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering Propriétaires Canadiens or disassembly is prohibited. A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer/retailer or from: Manufactured under license from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the ce guide en français auprès du double-D symbol are trademarks concessionnaire ou à l'adresse of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright suivante: 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. “Made for iPod” means that an Helm, Incorporated electronic accessory has been P.O. Box 07130 This product incorporates copyright designed to connect specifically Detroit, MI 48207 protection technology that is to iPod and has been certified protected by U.S. patents and other by the developer to meet Apple 1-800-551-4123 intellectual property rights. Use of performance standards. iPod is a Numéro de poste 6438 de langue this copyright protection technology trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., française must be authorized by Macrovision, registered in the U.S. and other www.helminc.com and is intended for home and other countries. Introduction v

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, gage, something that could result in or indicator. property or vehicle damage. Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when This would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual Cautions vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or Warning messages found on vehicle information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when reduce them. you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or Danger indicates a hazard with a information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. A circle with a slash through it is Warning or Caution indicates a a safety symbol which means hazard that could result in injury or “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not death. let this happen.” vi Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gage that may be found on the vehicle + and what they mean. For more : Fuses information on the symbol, refer to i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam the index. Changer 9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child # : Air Conditioning Restraints ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : Oil Pressure or OnStar® } : Power $ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start " : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor B : Engine Coolant Temperature F : Traction Control O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Exterior Mirrors Keys, Doors and Convex Mirrors ...... 1-14 Windows Power Mirrors ...... 1-14 Heated Mirrors ...... 1-15 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 1-15 Keys and Locks Interior Mirrors Keys ...... 1-2 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 1-15 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Automatic Dimming Rearview System ...... 1-3 Mirror ...... 1-16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation ...... 1-3 Windows Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-5 Windows ...... 1-16 Door Locks ...... 1-6 Power Windows ...... 1-17 Power Door Locks ...... 1-7 Sun Visors ...... 1-18 Safety Locks ...... 1-7 Roof Doors Sunroof ...... 1-19 Liftgate (Manual) ...... 1-8 Liftgate (Power) ...... 1-9 Vehicle Security Vehicle Security ...... 1-12 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-12 Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Immobilizer Operation ...... 1-13 1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls The key, that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE or even make the vehicle move. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, transmitter to extend the key. The windows will function with the can be used for the ignition and all Press the button and the key blade keys in the ignition and children locks. to retract the key. could be seriously injured or killed See your dealer/retailer if a new key if caught in the path of a closing is needed. window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of the vehicle, see Roadside Assistance Program on page 12‑6 or OnStar® System on page 4‑44. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-3

Remote Keyless Entry . Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery Replacement” later (RKE) System in this section. See Radio Frequency Statement on . If the transmitter is still not page 12‑16 for information working correctly, see your regarding Part 15 of the Federal dealer/retailer or a qualified Communications Commission (FCC) technician for service. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada. Remote Keyless Entry Changes or modifications to this (RKE) System Operation system by other than an authorized service facility could void The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) authorization to use this equipment. transmitter will work up to 60 m RKE without Remote Start Shown (195 feet) away from the vehicle. If there is a decrease in the RKE The following may be available: operating range: There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. . Check the distance. The transmitter. See Remote Keyless The turn signal indicators may flash and/or the horn may sound to transmitter may be too far from Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3. the vehicle. indicate locking, see “Remote Lock Feedback” under Vehicle . Check the location. Other Personalization on page 4 39. If a vehicles or objects may be ‑ blocking the signal. passenger door is open when Q is pressed, all doors lock. If the driver door is open when Q is pressed, all doors lock except the driver door. These settings can be modified. 1-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” V (Remote Liftgate Release): Programming Transmitters to under Vehicle Personalization on First press K , then press and the Vehicle page 4‑39. hold V to unlock the liftgate. Only RKE transmitters Pressing Q may also arm the For vehicles with the power liftgate, programmed to this vehicle will theft-deterrent system. See press and hold V until the liftgate work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be Anti-Theft Alarm System on begins to move to open the liftgate. page 1‑12. purchased and programmed 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic through your dealer/retailer. K (Unlock): Press to unlock Alarm): Press and release one When the replacement transmitter the driver door or all doors, see time to locate the vehicle. The is programmed to this vehicle, all Remote Door Unlock under “ ” exterior lamps flash and the horn remaining transmitters must also be Vehicle Personalization on 7 reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen page 4 39. The turn signal chirps. Press and hold for at least ‑ transmitters will no longer work indicators flash to indicate unlocking two seconds to sound the panic once the new transmitter is has occurred. For more information alarm. The horn sounds and the programmed. see “Remote Unlock Light turn signals flash until 7 is pressed Feedback” under Vehicle again or the key is placed in the Battery Replacement Personalization on page 4‑39. ignition and turned to ON/RUN. Replace the battery if the “Replace Pressing K may also disarm / (Remote Vehicle Start): For Battery in Remote Key” message the theft-deterrent system. vehicles with this feature, first press displays in the DIC. See “Replace See Anti-Theft Alarm System on Q then press and hold / to start Battery in Remote Key” under Key page 1‑12. the engine from outside the vehicle and Lock Messages on page 4‑35. using the RKE transmitter. See The battery is not rechargeable. Remote Vehicle Start on page 1‑5 for additional information. See your dealer/retailer to replace the battery. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which Extending Engine Run Time can affect the performance of the The vehicle may have this feature For a 10-minute extension, repeat transmitter, see Remote Keyless Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is that allows you to start the engine Entry (RKE) System on page 1‑3 from outside the vehicle. still running. The remote start can for additional information. be extended once. / (Remote Vehicle Start): Starting the Engine Using Remote When the remote start is extended, This button will be on the RKE Start transmitter if the vehicle has remote the second 10 minutes will start start. To enable and disable remote To start the engine using the remote immediately. start, see “Remote Vehicle Start” start feature: For example, if the engine has been under Vehicle Personalization on 1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. running for five minutes, and page 4‑39. 10 minutes are added, the engine 2. Press and hold / for about Vehicles with an automatic climate will run for a total of 15 minutes. two seconds. The turn signal control system will default to a lamps will briefly flash to confirm A maximum of two remote starts or heating or cooling mode depending the vehicle has been started. remote start attempts are allowed on the outside temperature during a The parking lamps will turn on between ignition cycles. remote start. Once the key is turned and remain on as long as the The vehicle's ignition switch must to ON/RUN, the system will turn on engine is running. The vehicle's be turned to ON/RUN and then back at the setting the vehicle was last doors will be locked. to LOCK/OFF using the key, before set to. 3. The key must be inserted and the remote start procedure can be Laws in some local communities turned to ON/RUN before used again. may restrict the use of remote driving. starters. For example, some laws require a person using remote The engine will shut off after start to have the vehicle in view. 10 minutes unless a time Check local regulations for any extension is done or the key is requirements. inserted and turned to ON/RUN. 1-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Shutting the Engine Off After a . The oil pressure is low. Remote Start . Two remote vehicle starts have WARNING (Continued) To shut off the engine: already been used. . Young children who get into . Press / until the parking lamps . The vehicle is not in P (Park). unlocked vehicles may be turn off. unable to get out. A child can Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat . Turn on the hazard warning and can suffer permanent flashers. injuries or even death from { WARNING . Insert the key and turn it to heat stroke. Always lock the ON/RUN and then back to Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. LOCK/OFF. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door Conditions in Which Remote Start . Passengers, especially Will Not Work children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop doors and fall out of a moving your vehicle. Locking your The remote vehicle start feature will doors can help prevent this not operate if: vehicle. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in from happening. . The key is in the ignition. a crash is increased if the To lock or unlock a door from the . doors are not locked. So, all The hood or doors are not outside of the vehicle, use the passengers should wear closed. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) safety belts properly and . The hazard warning flashers transmitter. Pull the handle once the doors should be locked are on. from the inside to unlock the door, whenever the vehicle is and a second time to open it. . There is an emission control driven. system malfunction. (Continued) . The engine coolant temperature is too high. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-7

Power Door Locks When locking the doors with the Safety Locks power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock Rear door security locks prevent five seconds after the last door is passengers from opening the rear closed. You will hear three chimes doors from the inside. to signal that the delayed locking Press (C) to activate the safety feature is in use. locks. Once activated, the LED Pressing the power lock switch light, changes to amber. twice or Q on the RKE transmitter Pressing the button again twice will override the delayed deactivates the safety locks. locking feature and immediately See Power Door Locks on lock all the doors. page 1‑7. This feature will not operate if the A. Door Unlock key is in the ignition. B. Door Lock This feature can be programmed. See “Delayed Door Lock” under C. Safety Lock Vehicle Personalization on The power door lock switches are page 4‑39. located on the instrument panel. . Press (A) to unlock the doors. . Remove the key from the ignition and press (B) to lock the doors. 1-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors Notice: If you open the liftgate WARNING (Continued) without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage Liftgate (Manual) If the vehicle must be driven with door, you could damage the { the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: liftgate or the liftgate glass. WARNING . Close all of the windows. Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate Exhaust gases can enter the . Fully open the air outlets on is clear before opening it. vehicle if it is driven with the or under the instrument Press the touchpad located in the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with panel. handle of the liftgate, above the any objects that pass through . Adjust the Climate Control license plate, and lift up to open. the seal between the body system to a setting that and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. brings in only outside air Do not press the touchpad while Engine exhaust contains Carbon and set the fan speed to the closing the liftgate. This will cause Monoxide (CO) which cannot be highest setting. See Climate the liftgate to be unlatched. seen or smelled. It can cause Control System in the Index. Always close the liftgate before unconsciousness and even death. For more information about driving. (Continued) carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 8‑34. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-9

Liftgate (Power) WARNING (Continued) { WARNING Power Liftgate Operation . Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power { WARNING system to a setting that brings in only outside air liftgate. Make sure there is no one Exhaust gases can enter the and set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is vehicle if it is driven with the highest setting. See Climate opening and closing. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Control System in the Index. Notice: If you open the liftgate any objects that pass through . If the vehicle is equipped with without checking for overhead the seal between the body a power liftgate, disable the obstructions such as a garage and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. power liftgate function. door, you could damage the Engine exhaust contains Carbon liftgate or the liftgate glass. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Always check to make sure the seen or smelled. It can cause area above and behind the liftgate Exhaust on page 8‑34. unconsciousness and even death. is clear before opening it. If the vehicle must be driven with On vehicles with a power liftgate, The power liftgate has three modes the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: the switch is located on the of operation. Mode selection is . Close all of the windows. overhead console. The vehicle controlled by the interior mode must be in P (Park) to use the switch. . Fully open the air outlets on power feature. The taillamps flash or under the instrument when the power liftgate moves. panel. (Continued) 1-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

such as a garage door or roof . Pressing the power liftgate mounted cargo during power button on the center of the mode operation. The liftgate can still be switch, located on the overhead fully opened manually. console. OFF: The liftgate only operates . Pressing the touchpad switch on manually in this position. the liftgate outside handle to open the liftgate. Manual operation of a liftgate that also has power operation requires more effort than with a standard manual liftgate. In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode, Choose the power liftgate mode the liftgate can be power opened by turning the dial on the switch and closed by: until the indicator lines up with the . K desired position. The vehicle must First pressing and then be in P (Park). pressing and holding V on the The three modes are: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts MAX : The liftgate power opens to moving. See Remote Keyless the full open height. Entry (RKE) System Operation Press and release & on the on page 1 3. 3/4 : The liftgate power opens to a ‑ liftgate adjacent to the latch to close reduced open height that can be set the liftgate. by the vehicle operator. Use this setting to prevent the liftgate from opening into overhead obstructions Keys, Doors and Windows 1-11

Pressing any button, or the position. Cargo could fall out of the will display. After removing the touchpad switch while the liftgate is vehicle. Always make sure the obstructions, the liftgate will moving stops it. Pressing the button power liftgate is closed and latched resume normal power operation. or RKE switch again reverses the before you drive away. Your vehicle has pinch sensors direction. The touch pad switch If you power open the liftgate and located on the side edges of the will stop the liftgate from moving. the liftgate support struts have lost liftgate. If an object is caught There is a minimum distance that pressure, the turn signals flash and between the liftgate and the body the power liftgate must already be a chime sounds. The liftgate stays and presses against this sensor, the open for the system to hold it open. open temporarily, then slowly liftgate will reverse direction and If movement is stopped below that closes. See your dealer/retailer for open fully. The liftgate will remain minimum the liftgate closes. service before using the liftgate. open until it is activated again or Do not force the liftgate open or closed manually. closed during a power cycle. Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle Setting the Power Liftgate The power liftgate may be 3/4 Mode temporarily disabled under extreme during a power open or close temperatures or low battery cycle, a warning chime will sound To change the liftgate stop position: and the liftgate will automatically conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate 1. Turn the liftgate switch to the reverse direction to the full closed can still be operated manually. 3/4 mode position and power or open position. After removing open the liftgate. If you shift the transmission out of the obstruction, the power liftgate P (Park) while the power function operation can be used again. 2. Stop the liftgate movement at is in progress, the liftgate power If the liftgate encounters multiple the desired height by pressing function will continue to completion. obstacles on the same power any switch. If you shift the transmission out of cycle, the power function will P (Park) and accelerate before the 3. Press and hold the button on the deactivate. The “Manually Close liftgate adjacent to the latch until power liftgate latch is closed, the Power Liftgate” warning message in liftgate may reverse to the open the turn signals flash and a beep the Driver Information Center (DIC) sounds to indicate that the new setting is recorded. 1-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

When power opened with the To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security 3/4 mode selected, the liftgate touchpad on the handle on the stops at the new set position. outside of the liftgate, and lift the Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This There is a minimum that the power gate open. To close the liftgate, use vehicle has theft-deterrent features, liftgate must already be open for the the pull cup to lower the liftgate however, they do not make it system to hold it open. The liftgate and close. With the power liftgate impossible to steal. cannot be set to stop below that disabled the liftgate electric latch minimum. will still power latch once contact is made with the striker. Always close Anti-Theft Alarm System Manual Operation of Power the liftgate before driving. This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm Liftgate If the RKE button is pressed while system. To change the liftgate to manual power operation is disabled, the turn operation, turn the mode switch to signals flash and the liftgate will Arming the System the OFF position. not move. To arm the system, either: The liftgate has an electric latch. With the power liftgate disabled . Press Q on the RKE transmitter. and all of the doors unlocked, the If the battery is disconnected or liftgate can be manually opened has low voltage, the liftgate will . Or, lock the vehicle using the and closed. Manual operation of not open. The liftgate will resume key in the driver door. a liftgate that also has power operation when the battery is The alarm automatically arms after operation requires more effort than reconnected and charged. about 30 seconds. The security with a standard manual liftgate. light, located on the instrument panel, flashes. Press V on the RKE transmitter to open the liftgate without setting off the alarm. The system rearms when the liftgate is closed. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-13

Disarming the System If the alarm has been activated, The key uses a transponder that the Theft Attempted message will matches an immobilizer control unit To disarm the system, do one of the “ ” appear on the DIC. See Key and in the vehicle and automatically following: Lock Messages on page 4‑35 for disarms the system. Only the . Press K on the RKE transmitter. additional information. correct key starts the vehicle. The vehicle may not start if the key is . Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. Immobilizer damaged. . Allow the alarm to time out after See Radio Frequency Statement on about 30 seconds and reset page 12 16 for information itself. ‑ regarding Part 15 of the Federal The alarm automatically disarms. Communications Commission (FCC) If the system is armed and any door Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada. is unlocked without pressing K on the RKE transmitter the alarm The security light, located in the sounds. Immobilizer Operation instrument panel cluster, comes This vehicle has a passive on if there is a problem with arming How to Detect a Tamper theft-deterrent system. or disarming the theft-deterrent Condition system. The system does not have to be If K is pressed and the horn manually armed or disarmed. When trying to start the vehicle, the sounds, an attempted break-in has security light comes on briefly when The vehicle is automatically the ignition is turned on. occurred while the system was immobilized when the key is armed. removed from the ignition. If the engine does not start and the security light stays on there is a The system is automatically problem with the system. Turn the disarmed when the vehicle is ignition off and try again. started with the correct key. 1-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the engine still does not start, and Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors the key appears to be undamaged or the light continues to stay on, try another ignition key. If the engine Convex Mirrors does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle { WARNING does start, the first key may be damaged. See your dealer/retailer A convex mirror can make things, who can service the theft-deterrent like other vehicles, look farther system and have a new key made. away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft you could hit a vehicle on the deterrent system in the vehicle. right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the The passenger side mirror is convex driver door. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from To adjust the mirrors: the driver seat. 1. Move the selector switch to L (left) or R (right) to choose the driver or passenger mirror. 2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move each mirror to the desired direction. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-15

3. Adjust each outside mirror so Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen. If the vehicle has the memory package, the outside mirrors have Manual Rearview Mirror 4. Return the selector switch to the a park tilt feature. This feature middle position. Hold the inside rearview mirror in autiomatically tilts the outside the center to move it for a clearer mirrors to a preselected position Heated Mirrors view of behind your vehicle. Adjust when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). the mirror to avoid glare from the For vehicles with heated mirrors: This allows the driver to view the headlamps behind you. Push the curb for parallel parking. < (Rear Window Defogger): tab forward for daytime use and pull Press to heat the mirrors. The passenger and driver mirrors it for nighttime use. return to their original position ® See “Rear Window Defogger” under Vehicles with OnStar have three when the vehicle is shifted out of additional control buttons located at Automatic Climate Control System R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned on page 7‑3 for more information. the bottom of the mirror. See your off or to OFF/LOCK. dealer/retailer for more information This feature can be turned on or on the system and how to subscribe off through the Driver Information to OnStar. See OnStar® System on Center (DIC). See Vehicle page 4‑44 for more information Personalization on page 4‑39 for about the services OnStar provides. more information. 1-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Automatic Dimming Automatic Dimming Mirror Windows Rearview Mirror Operation The vehicle may have an automatic Automatic dimming reduces the { WARNING dimming inside rearview mirror. glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming Leaving children, helpless adults, ® Vehicles with OnStar have three feature comes on and the indicator or pets in a vehicle with the additional control buttons located at light comes on each time the vehicle windows closed is dangerous. the bottom of the mirror. See your is started. They can be overcome by dealer/retailer for more information the extreme heat and suffer on the system and how to subscribe Cleaning the Mirror ® permanent injuries or even death to OnStar. See OnStar System on Do not spray glass cleaner directly from heat stroke. Never leave a page 4 44 for more information ‑ on the mirror. Use a soft towel child, a helpless adult, or a pet about the services OnStar provides. dampened with water. alone in a vehicle, especially with O : Press to turn automatic the windows closed in warm or dimming on or off. hot weather. If the vehicle has a rear vision camera (RVC) the O button for turning the automatic dimming feature on or off will not be available. See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 8‑49 for more information. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-17

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or Uplevel shown, base similar killed if caught in the path of a The power window controls are closing window. Do not leave located on each of the side doors. keys in a vehicle with children. The driver door also has switches When there are children in the that control the passenger and rear seat use the window lockout rear windows. The power windows button to prevent unintentional work when the ignition is in operation of the windows. ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑29. Press or pull on the switch to lower or raise the window. 1-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express Down Windows To program the window: Window Lockout Windows that have the 1. Close all doors with the ignition o (Window Lockout): The window express‐down feature allow the in the ACC/ACCESSORY, lockout switch is located on the windows to be lowered without ON/RUN position, or when driver door. This feature prevents holding the switch. Press the Retained Accessory the rear passenger windows from window switch fully and release Power (RAP) is active. operating, except from the driver it to activate the express‐down See Retained Accessory position. Press the switch to turn feature. The express mode can Power (RAP) on page 8‑29. the lockout feature on or off. An be canceled at any time by briefly 2. Press and continue to hold the indicator light shows the feature pressing, or pulling the switch. window switch until the window is on. is fully open. Programming the Power Sun Visors Windows 3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close the window. Pull the sun visor down to block Programming the power windows glare. Detach the sun visor from the may be necessary if the vehicle's Continue to hold it briefly after the window is fully closed. center mount and slide it along the battery has been disconnected or rod from side-to-side to cover the discharged. driver or passenger side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. It can be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this position also. Keys, Doors and Windows 1-19

Roof Express-open/Express-close Press and release the front or Sunroof rear of the driver side switch to express-open or express-close the On vehicles with a sunroof, the sunroof. switches used to operate it are located on the headliner above the Anti-Pinch Feature rearview mirror. The ignition must be If an object is in the path of the in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, sunroof when it is closing, the or in Retained Accessory Power anti-pinch feature detects the object (RAP) to operate the sunroof. See and stops the sunroof from closing Ignition Positions on page 8 28 and ‑ at the point of the obstruction. The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . Press and hold the front or sunroof then returns to the full-open on page 8‑29. rear of the driver side switch to open or close the sunroof. The position. sunshade automatically opens with the sunroof, but must be closed manually. . Press and hold the front of the passenger side switch to vent the sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the switch to close. 1-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

2 NOTES Seats and Restraints 2-1

Safety System Check ...... 2-24 Child Restraints Seats and Safety Belt Care ...... 2-24 Older Children ...... 2-41 Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System Infants and Young Parts After a Crash ...... 2-24 Children ...... 2-43 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-46 Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-48 Head Restraints Airbag System ...... 2-25 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-27 for Children (LATCH Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) ...... 2-50 Seat Adjustment ...... 2-3 Inflate? ...... 2-29 Replacing LATCH System Power Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash ...... 2-55 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-6 Inflate? ...... 2-31 Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat ) ...... 2-56 Heated Front Seats ...... 2-8 Restrain? ...... 2-31 Securing Child Restraints What Will You See After an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-58 Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-32 Rear Seats ...... 2-9 Passenger Sensing System ...... 2-33 Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Safety Belts ...... 2-10 Vehicle ...... 2-38 How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the Properly ...... 2-13 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-38 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 Airbag System Check ...... 2-40 Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System Pregnancy ...... 2-23 Parts After a Crash ...... 2-40 Safety Belt Extender ...... 2-23 2-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front and rear seats have head restraints in all outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. 2. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The vehicle's rear seat head restraints are not adjustable. Seats and Restraints 2-3

To adjust the seat position: Front Seats { WARNING 1. Pull the handle located at the Seat Adjustment You can lose control of the front of the seat. vehicle if you try to adjust a 2. Move the seat forward or manual driver's seat while the backward to adjust the seat vehicle is moving. The sudden position. movement could startle and 3. Release the handle to stop the confuse you, or make you push a seat from moving. pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 2-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment Adjust the power seat by moving the control (B) forward or rearward, up or down, or by pressing the top or bottom of control (E). Adjust the seatback by moving the control (C) forward or rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑6 for more information. Adjust the lumbar support by using the control (D). See Lumbar Adjustment on page 2‑6 for Driver Seat with Power Seat more information. Control, Power Lumbar, Driver Seat with Power Seat Memory Seats and Manual Recline shown Control, Power Recline, The vehicle may have a memory and Power Lumbar shown D: Power Lumbar Adjustment seat allowing saved and recalled A: Memory Seat Adjustment E: Power Seat Adjustment seat settings. Controls (A) are F: Manual Recline Adjustment located on the outboard side of B: Power Seat Adjustment the seat. C: Power Recline Adjustment On vehicles with power seats, the controls are located on the outboard D: Power Lumbar Adjustment side of the seats. Seats and Restraints 2-5

To save: Entry using the Remote Keyless Memory Seat recall may stop if 1. Adjust the driver seat, including Entry (RKE) transmitter with the seat is blocked. Remove the the seatback recliner, and both the remote recall feature on obstruction and then press the outside mirrors, to a comfortable automatically adjusts the seat and memory button again. If the memory position. mirrors. There is no adjustment function does not work properly, see when the position has not been your dealer/retailer for service. 2. Press and hold the MEM button changed by another seating and button 1 at the same time position. Easy Exit Seat until a beep indicates the If the easy exit seat feature is on in position is stored. When the remote recall feature is on, the seat and mirror position will the Driver Information Center (DIC), A second seating and mirror be stored when the ignition is turned automatic adjustment occurs when position can be programmed by to LOCK/OFF. It is stored according the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF repeating the above steps and to the RKE transmitter used to start and the driver door is opened. The pressing button 2. the vehicle. driver seat moves back. To recall the memory positions, the To stop recall movement of the RKE See Vehicle Personalization on vehicle must be in P (Park). Press remote recall feature, press one of page 4‑39 for more information. and hold either button 1 or button 2 the power seat controls, memory corresponding to the desired driving buttons, or power mirror buttons. position. The seat, outside mirrors and pedals, if available move to the stored position. Releasing the button before the stored position is reached cancels the recall. 2-6 Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks { WARNING Power Lumbar Manual Reclining Seatbacks If either seatback is not locked, it Seats with power lumbar have { could move forward in a sudden controls located on the outboard WARNING stop or crash. That could cause side of the seat. See Power Seat You can lose control of the injury to the person sitting there. Adjustment on page 2‑4 for more Always push and pull on the information. vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the seatbacks to be sure they are Adjust lumbar support by using the vehicle is moving. The sudden locked. rocker switch (D) on the outboard movement could startle and side of the driver seat. Vehicles with manual reclining confuse you, or make you push a seatbacks have a lever on the Release the switch when the pedal when you do not want to. outboard side of the seat. Lift the seatback reaches the desired level Adjust the driver's seat only when of lumbar support. lever and move the seatback to the the vehicle is not moving. desired position, then release the lever. The seatback should not move when pushed or pulled. Seats and Restraints 2-7

Power Reclining Seatbacks { WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other Do not have a seatback reclined if injuries. your vehicle is moving. On vehicles with power reclining seatbacks, the switch is located on The lap belt cannot do its job the outboard side of the seat. See either. In a crash, the belt could Power Seat Adjustment on go up over your abdomen. The page 2‑4 for more information. belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could Move the switch forward or rearward cause serious internal injuries. to adjust the seatback. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. 2-8 Seats and Restraints

Heated Front Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, lower setting, and then the off the controls are located near the setting. The lights indicate three for climate controls. To operate the the highest setting and one for the { WARNING heated seats the ignition must be lowest. If you cannot feel temperature in ON/RUN. The passenger seat may take change or pain to the skin, the longer to heat up. seat heater may cause burns When Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) even at low temperatures. To transmitter is used to remote start reduce the risk of burns, people the vehicle, the front heated seats with such a condition should use will heat to the highest setting if it is care when using the seat heater, cold outside. When the ignition is especially for long periods of turned on with the key the heated time. Do not place anything on seat feature turns off. Press the the seat that insulates against button to turn the feature back on. heat, such as a blanket, cushion, See Remote Vehicle Start on cover or similar item. This may page 1‑5. cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat Press the button L to heat the seat heater may cause a burn or cushion and seatback. may damage the seat. Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press, the heated seat will change to the next Seats and Restraints 2-9

Rear Seats WARNING (Continued) Split Folding Seatbacks The person wearing the belt could With this feature, either side of the be seriously injured. After raising rear seatback can be folded down the rear seatback, always check for more cargo space. to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, { WARNING and are not twisted.

If either seatback is not locked, it Notice: Folding a rear seat with could move forward in a sudden the safety belts still fastened may stop or crash. That could cause cause damage to the seat or the 2. Lift the lever located on the top injury to the person sitting there. safety belts. Always unbuckle the of the seatback. Always push and pull on the safety belts and return them to seatbacks to be sure they are their normal stowed position 3. Fold the seatback forward. locked. before folding a rear seat. Keep the seat in the upright locked 1. To fold the seatback down: position when not in use. To recline the seatback: { WARNING The rear safety belts must be unbuckled and the front 1. Lift and hold the lever located on A safety belt that is improperly seatbacks are not reclined. top of the seatback. routed, not properly attached, 2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then or twisted will not provide the release the lever when the protection needed in a crash. seatback is in the desired (Continued) position. 2-10 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belts In most states and in all Canadian { WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why: describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride You never know if you will be in a properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside crash. If you do have a crash, you things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a serious one. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed. ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts. your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety seriously injured or killed. In the page 4‑15 for additional belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. information. same crash, you might not be, In most crashes buckling up does if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot! fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. Seats and Restraints 2-11

Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 2-12 Seats and Restraints

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down as vehicle, it could be the windshield... the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Seats and Restraints 2-13

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Safety Belts never drive far from home, why should I wear safety Properly Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? This section is only for people of after a crash if I am wearing a adult size. safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special A: You could be whether you are — one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and during and after an accident, so not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in the you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as vehicle, see Older Children on much greater if you are belted. bad drivers. page 2‑41 or Infants and Young And you can unbuckle a safety Most accidents occur within Children on page 2‑43. Follow belt, even if you are those rules for everyone's upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. And the greatest number of serious protection. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why injuries and deaths occur at It is very important for all occupants should I have to wear safety speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are systems only; so they work with wearing safety belts. safety belts — not instead of Occupants who are not buckled up them. Whether or not an airbag can be thrown out of the vehicle in a is provided, all occupants still crash. And they can strike others in have to buckle up to get the the vehicle who are wearing safety most protection. That is true not belts. only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 2-14 Seats and Restraints

First, before you or your touching the thighs. In a crash, this Q: What is wrong with this? passenger(s) wear a safety belt, applies force to the strong pelvic there is important information you bones and you would be less likely should know. to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just Seats and Restraints 2-15

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash, crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 2-16 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. buckle. Seats and Restraints 2-17

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward, under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also, the abdomen, not on the pelvic belt would apply too much force bones, and that could cause to the ribs, which are not as serious or fatal injuries. Be sure strong as shoulder bones. You the belt goes under the armrests. could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the the shoulder at all times. chest. 2-18 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. Seats and Restraints 2-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the All seating positions in the vehicle height that is right for you. have a lap-shoulder belt. See “Shoulder Belt Height The following instructions explain Adjustment” later in this section how to wear a lap-shoulder belt for instructions on use and properly. important safety information. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks. get twisted. Pull up on the latch plate to The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 2‑23. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on more slowly. the buckle so that the safety belt 5. To make the lap part tight, pull could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt. If the shoulder portion of a necessary. passenger belt is pulled out all It may be necessary to pull the way, the child restraint stitching on the safety belt locking feature may be engaged. through the latch plate to fully If this happens, let the belt go tighten the lap belt on smaller back all the way and start again. occupants. 2-20 Seats and Restraints

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the height so that the To unlatch the belt, push the button shoulder portion of the belt is Move the height adjuster up to the on the buckle. For outboard seating centered on the shoulder. The belt desired position by pushing up on positions, slide the latch plate up should be away from the face and the height adjuster. the safety belt webbing when the neck, but not falling off the shoulder. After the height adjuster is set to the safety belt is not in use. The latch Improper shoulder belt height desired position, try to move it up or plate should rest on the stitching on adjustment could reduce the down without pressing the release the safety belt, near the guide loop. effectiveness of the safety belt in a button (A) to make sure it has crash. locked into position. Press the release button to lower the height adjuster. Seats and Restraints 2-21

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. This vehicle has safety belt Guides Here is how to install a comfort pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder guide to the safety belt: occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer/ are part of the safety belt assembly. retailer. The guides may provide They can help tighten the safety added safety belt comfort for older belts during the early stages of a children who have outgrown booster moderate to severe frontal and near seats and for some adults. When frontal crash if the threshold installed and properly adjusted, the conditions for pretensioner comfort guide positions the belt activation are met. away from the neck and head. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, they need to be replaced, and other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt system may be required. See 1. Remove the guide from its Replacing Safety Belt System Parts storage pocket on the side of the After a Crash on page 2‑24. seatback. 2-22 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. The belt should not be twisted and insert the two edges of the and it should lie flat. The elastic belt into the slots of the guide. cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. Seats and Restraints 2-23

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them wear safety belts. properly. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described But if a safety belt is not long previously in this section. Make enough, your dealer/retailer will sure that the shoulder belt order you an extender. When you crosses the shoulder. go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender To remove and store the comfort will be long enough for you. To help guide, squeeze the belt edges avoid personal injury, do not let together so that the safety belt can someone else use it, and use it only be removed from the guide. Slide for the seat it is made to fit. The the guide back into its storage A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap extender has been designed for pocket located on the side of the adults. Never use it for securing seatback. portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 2-24 Seats and Restraints

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued) Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. belt reminder light, safety belts, safety belt systems are working buckles, latch plates, retractors and { WARNING properly after a crash, have them anchorages are working properly. inspected and any necessary Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In possible. that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to from doing its job. See your dealer/ provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of retailer to have it repaired. Torn or Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary. frayed safety belts may not protect soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that you in a crash. They can rip apart were used during any crash may under impact forces. If a belt is torn have been stressed or damaged. or frayed, get a new one right away. Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer/retailer to have the System Parts After a Make sure the safety belt reminder safety belt assemblies inspected or light is working. See Safety Belt Crash replaced. Reminders on page 4‑15 for more New parts and repairs may be information. { WARNING necessary even if the safety belt Keep safety belts clean and dry. system was not being used at the A crash can damage the safety See Safety Belt Care on time of the crash. belt system in the vehicle. page 2‑24. Have the safety belt pretensioners A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag crash. To help make sure the Readiness Light on page 4‑16. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-25

Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed { WARNING The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label airbags: near the deployment opening. Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word airbag might force that object . A frontal airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear on the middle toward a person. This could passenger. part of the steering wheel for the cause severe injury or even driver and on the instrument panel death. Secure objects away from . A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger. airbag for the driver. the area in which an airbag would With seat-mounted side impact inflate. For more information, see . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will Where Are the Airbags? on airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback page 2‑27 and Vehicle Load passenger. closest to the door. Limits on page 8‑24. . A roof-rail airbag for the driver With roof-rail airbags, the word and the passenger seated AIRBAG will appear along the trim. Airbags are designed to supplement directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety Even if you do not have a right front belts. Even though today's airbags . A roof-rail airbag for the right passenger seat in the vehicle there are also designed to help reduce front passenger and the is still an active frontal airbag in the the risk of injury from the force of an passenger seated directly right side of the instrument panel. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate behind the right front passenger. Do not place cargo in front of this very quickly to do their job. airbag. 2-26 Seats and Restraints

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, { WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag when You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very it inflates can be seriously killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants. belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑29. should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in your Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Children on page 2‑41 or Infants of hitting things inside the vehicle and Young Children on or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side page 2‑43. are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 2-27

Where Are the Airbags?

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger frontal Readiness Light on page 4‑16 for airbag is in the instrument panel on more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. middle of the steering wheel. 2-28 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put Side similar Side similar anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, and second passenger are in the side of the row outboard passengers are in the (Continued) seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows. Seats and Restraints 2-29

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at WARNING (Continued) different crash speeds. For Inflate? example: Do not use seat accessories Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits a stationary that block the inflation path of a inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate seat-mounted side impact airbag. or near-frontal crashes to help at a different crash speed than if Never secure anything to the roof reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. injuries mainly to the driver's or right of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that by routing a rope or tie down However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could through any door or window inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed opening. If you do, the path of an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object inflating roof-rail airbag will be threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform. blocked. are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall). should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. 2-30 Seats and Restraints

Thresholds can also vary with Seat-mounted side impact and deploy when either side of the specific vehicle design. roof-rail airbags are intended to vehicle is struck, or if the sensing Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in moderate to severe side system predicts that the vehicle is inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear crashes. In addition, these roof-rail about to roll over, or in a severe impacts, or in many side impacts. airbags are intended to inflate frontal impact. during a rollover or in a severe In addition, the vehicle has In any particular crash, no one can frontal impact. Seat-mounted side say whether an airbag should have dual-stage frontal airbags. impact and roof-rail airbags will Dual-stage airbags adjust the inflated simply because of the inflate if the crash severity is above damage to a vehicle or because of restraint according to crash severity. the system's designed threshold The vehicle has electronic frontal what the repair costs were. For level. The threshold level can vary frontal airbags, inflation is sensors, which help the sensing with specific vehicle design. system distinguish between a determined by what the vehicle hits, moderate frontal impact and a more Seat-mounted side impact airbags the angle of the impact, and how severe frontal impact. For moderate are not intended to inflate in frontal quickly the vehicle slows down. For frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags impacts, near-frontal impacts, seat-mounted side impact and inflate at a level less than full rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail roof-rail airbags, deployment is deployment. For more severe frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in determined by the location and impacts, full deployment occurs. rear impacts. A seat-mounted side severity of the side impact. In a impact airbag is intended to deploy rollover event, roof-rail airbag The vehicle has seat-mounted side on the side of the vehicle that is deployment is determined by the impact and roof-rail airbags. See struck. Both roof-rail airbags will direction of the roll. Airbag System on page 2‑25. Seats and Restraints 2-31

What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the Inflate? Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The rollover triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering capable roof-rail airbags are inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections. all part of the airbag module. Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal many types of collisions, primarily inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the because the occupant's motion is instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the not toward those airbags. See When seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body, stopping Should an Airbag Inflate? on there are airbag modules in the side the occupant more gradually. page 2‑29 for more information. of the front seatbacks closest to the Seat‐mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded door. For vehicles with roof-rail roof-rail airbags distribute the force as anything more than a supplement airbags, there are airbag modules in of the impact more evenly over the to safety belts. the ceiling of the vehicle, near the occupant's upper body. side windows that have occupant seating positions. 2-32 Seats and Restraints

What Will You See After You can lock the doors, turn off the { WARNING interior lamps and hazard warning an Airbag Inflates? flashers by using the controls for After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there those features. seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems inflate, they quickly deflate, so { WARNING quickly that some people may not for people with a history of even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in they deploy. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle airbag modules, see What Makes airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31. by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing concealed damage that could into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek the vehicle. be some smoke and dust coming medical attention. from the vents in the deflated Use caution if you should attempt airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may to restart the engine after a crash prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn has occurred. the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps and hazard the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate. Seats and Restraints 2-33

In many crashes severe enough to . The vehicle has a crash sensing inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on passenger airbag. page 12‑15 and Event Data Recorders on page 12‑15. . Airbags are designed to inflate United States only once. After an airbag . Let only qualified technicians inflates, you will need some new work on the airbag systems. parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer/retailer to help protect you in another for service. crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly Passenger Sensing Canada other parts. The service manual System The words ON and OFF, or the for your vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off, are visible to replace other parts. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are sensing system for the right front using remote start, if equipped, to passenger position. The passenger start the vehicle from a distance, airbag status indicator will be visible you may not see the system check. on the overhead console when the When the system check is vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑17. 2-34 Seats and Restraints

The passenger sensing system We recommend that children be turns off the right front passenger secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) frontal airbag under certain an infant or a child riding in a conditions. The driver airbag, rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front seat‐mounted side impact airbags riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger airbag inflates and the and the roof-rail airbags are not an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward affected by the passenger sensing seat; and children, who are large position. system. enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right works with sensors that are part of “Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no the right front passenger seat. The the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can sensors are designed to detect the the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not presence of a properly-seated if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual occupant and determine if the right circumstance, even though the front passenger frontal airbag { WARNING airbag is turned off. should be enabled (may inflate) or not. A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the children are safer when properly or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a secured in a rear seat in the correct passenger airbag inflates. This forward-facing child restraint in child restraint for their weight is because the back of the the right front seat, always move and size. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a child restraint can be seriously rear seat. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-35

The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is build. Everyone in the vehicle designed to turn off the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the who has outgrown child restraints passenger frontal airbag if: right front passenger frontal airbag should wear a safety belt anytime the system senses that a properly whether or not there . The right front passenger seat is — unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting is an airbag for that person. properly in the right front . The system determines that an passenger seat. { WARNING infant is present in a child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be If the airbag readiness light ever . A right front passenger takes enabled, the on indicator will light comes on and stays on, it means his/her weight off of the seat for and stay lit to remind you that the that something may be wrong a period of time. airbag is active. with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, . Or, if there is a critical problem For some children, including have the vehicle serviced right with the airbag system or the children in child restraints, and for away. See Airbag Readiness passenger sensing system. very small adults, the passenger Light on page 4‑16 for more When the passenger sensing sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal information, including important system has turned off the right front safety information. passenger frontal airbag, the off airbag, depending upon the indicator will light and stay lit to person’s seating posture and body remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑17. 2-36 Seats and Restraints

If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Child Restraint restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle seatback is not the vehicle. pushing the child restraint into 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion. from the seat such as blankets, Also make sure the child cushions, seat covers, seat restraint is not trapped under heaters, or seat massagers. the vehicle head restraint. If this 4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints provided by the child restraint on page 2‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in manufacturer and refer to 6. Restart the vehicle. the right front passenger seat, but Securing Child Restraints the off indicator is lit, it could be (Rear Seat ) on page 2‑56 or The passenger sensing system because that person is not sitting Securing Child Restraints (Front may or may not turn off the properly in the seat. If this happens, Passenger Seat) on page 2‑58. airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 2-37 use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the system to detect that person and System Operation performance of the passenger enable the right front passenger sensing system. Here is how: frontal airbag: Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat . The passenger sensing system 1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger 2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the the seat. If this happens, the off cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See indicator will be lit, and the heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” airbag readiness light on the in the Index for additional instrument panel will also be lit. 3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance . upright position. Liquid pooled on the seat that of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it 4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such as on) the passenger airbag while a extended. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat child restraint or child occupant 5. Restart the vehicle and have the massagers can affect how well is on the seat. If the passenger person remain in this position for the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that indicator will be lit. indicator is lit. you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag page 2‑38 for more information Readiness Light on page 4‑16 about modifications that can affect for important safety information. how the system operates. 2-38 Seats and Restraints

The on indicator may be lit if an Your dealer/retailer and the service Adding Equipment to the object, such as a briefcase, manual have information about handbag, grocery bag, laptop or servicing the vehicle and the airbag Airbag-Equipped Vehicle other electronic device, is put on an system. To purchase a service Q: Is there anything I might add unoccupied seat. If this is not manual, see Service Publications to or change about the vehicle desired remove the object from Ordering Information on page 12‑12. that could keep the airbags the seat. from working properly? { WARNING A: Yes. If you add things that { WARNING change the vehicle's frame, For up to 10 seconds after the bumper system, height, front end Stowing of articles under the ignition is turned off and the or side sheet metal, they may passenger seat or between the battery is disconnected, an airbag keep the airbag system from passenger seat cushion and can still inflate during improper working properly. Changing or seatback may interfere with the service. You can be injured if you moving any parts of the front proper operation of the passenger are close to an airbag when it seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensing and diagnostic module, They are probably part of the steering wheel, instrument Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow panel, roof-rail airbag modules, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and ceiling headliner or pillar garnish make sure the person performing trim, overhead console, front Airbags affect how the vehicle work for you is qualified to do so. sensors, side impact sensors, should be serviced. There are parts rollover sensor module, or airbag of the airbag system in several wiring can affect the operation of places around the vehicle. the airbag system. Seats and Restraints 2-39

In addition, the vehicle has a This could either prevent proper Q: Because I have a disability, passenger sensing system for deployment of the passenger I have to get my vehicle the right front passenger airbag(s) or prevent the modified. How can I find out position, which includes sensors passenger sensing system whether this will affect my that are part of the passenger from properly turning off the airbag system? seat. The passenger sensing passenger airbag(s). See A: If you have questions, call system may not operate properly Passenger Sensing System on Customer Assistance. The if the original seat trim is page 2‑33. phone numbers and addresses replaced with non-GM covers, If you have questions, call for Customer Assistance are in upholstery or trim, or with GM Customer Assistance. The Step Two of the Customer covers, upholstery or trim phone numbers and addresses Satisfaction Procedure in this designed for a different vehicle. for Customer Assistance are in manual. See Customer Any object, such as an Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on aftermarket seat heater or a Satisfaction Procedure in this page 12‑1. comfort enhancing pad or manual. See Customer device, installed under or on top Satisfaction Procedure on In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information of the seat fabric, could also page 12‑1. interfere with the operation of about the location of the airbag the passenger sensing system. If the vehicle has rollover sensors, sensing and diagnostic roof-rail airbags, see Different module and airbag wiring. Size Tires and Wheels on page 9‑60 for additional important information. 2-40 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System WARNING (Continued) The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash regularly scheduled maintenance or To help make sure your airbag replacement. Make sure the airbag { WARNING systems are working properly readiness light is working. See after a crash, have them Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag inspected and any necessary page 4‑16 for more information. systems in your vehicle. replacements made as soon as Notice: If an airbag covering is A damaged airbag system possible. damaged, opened, or broken, the may not work properly and may airbag may not work properly. not protect you and your If an airbag inflates, you will need to Do not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting replace airbag system parts. See coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. your dealer/retailer for service. opened or broken airbag covers, (Continued) If the airbag readiness light stays on have the airbag covering and/or after the vehicle is started or comes airbag module replaced. For the on when you are driving, the airbag location of the airbag modules, system may not work properly. Have see What Makes an Airbag the vehicle serviced right away. See Inflate? on page 2‑31. See your Airbag Readiness Light on dealer/retailer for service. page 4‑16 for more information. Seats and Restraints 2-41

Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that Safety Belt Comfort Guides” come with the booster seat, state under Lap-Shoulder Belt on the weight and height limitations for page 2‑19 for more information. Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat If the shoulder belt still does not with a lap-shoulder belt until the rest on the shoulder, then return child passes the below fit test: to the booster seat. . Sit all the way back on the seat. . Does the lap belt fit low and Do the knees bend at the seat snug on the hips, touching the edge? If yes, continue. If no, thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. return to the booster seat. . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. . Can proper safety belt fit be Does the shoulder belt rest on maintained for the length of the the shoulder? If yes, continue. trip? If yes, continue. If no, If no, try using the rear safety return to the booster seat. belt comfort guide. See “Rear

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts. 2-42 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is the proper way to In a crash, children who are not wear safety belts? buckled up can strike other people A: An older child should wear a who are buckled up, or can be lap-shoulder belt and get the thrown out of the vehicle. Older additional restraint a shoulder children need to use safety belts belt can provide. The shoulder properly. belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit { WARNING snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Never do this. This applies belt force to the Never allow two children to wear child's pelvic bones in a crash. the same safety belt. The safety It should never be worn over the belt can not properly spread the { WARNING abdomen, which could cause impact forces. In a crash, the two severe or even fatal internal children can be crushed together Never do this. injuries in a crash. and seriously injured. A safety Never allow a child to wear the Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort belt must be used by only one safety belt with the shoulder belt Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on person at a time. behind their back. A child can be page 2 19. ‑ seriously injured by not wearing According to accident statistics, the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a children and infants are safer when crash, the child would not be properly restrained in a child restrained by the shoulder belt. restraint system or infant restraint (Continued) system secured in a rear seating position. Seats and Restraints 2-43

Infants and Young WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Children The child could move too far Everyone in a vehicle needs tighten. Never leave children forward increasing the chance of protection! This includes infants and unattended in a vehicle and never head and neck injury. The child all other children. Neither the allow children to play with the might also slide under the lap distance traveled nor the age and safety belts. belt. The belt force would then be size of the traveler changes the applied right on the abdomen. need, for everyone, to use safety Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer That could cause serious or fatal restraints. In fact, the law in every protection for adults and older injuries. The shoulder belt should state in the United States and in children, but not for young children go over the shoulder and across every Canadian province says and infants. Neither the vehicle's the chest. children up to some age must be safety belt system nor its airbag restrained while in a vehicle. system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride { WARNING in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate Children can be seriously injured child restraints. or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to (Continued) 2-44 Seats and Restraints

Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, WARNING (Continued) or can be thrown out of the vehicle. It is also better to secure a { WARNING forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a Never do this. forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move Never hold an infant or a child the front passenger seat as far while riding in a vehicle. Due to back as it will go. crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only { WARNING 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a Never do this. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's Children who are up against, arms. An infant should be or very close to, any airbag when secured in an appropriate it inflates can be seriously injured restraint. or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 2-45

Q: What are the different types of child restraint. In addition, there add-on child restraints? are many kinds of restraints { WARNING A: Add-on child restraints, which available for children with special needs. A young child's hip bones are still are purchased by the vehicle's so small that the vehicle's regular owner, are available in four basic safety belt may not remain low { WARNING types. Selection of a particular on the hip bones, as it should. restraint should take into To reduce the risk of neck and Instead, it may settle up around consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash, weight, height, and age but also head injury during a crash, infants the belt would apply force on a whether or not the restraint will need complete support. This is body area that is unprotected by be compatible with the motor because an infant's neck is not vehicle in which it will be used. fully developed and its head any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal For most basic types of child weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, injuries. To reduce the risk of restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a different models available. When an infant in a rear-facing child crash, young children should purchasing a child restraint, be restraint settles into the restraint, always be secured in appropriate sure it is designed to be used in so the crash forces can be a motor vehicle. If it is, the distributed across the strongest child restraints. restraint will have a label saying part of an infant's body, the back that it meets federal motor and shoulders. Infants should vehicle safety standards. always be secured in rear-facing The restraint manufacturer's child restraints. instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular 2-46 Seats and Restraints

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child surface against the back of the to see out the window. infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. Seats and Restraints 2-47

Securing an Add-On Child the LATCH system. See Lower Securing the Child Within Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children the Child Restraint (LATCH System) on page 2‑50 for { WARNING more information. Children can be { WARNING endangered in a crash if the child A child can be seriously injured or restraint is not properly secured in A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child the vehicle. killed in a crash if the child is not restraint is not properly secured in When securing an add-on child properly secured in the child the vehicle. Secure the child restraint, refer to the instructions restraint. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle that come with the restraint which properly following the instructions using the vehicle's safety belt or may be on the restraint itself or in a that came with that child restraint. LATCH system, following the booklet, or both, and to this manual. instructions that came with that The child restraint instructions are child restraint and the instructions important, so if they are not in this manual. available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured the child restraint must be secured child restraint can move around in a in the vehicle. Child restraint collision or sudden stop and injure systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by in the vehicle — even when no child is in it. 2-48 Seats and Restraints

Where to Put the { WARNING WARNING (Continued) Restraint According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag properly restrained in a child or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This forward-facing child restraint in system secured in a rear seating is because the back of the the right front seat, always move position. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to We recommend that children and airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a child restraints be secured in a rear child restraint can be seriously rear seat. seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger airbag inflates and the a child riding in a forward-facing on page 2‑33 for additional child seat; an older child riding in a passenger seat is in a forward information. booster seat; and children, who are position. large enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a A label on your sun visor says, system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your “Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no child restraint to make sure it is the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle. if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual If the vehicle does not have a rear circumstance, even though it is seat that will accommodate a turned off. rear-facing child restraint, we (Continued) recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be transported in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off. Seats and Restraints 2-49

Wherever you install a child Configurations for Use of restraint, be sure to secure the Child Restraints child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to A. Child restraint or occupant using properly secure any child restraint in safety belt your vehicle — even when no child is in it. A. Child restraint using LATCH If you need to secure more than one B. Occupant prohibited child restraint in the rear seat, review the following illustrations. Depending on where you place the child restraint or the size of the A. Child restraint or occupant using child restraint, you may not be able safety belt to access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for B. Child restraint using LATCH additional passengers or child A. Child restraint using LATCH restraints. B. Occupant prohibited C. Child restraint or occupant using safety belt 2-50 Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors a top tether, you must also use Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top This system is designed to make tether and anchor. installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a child Lower anchors (A) are metal bars the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint lower anchors for each LATCH with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with seating position that will Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child accommodate a child restraint child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The with lower attachments (B). using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle. that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. Seats and Restraints 2-51

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow A top tether (A, C) anchors the the instructions for your child Rear Seat top of the child restraint to the restraint. vehicle. A top tether anchor is built i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating into the vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors. attachment (B) on the child restraint j (Lower Anchor): Seating connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors. the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of The rear outboard seating positions the child restraint during driving or in have exposed metal anchors a crash. located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. 2-52 Seats and Restraints

Be sure to use an anchor located on Securing a Child Restraint the same side of the vehicle as the Designed for the LATCH seating position where the child System restraint will be placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a { WARNING position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires If a LATCH-type child restraint is that the top tether be attached, or if not attached to anchors, the child the instructions that come with the restraint will not be able to protect child restraint say that the top tether the child correctly. In a crash, the must be attached. child could be seriously injured or According to accident statistics, killed. Install a LATCH-type child Top Tether Anchors children and infants are safer when restraint properly using the The top tether anchors for each rear properly restrained in a child anchors, or use the vehicle's seating position are located on the restraint system or infant restraint safety belts to secure the back of the rear seatback. You may system secured in a rear seating restraint, following the instructions need to adjust the rear compartment position. See Where to Put the that came with the child restraint storage panel/cover in the rear Restraint on page 2‑48 for and the instructions in this cargo area to access the anchors. additional information. manual. Seats and Restraints 2-53

This system is designed to make { WARNING WARNING (Continued) installation of child restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not Do not attach more than one child the shoulder belt all the way out use the vehicle's safety belts. restraint to a single anchor. of the retractor to set the lock, Instead use the vehicle's anchors Attaching more than one child if your vehicle has one, after the and child restraint attachments to restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. secure the restraints. Some cause the anchor or attachment restraints also use another vehicle to come loose or even break Notice: Do not let the LATCH anchor to secure a top tether. during a crash. A child or others attachments rub against the 1. Attach and tighten the lower could be injured. To reduce the vehicle’s safety belts. This may attachments to the lower risk of serious or fatal injuries damage these parts. If necessary, anchors. If the child restraint during a crash, attach only one move buckled safety belts to does not have lower child restraint per anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments or the desired attachments. seating position does not have Do not fold the empty rear seat lower anchors, secure the child { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This restraint with the top tether and could damage the safety belt or the safety belts. Refer to your Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the child restraint manufacturer or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, instructions and the instructions wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat. in this manual. the safety belt continues to Make sure to attach the child 1.1. Find the lower anchors for tighten. Buckle any unused safety restraint at the proper anchor the desired seating belts behind the child restraint so location. position. children cannot reach them. Pull (Continued) 2-54 Seats and Restraints

1.2. Put the child restraint on 2.2. Route, attach and tighten the seat. the top tether according to 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower your child restraint attachments on the child instructions and the restraint to the lower following instructions: anchors. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and If the position you are using the following steps: does not have a headrest 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Seats and Restraints 2-55

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash, head restraint and you are head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route the system inspected and any the tether around the the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made as headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. soon as possible. 3. Push and pull the child restraint If the vehicle has the LATCH system in different directions to be sure and it was being used during a it is secure. crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. 2-56 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have (Rear Seat ) a top tether, and that the tether be When securing a child restraint in a attached. rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when System) on page 2‑50 for how and and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 2‑48. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on Children (LATCH System) on necessary. page 2‑50 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show the instructions that come with the you how. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Seats and Restraints 2-57

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 2‑50 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top tighten the lap portion of the belt tether anchor, disconnect it. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 2-58 Seats and Restraints

Armrest Retaining Strap center armrest before installing a Remove the armrest retaining strap rear‐facing child restraint in the before installing a forward facing { WARNING second row center seat position. child restraint in the center seat position, as it may interfere with the A rear center armrest that is not attachment of the top tether to the properly stowed and secured top tether anchor on the seatback. could fall forward during a sudden stop or collision. The armrest Securing Child Restraints could contact an infant secured in (Front Passenger Seat) a rear facing child restraint in the ‐ This vehicle has airbags. A rear center seat position. Fasten the seat is a safer place to secure a retaining strap onto the stowed forward-facing child restraint. See armrest before installing a rear‐ Where to Put the Restraint on facing child restraint in the rear page 2‑48. center seat position. In addition, the vehicle has a Stow the rear seat center armrest. passenger sensing system which is Attach the retaining strap to the designed to turn off the right front armrest loop (A) and to the passenger frontal airbag under center top tether anchor on the certain conditions. See Passenger seatback (B). Make sure the Sensing System on page 2‑33 and retaining strap's clips are firmly Passenger Airbag Status Indicator attached. on page 4‑17 for more information, When new, the vehicle's glove box Install the rear-facing child including important safety materials included an armrest restraint using the child restraint information. retaining strap. Use it to secure the manufacturer's instructions and the instructions described previously. Seats and Restraints 2-59

A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH “Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not System) on page 2‑50 for how if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual and where to install the child circumstance, even though it is restraint using LATCH. If a child { WARNING turned off. restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Secure rear-facing child restraints A child in a rear-facing child Lower Anchors and Tethers for in a rear seat, even if the restraint can be seriously injured Children (LATCH System) on airbag is off. If you secure a or killed if the right front page 2‑50 for top tether anchor forward-facing child restraint in passenger airbag inflates. This locations. the right front seat, always move is because the back of the the front passenger seat as far Do not secure a child seat in a rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to position without a top tether anchor be very close to the inflating if a national or local law requires secure the child restraint in a airbag. A child in a forward-facing that the top tether be anchored, or if rear seat. child restraint can be seriously the instructions that come with the injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System child restraint say that the top strap passenger airbag inflates and the on page 2‑33 for additional must be anchored. passenger seat is in a forward information. In Canada, the law requires that position. forward-facing child restraints have If the vehicle does not have a Even if the passenger sensing a top tether, and that the tether be rear seat that will accommodate attached. system has turned off the right a rear‐facing child restraint, a front passenger frontal airbag, no rear‐facing child restraint should system is fail-safe. No one can not be installed in the vehicle, even (Continued) if the airbag is off. 2-60 Seats and Restraints

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator on the 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt passenger airbag status buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to indicator should light and stay lit set the lock. when you start the vehicle. See Position the release button on Passenger Airbag Status the buckle, so that the safety Indicator on page 4‑17. belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Seats and Restraints 2-61

If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see “If has a top tether, follow the the On Indicator is Lit for a Child child restraint manufacturer's Restraint” under Passenger Sensing instructions regrading the use System on page 2‑33 for more of the top tether. See Lower information. Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint, Children (LATCH System) on unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and page 2‑50 for more information. let it return to the stowed position. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 6. To tighten the belt, push down If the airbags are off, the off on the child restraint, pull the indicator in the passenger airbag shoulder portion of the belt to status indicator will come on and tighten the lap portion of the belt stay on when the vehicle is started. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 2-62 Seats and Restraints

2 NOTES Storage 3-1

Storage Storage Additional Storage Compartments Features Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 3-1 Instrument Panel Storage Cargo Cover Glove Box ...... 3-1 There may be a storage For vehicles with a cargo cover, use Cupholders ...... 3-1 compartment on the instrument it to cover items in the rear of the Center Console Storage ...... 3-1 panel. Pull the handle to open. vehicle. Additional Storage Features To remove the cover from the Cargo Cover ...... 3-1 Glove Box vehicle, pull both ends toward each Convenience Net ...... 3-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on other. To reinstall, place each end of the lever. the cover in the holes behind the Roof Rack System rear seat. Roof Rack System ...... 3-2 Cupholders Convenience Net Two cupholders are in the center console. Cupholders may be located This vehicle may have a in the second row seat armrest. To convenience net located in the rear access, pull the armrest down. of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo tie-downs for storing small loads. Center Console Storage Do not use the net to store heavy For vehicles with center console loads. storage, use the lever on the front to open. 3-2 Storage

Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the { WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load cargo If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to than the roof rack— like paneling, fasten cargo securely. plywood, or a mattress— the wind can catch it while the vehicle is To prevent damage or loss of cargo being driven. The item being when driving, check to make sure cross rails and cargo are securely carried could be violently torn off, fastened. Loading cargo on the roof and this could cause a collision, rack will make the vehicle's center The roof rack crossrails can be and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, locked in four positions along the carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden roof rack side rails. than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers, vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of Certified accessory carrier. control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, This vehicle may be equipped with a occasionally stop the vehicle to roof rack. For roof racks that do not make sure the cargo remains in its have cross rails included, GM place. Do not exceed the maximum Certified cross rails can be vehicle capacity when loading the purchased as an accessory. See vehicle. For more information on your dealer/retailer for additional vehicle capacity and loading, see information. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24. Storage 3-3

Try sliding the crossrails forward and backward to ensure that they are correctly secured and that the levers stay tight to the cross rails. Do not stand on the plastic lower body panels when loading cargo on the luggage carrier. When the roof rack is not in use, lock one crossrail at the furthest forward position and lock the other crossrail at the furthest rearward position to reduce wind noise. Lift the lever to release and move Push the lever down to completely the crossrail. engage into the side rail holes. Position the crossrail on both sides Slide the crossrails back and forth of the vehicle at the same time. until the lock pins engage in the holes and a click is heard as the pins align and the crossrail locks. 3-4 Storage

2 NOTES Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instruments and Warning Lights, Gages, and Brake System Warning Indicators Light ...... 4-21 Controls Warning Lights, Gages, and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Indicators ...... 4-12 Warning Light ...... 4-22 Instrument Cluster ...... 4-13 Traction Off Light ...... 4-22 ® Instrument Panel Overview Speedometer ...... 4-14 StabiliTrak OFF Light ...... 4-23 Odometer ...... 4-14 Traction Control System Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4 ® Tachometer ...... 4-14 (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 4-23 Controls Fuel Gage ...... 4-14 Tire Pressure Light ...... 4-24 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6 Engine Coolant Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-24 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 4-6 Temperature Gage ...... 4-15 Fuel Economy Light ...... 4-25 Horn ...... 4-7 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-15 Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-25 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 4-16 Security Light ...... 4-26 Rear Window Wiper/ Passenger Airbag Status High-Beam on Light ...... 4-26 Washer ...... 4-8 Indicator ...... 4-17 Fog Lamp Light ...... 4-26 Compass ...... 4-9 Charging System Light ...... 4-18 Lamps on Reminder ...... 4-27 Clock (With Date Display) . . . 4-10 Malfunction Cruise Control Light ...... 4-27 Clock (Without Date Indicator Lamp ...... 4-18 Display) ...... 4-11 Power Outlets ...... 4-11 4-2 Instruments and Controls

Information Displays Ride Control System Driver Information Messages ...... 4-36 Center (DIC) ...... 4-27 Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-37 Safety Belt Messages ...... 4-37 Vehicle Messages Anti-Theft Alarm System Vehicle Messages ...... 4-31 Messages ...... 4-37 Battery Voltage and Charging Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-37 Messages ...... 4-32 Tire Messages ...... 4-37 Brake System Messages . . . . 4-32 Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-38 Compass Messages ...... 4-32 Vehicle Reminder Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-32 Messages ...... 4-38 Door Ajar Messages ...... 4-33 Engine Cooling System Vehicle Personalization Messages ...... 4-33 Vehicle Personalization ...... 4-39 Engine Oil Messages ...... 4-34 OnStar® System Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-34 ® Fuel System Messages ...... 4-35 OnStar System ...... 4-44 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-35 Object Detection System Messages ...... 4-35 Instruments and Controls 4-3

2 NOTES 4-4 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel Overview Instruments and Controls 4-5

A. Air Vents on page 7‑6. J. Instrument Panel Illumination V. Driver Information Center B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals Control on page 5‑4. Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 27. on page 5‑3. Exterior Lamp K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on ‑ Controls on page 5‑1. Fog page 4‑6. W. Power Door Locks on Lamps on page 5 3 page 1 7. Hazard Warning ‑ L. Horn on page 4‑7. ‑ (If Equipped). Flashers on page 5‑2. Safety M. Steering Wheel Controls on C. Instrument Cluster on Locks on page 1‑7. page 4‑6. page 4‑13. X. Glove Box on page 3‑1. N. Ignition Positions on page 8‑28. D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 4‑7. Rear Window O. Climate Control Systems on Wiper/Washer on page 4‑8. page 7‑1 or Automatic Climate Control System on page 7‑3. E. Power Door Unlock/Lock. See Power Door Locks on P. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into page 1‑7. Park on page 8‑32. F. Instrument Panel Storage on Q. Fuel Economy Mode on page 3‑1. page 8‑37 (If Equipped). G. Safety Lock. See Power Door R. StabiliTrak System on Locks on page 1‑7. page 8‑43. H. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11. S. Cupholders on page 3‑1. Navigation System (If Equipped). T. Power Outlets on page 4‑11. See Navigation System Manual. U. CD Player on page 6‑19. I. Cruise Control on page 8‑44. 4-6 Instruments and Controls

Controls To adjust the steering wheel: Steering Wheel Controls 1. Pull the lever down. Steering Wheel 2. Move the steering wheel up or Adjustment down and in or out to a comfortable position. 3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Instruments and Controls 4-7 b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles _ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to Windshield Wiper/Washer with an OnStar®, Bluetooth®, select an audio source. or navigation system, press to Toggle up or down to select the next interact with those systems. See ® or previous favorite radio station or OnStar System on page 4‑44, CD track, DVD, if equipped, track, Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42 or MP3 track. or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (Voice + x − (Volume): Press + to Recognition) on page 6‑46 or increase the volume, press − to Bluetooth (Navigation) on decrease the volume. page 6‑58, or the separate navigation manual for more Horn information. Press near the horn symbols or $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to press on the steering wheel pad to silence the vehicle speakers only. sound the horn. The windshield wiper/washer lever Press again to turn the sound on. is located on the right side of the For vehicles with OnStar or steering column. Bluetooth systems, press to reject Move the lever to one of the an incoming call, or end a following positions: current call. 8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the lever to z and then release. The wipers stop after one wipe. ( (Off): Turns the wipers off. 4-8 Instruments and Controls

& (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Windshield Washer Rear Window The time between wipes can be Pull the lever toward you to spray Wiper/Washer adjusted. Turn the & band up for washer fluid on the windshield. The The rear wiper controls are on the more frequent wipes or down for spray continues until the lever is end of the windshield wiper lever. less frequent wipes. released. The wipers will run a few times. See Washer Fluid on 1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. page 9‑22 for information on filling 2 (High Speed): Fast wipes. the windshield washer fluid Clear snow and ice from the wiper reservoir. blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or { WARNING thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. See Wiper In freezing weather, do not use Blade Replacement on page 9‑29. your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer Heavy snow or ice can overload the fluid can form ice on the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will windshield, blocking your vision. stop the motor until it cools down. Press the upper or lower portion of the button to control the rear wiper and rear wiper delay. Instruments and Controls 4-9

The system turns off when the Avoid covering the GPS antenna for button is returned to the middle { WARNING long periods of time with objects position. that may interfere with the antenna's In freezing weather, do not use ability to receive a satellite signal. Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous your washer until the windshield rear window wipes. See Multi-Band Antenna on is warmed. Otherwise the washer page 6‑18 for the location of the 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a fluid can form ice on the vehicle's antennas. The compass delay between wipes. windshield, blocking your vision. system is designed to operate for a = (Rear Washer): Push the certain number of miles or degrees windshield wiper lever forward to Compass of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the spray washer fluid on the rear The vehicle may have a compass compass display shows CAL, drive window. The lever returns to its display on the Driver Information the vehicle for a short distance in an starting position when released. Center (DIC). The compass receives open area where it can receive a its heading and other information The windshield washer reservoir is GPS signal. The compass system from Global Positioning used for the windshield and the rear will automatically determine when System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, window. Check the fluid level in the GPS signal is restored and provide and vehicle speed information. reservoir if either washer is not a heading again. See Compass working. See Washer Fluid on Messages on page 4‑32 for more page 9‑22. information on the messages that may be displayed for the compass. 4-10 Instruments and Controls

Clock (With Date Display) 6. To save the time or date Setting the Month & Day and return to the Time and Format The infotainment system controls, Date Settings menu, press located on the instrument panel, are 1. Turn the infotainment the 0 BACK button at any time used to access the time and date system ON. settings through the menu system. or press the MENU/SEL knob after adjusting the minutes 2. Press the CONFIG button and See Operation on page 6‑7 for select Time and Date Settings. information about how to use the or year. menu system. Setting the 12/24 Hour Format 3. Highlight Month & Day Format. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to Setting the Time and Date 1. Turn the infotainment select MM/DD (month/day) or system ON. 1. Turn the infotainment DD/MM (day/month). system ON. 2. Press the CONFIG button and Setting the Auto Time Adjust 2. Press the CONFIG button and select Time and Date Settings. select Time and Date Settings. 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. 1. Turn the infotainment system ON. 3. Select Set Time or Set Date. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to select the 12 hour or 24 hour 2. Press the CONFIG button and 4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select Time and Date Settings. adjust the highlighted value. display format. 3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust. 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to select the next value. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to turn Auto Time Adjust on or off. 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to select Time Zone, and then select the Time Zone. 6. Press the MENU/SEL knob to turn Daylight Savings on or off. Instruments and Controls 4-11

Clock (Without Date 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to Power Outlets select the next value. Display) The accessory power outlets can be 6. To save the time and return to used to connect electrical The infotainment system controls, the Time Settings menu, press located on the instrument panel, are 0 equipment, such as a cellular used to access the time and date the BACK button at any time phone. settings through the menu system. or press the SELECT button There are four accessory power See Operation on page 6‑7 for after adjusting the minutes. outlets in the following locations, information about how to use the Setting the 12/24 Hour Format below the CD slot, inside the center menu system. console storage, on the rear of the 1. Turn the infotainment center console storage, and in the Setting the Time system ON. rear cargo compartment. 1. Turn the infotainment 2. Press the CONFIG button and system ON. select Time Settings, or press 2. Press the CONFIG button and the H button. select Time Settings, or press 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. the H button. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to 3. Select Set Time. select the 12 hour or 24 hour 4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to display format. adjust the highlighted value. 4-12 Instruments and Controls

To use the outlets, remove the Notice: Adding any electrical Warning Lights, cover. Close the outlet cover, when equipment to the vehicle can not in use. damage it or keep other Gages, and Indicators components from working as Notice: If electrical devices are Warning lights come on when there they should. The repairs would left plugged into a power outlet, could be a problem with a vehicle not be covered by the vehicle the battery may drain causing the function. Some warning lights come warranty. Do not use equipment vehicle not to start or damage to on briefly when the engine is started exceeding maximum amperage the battery. This would not be to indicate they are working. covered by the vehicle warranty. rating of 20 amperes. Check with Gages can indicate when there Always unplug all electrical your dealer/retailer before adding could be a problem with a vehicle devices when turning off the electrical equipment. function. Often gages and warning vehicle. When adding electrical equipment, lights work together to indicate a be sure to follow the installation Certain electrical accessories may problem with the vehicle. not be compatible with the instructions included with the When one of the warning lights accessory power outlets and could equipment. comes on and stays on while result in blown vehicle or adapter Notice: Improper use of the driving, or when one of the gages fuses. If you experience a problem, power outlet can cause damage shows there may be a problem, see your dealer/retailer for not covered by the vehicle check the section that explains what additional information on the warranty. Do not hang any type of to do. Follow this manual's advice. accessory power outlet. accessory or accessory bracket Waiting to do repairs can be costly from the plug because the power and even dangerous. outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only. Instruments and Controls 4-13

Instrument Cluster

US Version Shown, Canada Similar 4-14 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer one is set to the mileage of the old Fuel Gage odometer. If this is not possible, it is The vehicle's speed can be selected set at zero and a label is put on the to display on the Driver Information driver's door to show the old Center (DIC) and the speedometer mileage reading. in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). Telltales on Tachometer the speedometer indicate whether kilometers or miles were chosen. The tachometer displays the engine United States Canada The DIC will show the vehicles speed in revolutions per When the ignition is on, the fuel speed after the limit on the minute (rpm). gage shows about how much fuel speedometer has been reached. Notice: If the engine is operated the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. with the tachometer in the shaded Odometer warning area, the vehicle could An arrow on the fuel gage indicates be damaged, and the damages the side of the vehicle the fuel door The odometer shows how far the is on. vehicle has been driven, in either would not be covered by the kilometers or miles. vehicle warranty. Do not operate The gage will first indicate empty the engine with the tachometer in before the vehicle is out of fuel and This vehicle has a tamper-resistant the shaded warning area. the low fuel light comes on, but the odometer. If the vehicle needs a vehicle's fuel tank should be new odometer installed, the new filled soon. Instruments and Controls 4-15

Here are some situations that can Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders occur with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the Temperature Gage Driver Safety Belt Reminder fuel gage. Light . At the service station, the fuel There is a driver safety belt pump shuts off before the gage reminder light on the instrument reads full. panel cluster. . It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. United States Canada For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, This gage measures the but it actually took a little more temperature of the vehicle's or less than half the tank's engine. capacity to fill the tank. If the indicator needle moves to the hot side of the gage towards the When the engine is started this light . The gage moves a little while and a chime come on and stay on turning a corner or speeding up. colored line, the engine is too hot. A temperature indicator light will for several seconds to remind . The gage takes a few seconds turn on. drivers to fasten their safety belts. to stabilize after the ignition is The light also begins to flash. turned on, and goes back to If the vehicle has been operated under normal driving conditions, and This cycle repeats if the driver empty when the ignition is remains unbuckled and the vehicle turned off. the temperature indicator light comes on, pull off the road, stop the is moving. vehicle and turn off the engine as If the driver safety belt is already soon as possible. buckled, neither the light nor chime come on. 4-16 Instruments and Controls

Passenger Safety Belt If the passenger safety belt is Reminder Light buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The passenger safety belt reminder light is by the passenger airbag The front passenger safety belt status indicator. warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery The airbag readiness light comes on bag, laptop or other electronic and stays on for several seconds device. To turn off the warning light when the vehicle is started. Then and or chime, remove the object the light turns off. from the seat or buckle the safety belt. { WARNING When the engine is started this light If the airbag readiness light stays and the chime come on and stay on Airbag Readiness Light on after the vehicle is started or for several seconds to remind the This light shows if there is an comes on while driving, it means passenger to fasten their safety belt. electrical problem. The system The light also begins to flash. the airbag system might not be check includes the airbag sensor, working properly. The airbags in This cycle repeats if the passenger the pretensioners, the airbag the vehicle might not inflate in a remains unbuckled and the vehicle modules, the wiring and the crash crash, or they could even inflate is moving. sensing and diagnostic module. For without a crash. To help avoid more information on the airbag injury, have the vehicle serviced system, see Airbag System on right away. page 2‑25. Instruments and Controls 4-17

Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. If you are using If, after several seconds, both status remote start to start the vehicle from indicator lights remain on, or if there Indicator a distance, if equipped, you may not are no lights at all, there may be a The vehicle has a passenger see the system check. Then, after problem with the lights or the sensing system. See Passenger several more seconds, the status passenger sensing system. See Sensing System on page 2‑33 for indicator will light either ON or OFF, your dealer/retailer for service. important safety information. The or either the on or off symbol to let overhead console has a passenger you know the status of the right front { WARNING airbag status indicator. passenger frontal airbag. If the word ON or the on symbol is If the airbag readiness light ever lit on the passenger airbag status comes on and stays on, it means indicator, it means that the right that something may be wrong front passenger frontal airbag is with the airbag system. To help enabled (may inflate). avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right If the word OFF or the off symbol is away. See Airbag Readiness United States lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the Light on page 4‑16 for more passenger sensing system has information, including important turned off the right front passenger safety information. frontal airbag.

Canada When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds 4-18 Instruments and Controls

Charging System Light system. Have it checked by your Malfunction dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. Indicator Lamp When this light comes on, the Driver A computer system called OBD II Information Center (DIC) also (On-Board Diagnostics-Second displays a message. Generation) monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission See Battery Voltage and Charging control systems. It ensures that Messages on page 4 32. The charging system light comes on ‑ emissions are at acceptable levels briefly when the ignition is turned This light and a Transport Mode On for the life of the vehicle, helping to on, but the engine is not running, as message display when the vehicle produce a cleaner environment. a check to show the light is working. is in Transport Mode. For more The light turns off when the engine information, see Key and Lock is started. If it does not, have Messages on page 4‑35. the vehicle serviced by your If a short distance must be driven dealer/retailer. with the light on, be sure to turn off If the light stays on, or comes on all accessories, such as the radio while driving, there may be a and air conditioner. This light comes on when the problem with the electrical charging ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. Instruments and Controls 4-19

If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the The following can prevent more and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle: running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of the required. original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations. Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. Performance Criteria (TPC) can the system before any problem is . If towing a trailer, reduce the apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light amount of cargo being hauled as can prevent more serious damage soon as it is possible. to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the Notice: If the vehicle is result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the on, after a while, the emission Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, controls might not work as well, Accessories and Modifications follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's fuel economy might on page 9‑3. your dealer/retailer for service as not be as good, and the engine soon as possible. might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a could lead to costly repairs that malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle. increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be could damage the emission control required. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. 4-20 Instruments and Controls

An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs causes the engine not to run as . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local installed. See Filling the Tank on cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin page 8‑56. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle. fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, Failure to pass this inspection could improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away registration. evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. A few driving trips with the cap Here are some things to know to properly installed should turn the If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection: light off. conditions occurs, change the . The vehicle will not pass this fuel brand used. It will require at . If the vehicle has been driven inspection if the check engine least one full tank of the proper light is on with the engine through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. the vehicle's electrical system running, or if the key is in might be wet. The condition is See Recommended Fuel on ON/RUN and the light is not on. usually corrected when the page 8‑54. electrical system dries out. A few If none of the above have made the driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/retailer light off. can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Instruments and Controls 4-21

. The vehicle will not pass this Brake System Warning inspection if the OBD II { WARNING (on-board diagnostic) system Light determines that critical emission The brake system might not be control systems have not been working properly if the brake completely diagnosed by the system warning light is on. system. The vehicle would be Driving with the brake system considered not ready for warning light on can lead to a inspection. This can happen if crash. If the light is still on after the battery has recently been United States Canada the vehicle has been pulled off replaced or if the battery has run the road and carefully stopped, The brake indicator light should down. The diagnostic system is have the vehicle towed for come on briefly as the engine is designed to evaluate critical service. emission control systems during started. If it does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ normal driving. This can take If the light comes on while driving, a retailer. several days of routine driving. chime sounds. Pull off the road and If this has been done and the When the ignition is on, the brake stop. The pedal might be harder to vehicle still does not pass the system warning light comes on push or go closer to the floor. inspection for lack of OBD II when the parking brake is set. The It might also take longer to stop. system readiness, your dealer/ light stays on if the parking brake If the light is still on, have the retailer can prepare the vehicle does not fully release. If it stays on vehicle towed for service. See for inspection. after the parking brake is fully Driving Characteristics and Towing released, there is a brake problem. Tips on page 8‑58. Have the brake system inspected immediately. 4-22 Instruments and Controls

Antilock Brake System If the ABS light stays on, turn the Traction Off Light ignition off. If the light comes on (ABS) Warning Light while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the This light comes on if the Traction vehicle needs service. If the regular For vehicles with the Antilock Brake Control System (TCS) either has a brake system warning light is not problem or is turned off. DIC System (ABS), this light comes on on, the vehicle still has brakes, but briefly when the engine is started. messages appear in the DIC display not antilock brakes. If the regular to help explain. See Ride Control brake system warning light is also If the light does not come on, have it System Messages on page 4‑36 fixed so it will be ready to warn if on, the vehicle does not have for more information. there is a problem. antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Traction Control System (TCS) See Brake System Warning Light on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak on page 4‑21. System on page 8‑43 for more information. For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑27 for all brake related DIC messages. Instruments and Controls 4-23

StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System If the TCS warning light comes on ® and stays on while driving, the (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light vehicle needs service. Check the Driver Information Center (DIC) for applicable messages. See Ride Control System Messages on page 4‑36 for more information. See Traction Control System (TCS) This light comes on when the on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak StabiliTrak system is turned off. ® The StabiliTrak system or the System on page 8 43 for more If the Traction Control System (TCS) ‑ Traction Control System (TCS) information. is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the indicator/warning light comes on StabiliTrak system is off, the system briefly while starting the engine. does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the If it does not, have the vehicle StabiliTrak system and the warning serviced by your dealer/retailer. light turns off. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. Check the DIC for applicable messages. See Ride Control The indicator/warning light flashes System Messages on page 4‑36 while the StabiliTrak or TCS system for more information. is working to control the vehicle on a low traction surface. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43 for more information. 4-24 Instruments and Controls

Tire Pressure Light A tire pressure message in the Engine Oil Pressure Light Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Tire { WARNING Messages on page 4‑37 for more information. Stop as soon as Do not keep driving if the oil possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure is low. The engine can pressure value shown on the tire become so hot that it catches fire. loading information label. See Tire Someone could be burned. Check For vehicles with a tire pressure Pressure on page 9‑50 for more information. the oil as soon as possible and monitoring system, this light comes have the vehicle serviced. on briefly when the engine is When the Light Flashes First and started. It provides information Then is On Steady Notice: Lack of proper engine oil about tire pressures and the Tire maintenance can damage the Pressure Monitoring System. This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire Pressure engine. The repairs would not be When the Light is On Steady Monitor System. The light flashes covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance This indicates that one or more of for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the schedule in this manual for the tires are significantly changing engine oil. underinflated. ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 9‑53 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-25

Fuel Economy Light Low Fuel Warning Light

The oil pressure light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on have United States Shown, Canada For vehicles with the fuel economy Similar the vehicle serviced by your mode light, it comes on when the dealer/retailer. eco (economy) switch, located on This light comes on for a If the light comes on and stays on, it the center console near the shifter, few seconds when the ignition is means that oil is not flowing through is pressed. For vehicles with a turned on as a check to indicate it is the engine properly. The vehicle Driver Information Center (DIC) an working. If it does not come on, could be low on oil and might have ECO Mode On message displays. have it fixed. some other system problem. See See Fuel System Messages on The low fuel warning light is a circle your dealer/retailer. page 4‑35 for more information. located on the fuel gage. This light Press the switch again to turn off comes on and a chime sounds the light and exit the fuel periodically when the vehicle is low saver mode. on fuel. The light goes off when fuel is added to the fuel tank. For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see Fuel System Messages on page 4‑35 for more information. 4-26 Instruments and Controls

Security Light High-Beam on Light Fog Lamp Light

This light comes on if there is a The high-beam on light comes on The fog lamp light comes on when problem with the security system, when the high-beam headlamps are the fog lamps are in use. or if the vehicle has been in use. The light goes out when the fog tampered with. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam lamps are turned off. See Fog For more information, see Vehicle Changer on page 5‑2 for more Lamps on page 5‑3 for more Security on page 1‑12. information. information. Instruments and Controls 4-27

Lamps on Reminder Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) The vehicle may have a Driver Information Center (DIC). It displays information about the vehicle and For vehicles with the lamps on The cruise control light is white warning messages if there is a reminder light, it comes on when the whenever the cruise control is set system problem detected. DIC lights are in use. and turns green when the cruise messages display in the center of control is active. the instrument panel cluster. See The light turns off when the cruise Vehicle Messages on page 4‑31 for control is switched off. See Cruise more information. Control on page 8‑44 for more The vehicle may also have features information. that can be customized through the controls on the radio. See Vehicle Personalization on page 4‑39 for more information. 4-28 Instruments and Controls

DIC Operation and Displays DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu Items Use the DIC buttons located in Press the MENU button until the center of the instrument panel Trip/Fuel Information Menu is to access different displays. The displayed. Then press x to scroll DIC displays trip, fuel, vehicle through the following menu items: system information, and warning messages. It also shows the shift . Trip 1 lever position, the odometer, . Trip 2 and the direction the vehicle is . driving. Fuel Range . Average Fuel Economy . Instantaneous Fuel Economy . Average Vehicle Speed MENU: Press this button to get to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle . Timer Information Menu. . Digital Speedometer w x : Use these buttons to scroll . Navigation Turn-by-Turn through the items in each menu. . A small marker will move along the Blank page as you scroll through the items. This shows where each page is in the menu. V (Set/Clear): Use this button to set or clear the menu item when it is displayed. Instruments and Controls 4-29

Trip 1 and Trip 2 Average Fuel Economy Average Vehicle Speed This display shows the current This display shows the approximate This display shows the average distance traveled, in either average liters per 100 kilometers speed of the vehicle in kilometers kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since (L/100 km) or miles per per hour (km/h) or miles per the last reset for the trip odometer. gallon (mpg). This number is hour (mph). This average is The trip odometer can be reset to calculated based on the number of calculated based on the various zero by pressing the trip reset stem L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the vehicle speeds recorded since the or V while the trip odometer display last time this menu item was reset. last reset of this value. The average is showing. The fuel economy can be reset by speed can be reset by pressing V pressing V while the Average Fuel while the Average Vehicle Speed Fuel Range Economy display is showing. display is showing. This display shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven Instantaneous Fuel Economy Timer without refueling. The fuel range This display shows the current fuel This display can be used as a timer. estimate is based on an average of economy in either liters per To start the timer, press V while the vehicle's fuel economy over 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles Timer is displayed. The display will recent driving history and the per gallon (mpg). This number show the amount of time that has amount of fuel remaining in the fuel reflects only the fuel economy that passed since the timer was last tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. the vehicle has right now and reset, not including time the ignition changes frequently as driving is off. Time will continue to be conditions change. Unlike average counted as long as the ignition is economy, this display cannot be on, even if another display is being reset. shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return to zero. 4-30 Instruments and Controls

To stop the timer, press V briefly Vehicle Information Menu Tire Pressure while Timer is displayed. To reset Items The display will show a vehicle with the timer to zero, press and hold V . Press the MENU button until Vehicle the approximate pressures of all Information Menu is displayed. Then four tires. Tire pressure is displayed Digital Speedometer press x to scroll through the in either pounds per square inch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa). The speedometer shows how fast following menu items: the vehicle is moving in either Any time the tire pressures are . Unit kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles adjusted the system needs to per hour (mph). The speedometer . Tire Pressure relearn the new pressures. To cannot be reset. . Remaining Oil Life relearn the tire pressures press V Turn-by-Turn while the Tire Pressure display is . Blank This display is used for the OnStar active. The display will ask for or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn Unit confirmation of a relearn. Press w ® guidance. See OnStar System on Press V to enter the unit menu. or x to select Yes or No. Then page 4‑44 or the Navigation press V to confirm the selection. manual, if the vehicle has Then press w or x to switch See Tire Pressure Monitor System navigation, for more information. between US or Metric when the Unit display is active. Press V to confirm on page 9‑51 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 9 53 for Blank Display the setting. This will change the ‑ more information. This display shows no information. displays on the cluster and DIC to either metric or English (US) measurements. Instruments and Controls 4-31

Remaining Oil Life Remember, the Oil Life display must Vehicle Messages This display shows an estimate of be reset after each oil change. It will Messages are displayed on the DIC the oil's remaining useful life. not reset itself. Also, be careful not to notify the driver that the status of If Remaining Oil Life 99% is to reset the Oil Life display “ ” the vehicle has changed and that displayed, that means 99% of the accidentally at any time other than some action may be needed by the current oil life remains. when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until driver to correct the condition. When the remaining oil life is low, the next oil change. To reset the Multiple messages may appear one the “Change Engine Oil Soon” engine oil life system, press V while after another. message will appear on the display. the Oil Life display is active. The Some messages may not require See Engine Oil Messages on display will ask for confirmation of a immediate action, but you can page 4‑34. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See reset. Press w or x to select Yes press V to acknowledge that you Engine Oil on page 9‑10. In or No. Then press V to confirm the received the messages and to clear addition to the engine oil life system selection. See Engine Oil Life them from the display. Some monitoring the oil life, additional System on page 9‑12. messages cannot be cleared from maintenance is recommended in the the DIC display because they are Maintenance Schedule in this Blank Display more urgent. These messages manual. See Scheduled This display shows no information. require action before they can be Maintenance on page 10‑2 for cleared. You should take any more information. Compass messages that appear on the The vehicle may have a compass in display seriously and remember that the Driver Information Center (DIC). clearing the messages will only See Compass on page 4‑9. make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. You will find the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them grouped by subject in the following information. 4-32 Instruments and Controls

Battery Voltage and Service Battery Charging Compass Messages System Charging Messages CAL This message is displayed when Battery Saver Active there is a fault in the battery This message is displayed when the This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle to compass needs to be calibrated. vehicle has detected that the battery your dealer/retailer for service. See Compass on page 4‑9. voltage is dropping beyond a ––– reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages system starts reducing certain Three dashes will be displayed if the features of the vehicle that you may Brake Fluid Low compass needs service. See your be able to notice. At the point that This message is displayed when the dealer/retailer for service. features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low, see Brake is displayed. It means that the Fluid on page 9‑24. Cruise Control Messages vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary Release Parking Brake Apply Brakes Before Cruise accessories to allow the battery to This message is displayed as a If this message displays when recharge. reminder that the parking brake is attempting to activate cruise control, apply the brake and then try again. Low Battery on. Release it before you attempt to drive. This message is displayed when the Cruise Set to XXX battery voltage is low. See Battery This message will display when the on page 9‑25 for more information. cruise control is set and it will show the speed it was set to. See Cruise Control on page 8‑44 for more information. Instruments and Controls 4-33

Door Ajar Messages Rear Access Open Coolant Level Low Add Coolant Door Open This message will display along with a symbol when the liftgate is open. This message will display if the A door open symbol will be Close the liftgate completely. coolant is low, see Engine Coolant displayed on the DIC showing which on page 9‑16. door is open. If the vehicle has been Engine Cooling System Engine Overheated Idle shifted out of P (Park), a “Door Messages — Open” message will also be Engine displayed. Close the door A/C Off Due to High This message displays when the completely. Engine Temp engine coolant temperature is too Hood Open This message displays when the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. This message will display along with engine coolant becomes hotter than a hood open symbol when the hood the normal operating temperature. Engine Overheated — Stop is open. Close the hood completely. To avoid added strain on a hot Engine engine, the air conditioning Manually Close the Power compressor automatically turns off. This message displays and a Liftgate When the coolant temperature continuous chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches This message will display if the returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back unsafe temperatures for operation. power liftgate encounters multiple Stop and turn off the vehicle as obstacles on the same power cycle. on. You can continue to drive the vehicle. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid After removing the obstructions, the severe damage. This message liftgate will resume normal power If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled operation. have the system repaired by your to a safe operating temperature. dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine. 4-34 Instruments and Controls

High Coolant Temperature Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine Engine Power Messages This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the Engine Power Is Reduced temperature is hot, see Engine engine oil temperature is too hot. Overheating on page 9‑19. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle This message displays when the until it cools down. vehicle's engine power is reduced. Engine Oil Messages Reduced engine power can affect Engine Oil Low – Add Oil the vehicle's ability to accelerate. Change Engine Oil Soon This message displays when the If this message is on, but there is no This message displays when the engine oil level is too low. Check the reduction in performance, proceed engine oil needs to be changed. oil level. See Engine Oil on to your destination. The When you change the engine oil, be page 9‑10. performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The sure to reset the Oil Life System. Oil Pressure Low Stop See Engine Oil Life System on – vehicle may be driven at a reduced Engine speed while this message is on, but page 9‑12 and Driver Information maximum acceleration and speed Center (DIC) on page 4‑27 for This message displays if low oil information on how to reset the pressure levels occur. Stop the may be reduced. Anytime this system. See Engine Oil on vehicle as soon as safely possible message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your page 9‑10 and Scheduled and do not operate it until the cause dealer/retailer for service as soon Maintenance on page 10‑2 for of the low oil pressure has been more information. corrected. Check the oil as soon as as possible. possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. Instruments and Controls 4-35

Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Object Detection System ECO Mode On Replace Battery In Remote Key Messages On some models, this message This message displays when the Park Assist Off displays when the fuel economy battery in the Remote Keyless Entry This message is displayed when the mode has been turned on by (RKE) transmitter needs to be park assist system has been turned pressing the eco button near the replaced. off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist shift lever. See Fuel Economy Mode on page 8‑46. on page 8‑37 for more information. Transport Mode On This message displays when the Service Park Assist Fuel Level Low ignition is held in START for This message is displayed if there is This message displays when the 15 seconds. The battery light may a problem with the park assist vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as also be flashing when this message system. Take the vehicle to your soon as possible. is displayed. To turn this message dealer/retailer for service. off, start the vehicle and hold the Tighten Gas Cap key in the START position for This message displays when the 15 seconds. fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the fuel cap. 4-36 Instruments and Controls

Ride Control System Service All Wheel Drive Service Stabilitrak Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel This message displays if there is a Drive (AWD) system, this message problem with the StabiliTrak® All Wheel Drive Off displays if a problem occurs with system. If this message appears, try If your vehicle has the All-Wheel this system. If this message to reset the system. Stop; turn off Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible the engine for at least 15 seconds; displays when the rear drive system and turn off the vehicle. Restart the then start the engine again. If this is overheating. This message turns vehicle and check for the message message still comes on, it means off when the rear drive system cools on the DIC display. If the message there is a problem. See your down. If the warning message stays is still displayed or appears again dealer/retailer for service. The on for a while, you need to reset the when you begin driving, the AWD vehicle is safe to drive, however, warning message. To reset the system needs service. See your you do not have the benefit of warning message, turn the ignition dealer/retailer. StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. off and then back on again. If the Service Traction Control message stays on, see your dealer/ Stabilitrak Off retailer right away. See All-Wheel This message displays when there Drive on page 8‑38 for more is a problem with the Traction This message displays when the information. Control System (TCS). When this StabiliTrak system is turned off. See message is displayed, the system StabiliTrak System on page 8‑43 will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your for more information. driving accordingly. See your dealer/ retailer for service. Instruments and Controls 4-37

Traction Control Off Anti-Theft Alarm System Tire Messages This message displays when the Messages Service Tire Monitor System Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving Theft Attempted This message displays if there is a accordingly. This message displays if the vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure detects a tamper condition. Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire Traction Control On Pressure Monitor Operation on This message displays when the Service Vehicle Messages page 9‑53 for more information. Traction Control System (TCS) is Tire Learning Active first turned on. See Traction Control Service AC System This message displays when the System (TCS) on page 8‑41 for This message is displayed if there is system is learning new tires. See more information. a problem with the air conditioning Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on system. Take the vehicle to your page 9 53 for more information. Airbag System Messages dealer/retailer for service. ‑ Tire Low Add Air To Tire Service Airbag Service Power Steering On vehicles with the Tire Pressure This message is displayed if there is This message is displayed if there is Monitor System (TPMS), this a problem with the airbag system. a problem with the power steering message displays when the Take the vehicle to your system. Take the vehicle to your pressure in one or more of the dealer/retailer for service. dealer/retailer for service. vehicle's tires is low. Safety Belt Messages Service Vehicle Soon This message also displays “Left This message is displayed if there is Front”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”, Buckle Seatbelt a problem with the vehicle. Take the or “Right Rear” to indicate the This message displays as a vehicle to your dealer/retailer for location of the low tire. reminder when the safety belt is not service. buckled. 4-38 Instruments and Controls

The low tire pressure warning light Transmission Messages Vehicle Reminder will also come on. See Tire Messages Pressure Light on page 4‑24. Service Transmission If a tire pressure message appears This message displays if there is a Ice Possible Drive With Care on the DIC, stop as soon as you problem with the transmission. See This message is displayed when ice can. Inflate the tires by adding air your dealer/retailer. conditions are possible. until the tire pressure is equal to the values shown on the Tire Loading Shift To Park Turn Wiper Control to Information label. See Tires on This message displays when the Intermittent First page 9 43, Vehicle Load Limits on ‑ transmission needs to be shifted to This message is displayed when page 8 24, and Tire Pressure on ‑ P (Park). This may appear when attempting to adjust the intermittent page 9 50. ‑ attempting to remove the key from wiper speed without intermittent You can receive more than one tire the ignition if the vehicle is not in selected on the wiper control. See pressure message at a time. To P (Park). Windshield Wiper/Washer on read the other messages that may Transmission Hot – Idle page 4‑7. have been sent at the same time, Engine press the set/reset button. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. This message displays and a chime See Driver Information Center (DIC) sounds if the transmission fluid in on page 4‑27. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level. Instruments and Controls 4-39

Vehicle 2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knob Climate and Air Quality to highlight Vehicle Settings. Personalization Select the Climate and Air Quality 3. Press the center of the menu and the following will be The audio system controls are used MENU / SELECT knob to select displayed: to access the personalization the Vehicle Settings menu. . Auto Fan Speed menus for customizing vehicle The following list of menu items will . Air Conditioning Mode features. be available: . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats CONFIG (Configuration): Press to . Climate and Air Quality access the Configuration Auto Fan Speed Settings Menu. . Comfort and Convenience This selection is available on MENU / SELECT Knob: Press the . Collision/Detection Systems vehicles with the Automatic Climate center of this knob to enter the . Languages Control System. Choose from the menus and select menu items. Turn . following blower speed settings: the knob to scroll through the Lighting menus. . Power Door Locks High: Increased speed. 0 BACK: Press to exit or move . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Low: Reduced speed. backwards in a menu. . Return to Factory Settings Normal: Moderate speed. Entering the Personalization Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to Press the MENU / SELECT knob Menus highlight the menu. Press the knob when “Auto Fan Speed” is 1. Turn the infotainment system on to select it. Each of the menus is highlighted. Turn the knob to and press the CONFIG button to detailed in the following information. highlight “High”, “Normal”, or “Low”. access the Configuration All of the menus may not be Press the knob to confirm the Settings menu. available. Only those tied to the selection and go back to the features on your vehicle will be last menu. shown. 4-40 Instruments and Controls

Air Conditioning Mode Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Easy Exit Driver Seat This will allow you to select whether When on, this feature will turn the This allows you to turn the easy exit or not the air conditioning comes on heated seats on when using remote seat feature on or off. automatically the next time the start on cold days. Press the MENU / SELECT knob vehicle is started. On means that “ ” Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Easy Exit Driver Seat” is the air conditioning will be on at when “Remote Start Auto highlighted. Turn the knob to select start up, regardless of whether it Heat Seats” is highlighted to “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to was on or off the last time the toggle between “On” or “Off”. confirm and go back to the vehicle was turned off. “Off” means 0 last menu. the air conditioning will be off at the Press BACK to confirm the next start up, regardless of whether selection and go back to the Chime Volume last menu. it was on or off the last time the This allows the selection of the vehicle was turned off. “Last Comfort and Convenience chime volume level. Setting” means that the when the vehicle is started the air conditioning Select the Comfort and Press the MENU / SELECT knob will resume whichever setting it was Convenience menu and the when “Chime Volume” is at the last time the vehicle was following will be displayed: highlighted. Turn the knob to select Normal or High . Press the knob turned off. . Easy Exit Driver Seat “ ” “ ” to confirm and go back to the Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Chime Volume last menu. when “Air Conditioning Mode” is highlighted. Turn the knob to . Reverse Tilt Mirror highlight “On”, “Off”, or “Last Setting”. Press the knob to confirm your selection and go back to the last menu. Instruments and Controls 4-41

Reverse Tilt Mirror Languages Vehicle Locator Lights This allows you to turn the park tilt Select the Language menu and the This allows the vehicle locator lights mirrors feature on or off. following will be displayed: to be turned on or off. Press the MENU / SELECT knob . English Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Reverse Tilt Mirror” is when “Vehicle Locator Lights” is . French highlighted. Turn the knob to select highlighted to toggle between “On” “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to . Spanish or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm confirm and go back to the Turn the MENU / SELECT knob to the selection and go back to the last menu. select the language. Press the knob last menu. to confirm and go back to the Collision/Detection Systems Exit Lighting last menu. Select the Collision/Detection This allows the selection of how Systems menu and the following will Lighting long the exterior lamps stay on be displayed: Select the Lighting menu and the when leaving the vehicle when it is . Park Assist following will be displayed: dark outside. Park Assist . Vehicle Locator Lights Press the MENU / SELECT knob when “Exit Lighting” is highlighted. . Exit Lighting This allows the Ultrasonic Parking Turn the knob to select “Off”, Assist feature to be turned on or off. “30 Seconds”, “1 Minute”, Press the MENU / SELECT knob or “2 Minutes”. Press the knob to when “Park Assist” is highlighted. confirm and go back to the Turn the knob to select “On”, “Off”, last menu. or “Tow Bar”. Press the knob to confirm and go back to the last menu. 4-42 Instruments and Controls

Power Door Locks Auto Door Unlock Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Select Power Door Locks and the This allows selection of which of the Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start following will be displayed: doors will automatically unlock when and the following will be displayed: the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out . Remote Unlock Light Feedback Press the MENU / SELECT knob . Auto Door Unlock . Remote Lock Feedback when “Auto Door Unlock” is . Delayed Door Lock highlighted. Turn the knob to select . Remote Door Unlock All Doors , Driver Door , or Off . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out “ ” “ ” “ ” . Memory Remote Recall Press the knob to confirm and go When on, this feature will keep the back to the last menu. . Remote Vehicle Start driver's door from locking when the Remote Unlock Light Feedback door is open. If off is selected, the Delayed Door Lock Delayed Door Lock menu will be When on, this feature will delay the When on, the exterior lamps will available. locking of the doors. If you want to flash when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Press the MENU / SELECT knob override the delay you can press the power door lock on the instrument when “Unlocked Door Anti Press the MENU / SELECT knob panel. Lock Out” is highlighted to when “Remote Unlock Light toggle between “On” or “Off”. Press the MENU / SELECT knob Feedback” is highlighted. Turn the Press 0 BACK to confirm the when “Delayed Door Lock” is knob to select “Flash Lights” or selection and go back to the highlighted. Turn the knob to select “Off”. Press the knob to confirm and last menu. “On” or “Off”. Press the knob to go back to the last menu. confirm and go back to the last menu. Instruments and Controls 4-43

Remote Lock Feedback Memory Remote Recall Return to Factory Settings This allows selection of what type of This allows the “Memory Remote Select “Return to Factory Settings” feedback is given when unlocking Recall” feature to be turned on or to return all of the vehicle the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. off. “Memory Remote Recall” is personalization to the default Press the MENU / SELECT knob when the memorized settings will be settings. Turn the knob to select recalled as you unlock the vehicle. when “Remote Lock Feedback” is “Yes” or “No”. Press the knob to highlighted. Turn the knob to select Press the MENU / SELECT knob confirm and go back to the “Lights and Horn”, “Lights Only”, when “Memory Remote Recall” is last menu. “Horn Only”, or “Off”. Press the knob highlighted to toggle between “On” to confirm and go back to the or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirm last menu. the selection and go back to the Remote Door Unlock last menu. This allows selection of which doors Remote Vehicle Start will unlock when pressing the unlock This allows the “Remote Vehicle button on the RKE transmitter. Start” to be turned on or off, if the Press the MENU / SELECT knob vehicle has this feature. when “Remote Door Unlock” is Press the MENU / SELECT knob highlighted. Turn the knob to select when “Remote Vehicle Start” is “All Doors” or “Driver Door”. Press highlighted to toggle between “On” the knob to confirm and go back to or Off . Press 0 BACK to confirm the last menu. “ ” the selection and go back to the last menu. 4-44 Instruments and Controls

® OnStar System How OnStar Service Works TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to Q : This blue button connects you speak with an OnStar advisor to a specially trained OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. to verify your account information For a full description of OnStar and to answer questions. services and system limitations, see ] : Push this red emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the button to get priority help from glove box. specially trained OnStar emergency ® OnStar service is subject to the OnStar uses several innovative advisors. OnStar terms and conditions technologies and live advisors to X : Push this button for hands free, included in the OnStar Subscriber provide a wide range of safety, ‐ voice activated calling and to give Information. security, navigation, diagnostics, ‐ voice commands for turn by turn and calling services. ‐ ‐ OnStar service cannot work unless navigation. the vehicle is in a place where Automatic Crash Response Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar has an agreement with a In a crash, built in sensors can Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, wireless service provider for service automatically alert an OnStar Remote Door Unlock, Roadside in that area. OnStar service also advisor who is immediately Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation cannot work unless the vehicle is in connected to the vehicle to see if and Hands‐Free Calling are a place where the wireless service you need help. available on most vehicles. Not all provider OnStar has hired for that OnStar services are available on all area has coverage, network vehicles. For more information see capacity and reception when the the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit service is needed, and technology www.onstar.com (U.S.) or that is compatible with the OnStar www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service. Not all services are OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR available everywhere, particularly in (1‐888‐466‐7827) or remote or enclosed areas, or at all times. Instruments and Controls 4-45

The OnStar system can record and The vehicle must have a working Your Responsibility transmit vehicle information. This electrical system, including Increase the volume of the radio if information is automatically sent to adequate battery power, for the the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. an OnStar call center when Q is OnStar equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar cannot If the light next to the OnStar pressed, ] is pressed, or if the control that may prevent OnStar buttons is red, the system may not airbags or ACR system deploy. This from providing OnStar service at be functioning properly. Press Q information usually includes the any particular time or place. Some vehicle's GPS location and, in the and request a vehicle diagnostic. examples are damage to important If the light appears clear (no light is event of a crash, additional parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, information regarding the crash that appearing), your OnStar tall buildings, tunnels, weather or subscription has expired and all the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the wireless phone network congestion. direction from which the vehicle was services have been deactivated. hit). When the virtual advisor feature OnStar Steering Wheel Press Q to confirm that the OnStar of OnStar hands-free calling is Controls equipment is active. used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location so they This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute can provide services where it is button that can be used to interact located. with OnStar hands-free calling. See Steering Wheel Controls on Location information about the page 4‑6 for more information. vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed On some vehicles, the mute button and available. can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. 4-46 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Lighting 5-1

Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic Headlamps): Lighting Turns the exterior lamps on and off Exterior Lamp Controls automatically depending on the Exterior Lighting exterior light. Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Headlamp High/Low-Beam parking lamps together with the Changer ...... 5-2 following: Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 . Sidemarker Lamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 . Taillamps Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-2 . License Plate Lamps Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 5-3 . Instrument Panel Lights Fog Lamps ...... 5-3 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the Interior Lighting headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 5-4 The exterior lamp control is located Dome Lamps ...... 5-4 on the turn signal/lane change lever. Reading Lamps ...... 5-4 O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn Lighting Features to operate the exterior lamps. Entry Lighting ...... 5-4 O (Off): Turns the exterior lamps off. 5-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/ Daytime Running When the exterior lamp band is turned to the headlamp position, the Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL) low-beam headlamps come on. The 2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) other lamps that come on with the Changer: Push the turn/lane system makes the low-beam headlamps will also come on. change lever away from you to turn headlamps come on at a reduced To idle your vehicle with the DRL the high beams on. brightness in daylight when the off, move the shift lever to P (Park). Pull the lever towards you to return following conditions are met: The DRL will stay off until the shift to low beams. . The ignition is on. lever is moved out of the P (Park) position. . The exterior lamp band is in the automatic position. The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed. . The transmission is not in P (Park). Hazard Warning Flashers . The light sensor determines it is daytime. | (Hazard Warning Flasher): This indicator light turns on in the Press this button, located on the instrument panel cluster when the . The parking brake is released. center of the instrument panel, to high beam headlamps are on. Fully functional Daytime Running make the front and rear turn signal Lamps (DRL) are required on all lamps flash on and off. This warns Flash-to-Pass vehicles first sold in Canada. others that you are having trouble. The flash‐to‐pass feature works with When the DRL are on the taillamps, Press | again to turn the the low‐beams or Daytime Running sidemarker, instrument panel lights flashers off. Lamps (DRL) on or off. and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel cluster will be lit. To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal/lane change lever all the way towards you. Then release it. Lighting 5-3

Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting # (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp Signals position when it is released. band on the lever to # and release If after signaling a turn or a lane it, to turn the fog lamps on or off. change the arrows flash rapidly or The band will return to its original do not come on, a signal bulb may position. be burned out. The parking lamps or low‐beam Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb headlamps must be on to use the is not burned out, check the fuse, fog lamps. see Fuses on page 9‑37 for more The fog lamps will go off whenever An arrow on the instrument panel information. the high-beam headlamps are cluster will flash in the direction of turned on. When the high‐beam the turn or lane change. Fog Lamps headlamps are turned off, the fog Move the lever all the way up or For vehicles with fog lamps, the lamps will come on again. down to signal a turn. control is located on the turn signal/ Some localities have laws that Raise or lower the lever until the lane change lever. require the headlamps to be on arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Use the fog lamps for better vision along with the fog lamps. change. Hold it there until the lane in foggy or misty conditions. change is complete. 5-4 Lighting

Interior Lighting 1 (Door): The lamp comes on Lighting Features automatically when a door is Instrument Panel opened. Entry Lighting + (On): Turns the dome lamp on. Illumination Control The dome lamp, cargo lamp and This control is located on the Reading Lamps foot lamp inside the vehicle come instrument panel, to the left of the on when any door is opened, if the steering column. The reading lamps are located on dome lamp is in the door position. In D the overhead console. These lamps addition, these lamps come on (Instrument Panel come on automatically when any when the Remote Keyless Entry Brightness): Turn clockwise or door is opened. (RKE) unlock button is pressed. counterclockwise to brighten or dim They stay on for 20 seconds or until the lights. For manual operation, press the a door is opened. After the door is button next to each lamp to turn it opened and then closed, the light Dome Lamps on or off. remains on for 20 seconds, or until The dome lamp controls are located the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. in the overhead console. To change the settings, press the following: * (Dome Lamp Override): Turns the lamp off, even when a door is open. Infotainment System 6-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 6-19 System CD/DVD Player ...... 6-21 Read the following pages to Mass Storage become familiar with the audio Media (MEM) ...... 6-25 system's features. Introduction Auxiliary Devices Introduction ...... 6-1 (Radio with CD) ...... 6-28 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 Auxiliary Devices (Radio with Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3 CD/DVD/MEM) ...... 6-31 Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause Overview (Radio with Rear Seat Infotainment CD/DVD/MEM) ...... 6-5 a crash resulting in injury or Rear Seat Entertainment Operation ...... 6-7 death to you or others. Do not (RSE) System ...... 6-33 give extended attention to Radio Phone entertainment tasks while driving. AM-FM Radio ...... 6-11 Bluetooth (Overview) ...... 6-42 Satellite Radio ...... 6-14 Bluetooth (Infotainment This system provides access to Radio Reception ...... 6-18 Controls) ...... 6-43 many audio and non audio listings. Multi-Band Antenna ...... 6-18 Bluetooth (Voice To minimize taking your eyes off the Recognition) ...... 6-46 road while driving, do the following Bluetooth (Navigation) ...... 6-58 while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 6-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see Defensive Notice: Contact your Navigation/Radio System Driving on page 8 3. dealer/retailer before adding ‑ For vehicles with a navigation radio any equipment. This vehicle's infotainment system system, see the separate Navigation may be equipped with a noise Adding audio or communication System manual. reduction system which can work equipment could interfere with improperly if the audio amplifier, the operation of the vehicle's Theft-Deterrent Feature engine calibrations, exhaust system, engine, radio, or other systems, microphones, radio, or speakers are and could damage them. Follow The theft-deterrent feature works modified or replaced. This could federal rules covering mobile by learning a portion of the Vehicle result in more noticeable engine radio and telephone equipment. Identification Number (VIN) to noise at certain speeds. the infotainment system. The The vehicle has Retained infotainment system does not Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, operate if it is stolen or moved to the audio system can be played a different vehicle. even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 8‑29 for more information. Infotainment System 6-3

Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O . Turns the system on or off and adjusts the volume. B. g SEEK . Radio: Seeks the previous station. . CD: Selects the previous track or rewinds within a track. C. RADIO/BAND . Changes the band while listening to the radio. . Selects the radio when listening to a different audio source. D. AUX . Selects a connected external audio source. E. Buttons 1 to 6 . Radio: Saves and selects favorite stations. 6-4 Infotainment System

F. FAV K. k O. INFO . . Radio: Opens the . CD: Pauses the CD. Radio: Shows available favorites list. information about the L. CD G. TONE current station. . Selects the CD player when . CD: Shows available . Opens the tone menu. listening to a different audio information about the H. CONFIG source. current track. . Opens the settings menu. M. Z CD Eject P. 5 / 0 I. MENU/SEL . Removes a disc from the . Opens the phone . Press: Opens the menus CD slot. main menu. and selects menu items. N. l SEEK . Mutes the audio system. . Turn: Highlights menu items . Radio: Seeks the next H or sets values while in a Q. station. menu. Manually selects . Opens the clock menu. radio stations while . CD: Selects the next track listening to the radio. or fast forwards within a R. 0 BACK track. J. CD Slot . Menu: Moves one level back. . Insert a CD. . Character Input: Deletes the last character. Infotainment System 6-5

Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) A. VOL/ O . Turns the system on or off and adjusts the volume. B. g SEEK . Radio: Seeks the previous station. . CD/DVD: Selects the previous track or rewinds within a track. . MEM: Selects the previous track or rewinds within a track. C. RADIO/BAND . Changes the band while listening to the radio. . Selects the radio when listening to a different audio source. D. MEM/DVD/AUX . Selects MEM, CD/DVD, USB, or a connected front or rear auxillary audio source. 6-6 Infotainment System

E. Buttons 1 to 6 J. CD/DVD Slot N. l SEEK . . Radio: Saves and selects Insert a disc. . Radio: Seeks the next favorite stations. K. k (Play/Pause) station. . MEM: Saves and selects . CD/DVD: Selects the next favorite tracks and playlists. . Radio: Pauses time shifted content. track or fast forwards within F. FAV a track. . CD/DVD: Pauses . . MEM: Selects the next Radio: Opens the CD/DVD‐A and DVD‐V track or fast forwards within favorites list. playback. Stops DVD‐V a track. . MEM: Opens the playback. O. INFO favorites list. . MEM: Pauses MEM G. TONE playback. . Radio: Shows available information about the . O Opens the tone menu. L. REC current station. H. CONFIG . CD/DVD: Records content . CD/DVD: Shows available . Opens the settings menu. from audio CDs and information about the MP3/WMA CDs. I. MENU/SEL current track. . AUX: Records content from . MEM: Shows available . Press: Opens menus and USB mass storage devices. selects menu items. information about the M. Z CD Eject current track. . Turn: Highlights menu 5 items or sets values . Removes a disc from the P. / 0 (Phone/Mute) while in a menu. Manually CD/DVD slot. . Opens the phone selects radio stations while main menu. listening to the radio. . Mutes the audio system. Infotainment System 6-7

Q. DEL Automatic Switch‐Off Menu System . MEM: Deletes the current If the infotainment system has Controls track from MEM. been turned on after the ignition is The MENU/SEL knob and the 0 turned off, the system will turn off 0 R. BACK automatically after ten minutes. BACK button are used to . navigate the menu system. Menu: Moves one Volume Control level back. MENU/SEL (Menu/Select): Press to: . Character Input: Deletes VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to the last character. adjust the volume. . Enter the menu system. 5 / 0 (Mute): For vehicles with . Select or activate the highlighted Operation OnStar®, press and hold 5 / 0 to menu option. Controls mute the infotainment system. . Confirm a set value. Press and hold 5 / 0 again, or turn The infotainment system is . Turn a system setting on or off. the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute. operated by using the pushbuttons, Turn to: multifunction knobs, menus that are For vehicles without OnStar®, shown on the display, and steering . Highlight a menu option. press 5 / 0 to mute the wheel controls, if equipped. . Select a value. infotainment system. Press 5 / 0 0 BACK: Press to: Turning the System On or Off again, or turn the VOL/ O knob to VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to cancel mute. . Exit a menu. turn the system on and off. . Return from a submenu screen to the previous menu screen. . Delete the last character in a sequence. 6-8 Infotainment System

Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to move the highlighted bar. highlight the setting. highlight the function. 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to select the highlighted option. activate the setting. turn the function on or off. Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence

An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to the menu indicates that it has a change the current value of the highlight the character. submenu with other options. setting. 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to select the character. confirm the setting. Infotainment System 6-9

Press the 0 BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the Fader and Balance the last character in the sequence and Bass or press and hold to delete the entire character sequence. Audio Settings The audio settings can be set for each radio band and each audio player source. 1. Press the TONE button. 1. Press the TONE button. To quickly reset an audio setting 2. Select Fader or Balance. value to 0: 2. Select Treble, Midrange, 3. Select the value. or Bass. 1. Press the TONE button. 0 3. Select the value. Press the BACK button to go 2. Select the audio setting. back to the Tone Settings menu. Press the 0 BACK button to go 3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL back to the Tone Settings menu. button until the value changes to 0. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the Tone Settings menu. 6-10 Infotainment System

Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) System Settings Auto Volume For vehicles that have an equalizer: Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that the volume level is consistent. The level of volume compensation can be selected, or the auto volume 1. Press the TONE button. feature can be turned off. 2. Select EQ. To configure the number of available favorite pages: 3. Select the setting. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Press the 0 BACK button to go 2. Select Radio Settings. back to the Tone Settings menu. 3. Select Radio Favorites. 4. Select the number of available 1. Press the CONFIG button. favorite pages. 2. Select Radio Settings. 5. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume. Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting. 5. Press the 0 BACK button to go back to the System Configuration menu. Infotainment System 6-11

Maximum Startup Volume Radio k : Press to pause and resume The maximum volume played when time shifted data. See “Time Shifting the Radio with CD is first turned on AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” can be set. later in this section. Control Buttons 1 to 6: Press to select preset The buttons used to control the stations. radio are: RDS (Radio Data System) RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the The radio may have RDS. The RDS radio on and choose between AM, feature is available for use only on FM, and XM , if equipped. ™ FM stations that broadcast RDS 1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SEL: Turn to manually information. This feature only works 2. Select Radio Settings. search for stations. when the information from the radio station is available. In rare cases, 3. Select Maximum Startup FAV: Press to open the favorites list. a radio station could broadcast Volume. incorrect information that causes the 4. Select the setting. l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to radio features to work improperly. 0 search for stations. Press and hold If this happens, contact the radio 5. Press the BACK button to fast forward and rewind time station. to go back to the System shifted data. See “Time Shifting While the radio is tuned to an Configuration menu. (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” later in this section. FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. 6-12 Infotainment System

Radio Menus If the radio station is known: Station Lists Radio menus are available for AM Press and hold g SEEK or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. and FM. l SEEK until the station on the 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All Press the MENU/SEL knob to open display is reached, then release the receivable stations in the current the main radio menu for that band. button. reception area are displayed. If a station list has not been created, Selecting a Band Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) an automatic station search Press the RADIO/BAND button is done. l g to choose AM, FM, or XM™, Briefly press SEEK or SEEK, 3. Select the station. if equipped. The last station that to automatically search for the next was playing starts playing again. available station. If a station is not Category Lists found, the radio switches to a more Selecting a Station Most stations that broadcast an sensitive search level. If a station RDS program type code specify the Seek Tuning (Radio with CD) still is not found, the frequency that type of programming transmitted. was last active begins to play. If the radio station is not known: Some stations change the program Manual Tuning type code depending on the Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK, content. The system stores the RDS to automatically search for the next Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select stations sorted by program type in available station. If a station is not the frequency on the display. the FM category list. found, the radio switches to a more Favorites List To search for a programming type sensitive search level. If a station 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. determined by station: still is not found, the frequency that was last active begins to play. 2. Select Favorites List. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. 3. Select the station. 2. Select FM category list. A list of all programming types available displays. Infotainment System 6-13

3. Select the programming type. Storing a Station as a Favorite Time Shifting (Radio with A list of stations that transmit Stations from all bands can be CD/DVD and MEM) programming of the selected stored in any order in the favorite type displays. The radio with MEM time shift pages. feature can rewind 20 minutes of 4. Select the station. Up to six stations can be stored in FM/AM content. While listening to The category lists are updated each favorite page and the number the radio, the content from the when the station lists are of available favorite pages can current station is always being updated. be set. buffered. Updating Station & Category Lists Storing a Station as a Favorite Press the k button to pause the radio. The radio displays the time If stations stored in the station list To store the station to a position in shift status bar. The status bar can no longer be received. the list, press the corresponding shows the amount of content that 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. is stored in the buffer and the 2. Select Update AM or FM Station Retrieving stations current pause point. List, if the stations stored in Press the FAV button to open a To resume playback from the the station list are no longer favorite page or to switch to another current pause point, press the received. A station search will be favorite page. Briefly press one of k button again. The radio is no completed and the first station in the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the longer live, but played from the time the updated list will play. station. shift buffer. A status bar displays To cancel the station search, press below the station number. the MENU/SEL knob. Press and hold the g SEEK or l SEEK buttons to fast forward or rewind through the time shift buffer. Hold l SEEK until the end of the recorded buffer resumes live playback. 6-14 Infotainment System

Press and release the g SEEK or Satellite Radio Control Buttons l SEEK buttons to jump forward or Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite The buttons used to control the XM back 30 seconds in the time shift Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite radio are: buffer. Radio subscription can receive XM RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the When the radio station is changed, programming. radio on and choose between AM, the buffer is cleared and XM Satellite Radio Service FM, and XM™, if equipped. automatically restarted for the g l current station. Content from a XM is a satellite radio service that SEEK / SEEK: Press to go to the previous or next station. previously tuned station is no longer is based in the 48 contiguous available. United States and 10 Canadian FAV: Press to open the The time shift feature is not provinces. XM Satellite Radio has favorites list. available while recording or with a wide variety of programming k : Press to pause and resume and commercial-free music, other sources of playback. time shifted data. See “Time Shifting coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle ” sound. A service fee is required to later in this section. Turned Off receive the XM service. For more 1 to 6: Press to select preset If AM/FM is paused when the information, contact XM at stations. vehicle is turned off, the radio www.xmradio.com or call continues to buffer the current radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations. station for up to 20 minutes. If the www.xmradio.ca or call Press to open the XM Satellite vehicle is turned back on within 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Radio menu. 20 minutes, the radio resumes playback from the paused point. Infotainment System 6-15

Selecting the XM Band Selecting an XM Channel Selecting a Channel Using the MENU/SEL Knob Press the RADIO/BAND button to XM channels can be selected by choose between the AM, FM and using g SEEK, l SEEK, the To select an XM channel using the XM bands. The last channel played MENU/SEL knob, or the menu MENU/SEL knob: in that band begins to play when system. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to that band is selected. highlight an XM channel, the Selecting a Channel Using XM Categories channel is selected after a short g SEEK or l SEEK delay. XM channels are organized in (Radio with CD) categories. To select a channel using the menu: . Press and release g SEEK or 1. Turn the menu knob and select Removing or Adding Categories l SEEK to go to the previous Channel List. Channels in a category that have or next channel. 2. Select the desired channel. been removed can still be accessed . Press and hold g SEEK or Selecting a Channel Using the by using the g SEEK or l SEEK l SEEK to scroll through the Menu System buttons, or the MENU/SEL knob. previous or next channel until To add or remove categories: the channel is reached. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Selecting a Channel Using 2. Select XM Category List. 2. Select Radio Settings. g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio with 3. Select the category. CD/DVD and MEM) 3. Select XM Categories. 4. Select the channel. g 4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Press and release SEEK or highlight the category. l SEEK to go to the previous or next channel. 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to remove or add the category. 6-16 Infotainment System

Storing an XM Channel as a Time Shifting (Radio with Press and release the g SEEK or Favorite CD/DVD and MEM) l SEEK buttons to go to the next Channels from all bands can be The radio with MEM time shift or previous song in the time shift stored in any order in the favorite feature can rewind 20 minutes of buffer. pages. XM content. While listening to the When the channel is changed, the Up to six channels can be stored in radio, the content from the current buffer is cleared and automatically each favorite page and the number channel is always being buffered. restarted for the current channel. Content from a previously tuned of available favorite pages can k button to pause the Press the station is no longer available. be set. radio. The radio displays the time The time shift feature is not Storing a Channel as a Favorite shift status bar. The status bar shows the amount of content that is available while recording or with To store the channel to a position stored in the buffer and the current other sources of playback. in the list, press and hold the pause point. corresponding 1 to 6 button until Pausing XM with the Vehicle the channel can be heard again. To resume playback from the Turned Off current pause point, press the If XM is paused when the vehicle is Retrieving Channels k button again. The radio is no turned off, the radio continues to Press the FAV button to open a longer live, but played from the time buffer the current radio station for favorite page or to change to shift buffer. A status bar displays up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is another favorite page. Briefly press below the channel number. turned back on within 20 minutes, one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve Press and hold the g SEEK or the radio resumes playback from the the channel. l SEEK buttons to fast forward or paused point. rewind through the time shift buffer. Hold l SEEK until the end of the recorded buffer resumes live playback. Infotainment System 6-17

XM Messages No Artist Info: The system CAT Not Found: The system is is working properly. No artist working properly. There are no XL (Explicit Language information is available at this time channels available for the selected Channels): These channels, or any on this channel. category. others, can be blocked by request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). No Title Info: The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, working properly. No song title this message alternates with the XM Updating: The encryption code information is available at this time XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This in the receiver is being updated, no on this channel. label is needed to activate the action is required. This process service. should take no longer than No CAT Info: The system is 30 seconds. working properly. No category Unknown: If this message is information is available at this time received when tuned to channel 0, Loading XM: The audio system is on this channel. there could be a receiver fault. acquiring and processing audio and Consult with your dealer/retailer. text data, no action is needed. This No Information: The system message should disappear shortly. is working properly. No text or Check Antenna: If this message informational messages are does not clear within a short period Channel Off Air: This channel is available at this time on this of time, the receiver could have a not currently in service. Tune in to channel. fault. Consult with your dealer/ another channel. No XM Signal: The system is retailer. Channel Unauth: This channel is working properly. The vehicle may XM Not Available: If this message blocked or cannot be received with be in a location where the XM signal does not clear within a short period your XM Subscription package. is being blocked. When the vehicle of time, the receiver could have a Channel Unavailable: This is moved into an open area, the fault. Consult with your dealer/ previously assigned channel is no signal should return. retailer. longer assigned. Tune to another station. 6-18 Infotainment System

Radio Reception AM Cellular Phone Usage Frequency interference and static The range for most AM stations is Cellular phone usage can cause can occur during normal radio greater than for FM, especially at interference with the vehicle's radio. reception if items such as cell phone night. The longer range can cause chargers, vehicle convenience station frequencies to interfere with Multi-Band Antenna each other. Static can occur when accessories, and external electronic The multi-band antenna is located devices are plugged into the things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When on the roof of the vehicle. The accessory power outlet. If there is antenna is used for the AM/FM interference or static, unplug the this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. radio, OnStar, the XM Satellite item from the accessory power Radio Service System, and GPS outlet. XM™ Satellite Radio Service (Global Positioning System); if the vehicle has these features. Keep FM XM Satellite Radio Service gives the antenna clear of obstructions for FM signals only reach about 16 to digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous clear reception. If the vehicle has 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the a sunroof and it is open, the United States, and in Canada. Just radio has a built-in electronic circuit performance of the AM/FM radio, that automatically works to reduce as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, OnStar, XM system, and GPS can interference, some static can occur, be affected. especially around tall buildings or causing the sound to fade in and hills, causing the sound to fade in out. In addition, traveling or standing and out. under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. Infotainment System 6-19

Audio Players If the bottom surface of a disc is While using the CD player, use dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, only CDs in good condition or dampen a clean soft cloth in a without any label, load one CD CD Player mild neutral detergent solution at a time, and keep the CD player The CD player can play audio CDs mixed with water, and clean it. and the loading slot free of and MP3 CDs. Wipe the disc from the center to foreign materials, liquids, and the outer edge. debris. The CD player will not play 8 cm (3 in.) CDs. Care of the CD Player Control Buttons Care of CDs Do not add a label to a disc, as it The buttons used to control the CD could get caught in the CD player. player are: Sound quality can be reduced due If a label is needed, label the top CD: Press to choose between the to disc quality, recording method, of the recorded disc with a CD and AUX player. quality of the music recorded, and marking pen. how the disc has been handled. l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to Do not use disc lens cleaners Handle discs carefully and store select tracks or to fast forward or because they could contaminate the them in their original cases or other rewind within a track. protective cases away from direct lens of the disc optics and damage sunlight and dust. If the bottom the CD player. INFO: Press to display additional information about the CD that may surface of a disc is damaged, the Notice: If a label is added to a be available. disc may not play properly or at all. CD, or more than one CD is Do not touch the bottom surface of inserted into the slot at a time, MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. a disc while handling it; this could or an attempt is made to play damage the surface. Pick up discs Z (Eject): Press to remove scratched or damaged CDs, the the CD. by grasping the outer edges or the CD player could be damaged. edge of the hole and the outer edge. k : Press to pause a CD or MP3 track, press again to resume playback. 6-20 Infotainment System

Inserting a CD Selecting a CD Track Fast Forward and Rewind With the printed side facing up, Using the control buttons: Press and hold l SEEK or insert a disc into the CD slot until it . g l g SEEK to fast forward or rewind is drawn in. Press the SEEK or SEEK button to select the previous or within the current track. Removing a CD next track. Selecting an MP3 Track Press the Z button. . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. Using the control buttons: The disc is pushed out of the Using the CD Menu: . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK CD slot. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. button to select the previous or If the disc is not removed after it is 2. Select Tracks list. next track. ejected, it is pulled back in after a . 3. Select the track. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. few seconds. Using the CD Menu: Playing Tracks in Random Order Playing a CD or MP3 CD 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Press the MENU/SEL knob and Press the CD button, if there is a then set Shuffle Songs to On. 2. Select Playlists / Folders. disc in the player it begins playing. 3. Select the playlist or folder. Information about the disc and current track is shown on the 4. Select the track. display depending on the data stored. Infotainment System 6-21

Searching for MP3 Tracks CD/DVD Player mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe The search feature may take some the disc from the center to the The CD/DVD player can play outer edge. time to display the information after CDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, reading the disc due to the amount MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs. Care of the CD/DVD Player of information stored on the disc. FM automatically plays while the The CD/DVD player will not play Do not add a label to a disc, as it disc is being read. 8 cm (3 in.) discs. could get caught in the CD/DVD player. If a label is needed, label Tracks can be searched by: Care of CDs and DVDs the top of the recorded disc with a . Playlists Sound quality can be reduced due marking pen. to disc quality, recording method, . Artists Do not use disc lens cleaners quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the . Albums how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage Handle discs carefully and store . Song Titles the CD/DVD player. them in their original cases or other . Genres protective cases away from direct Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is . Folder View sunlight and dust. If the bottom surface of a disc is damaged, the inserted into the slot at a time, To search for tracks: disc may not play properly or at all. or an attempt is made to play 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Do not touch the bottom surface of scratched or damaged CDs, the a disc while handling it; this could CD player could be damaged. 2. Select Search. damage the surface. Pick up discs While using the CD player, use 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition Song Titles, Genres, edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at or Folder View. a time, and keep the CD player If the bottom surface of a disc is and the loading slot free of 4. Select the track. dirty, take a soft lint free cloth, foreign materials, liquids, and or dampen a clean soft cloth in a debris. mild neutral detergent solution 6-22 Infotainment System

Control Buttons Removing a CD or DVD Using the menu: The buttons used to control the Press the Z button. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. CD/DVD player are: The disc is pushed out of the 2. Select Tracks List. MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose CD/DVD slot. 3. Select the track. between the MEM, CD/DVD, and AUX. If the disc is not removed after it is Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track ejected, it is pulled back in after a l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to few seconds. Press the k button to pause a CD select tracks or to fast forward or or DVD‐A track. Press the k button rewind within a track. Playing a CD or DVD A Disc ‐ again to continue playing the track. INFO: Press to display additional Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button information about the disc that may if there is a disc in the player, it Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in be available. begins playing. Random Order MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and Press the MENU/SEL knob and current track is shown on the then set Shuffle Songs to On. Z (Eject): Press to remove display depending on the data a disc. Fast Forward and Rewind stored. k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A, Press and hold the l SEEK or or DVD‐V, press again to resume Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks g SEEK button to fast forward or playback. Press and hold to stop a Using the control buttons: rewind within the current track. DVD‐V disc. . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK Inserting a CD or DVD button to select the previous or With the printed side facing up, next track. insert a disc into the slot until it is . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. drawn in. Infotainment System 6-23

Playing an MP3 CD or DVD Searching for MP3s on a CD To search for tracks: or DVD Files that are not stored in folders 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. are displayed in the root It is normal for the search feature 2. Select Search. directory (disc). to take some time to display the information after reading the disc 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, The search rate increases if the due to the amount of information Song Titles, or Genres. MENU/SEL knob is continuously stored on the disc. The infotainment turned while searching in a list. 4. Select the track. The search system automatically switches to rate increases if the menu Selecting an MP3 Track FM while the disc is being read. MENU/SEL knob is continuously Using the control buttons: Files that do not have any meta turned while searching in a list. data stored in the ID3 tag display Playing MP3 Tracks in Random . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK as Unknown. button to select the previous or Order next track. Tracks can be searched for by: Press the MENU/SEL knob and . then set Shuffle Songs to On. . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. Playlists . Using the CD or DVD Menu: Artists Recording an Audio or MP3 . CD to MEM 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Albums . See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on 2. Select Folder List. Song Titles . page 6‑25 for more information. 3. Select the folder. Genres 4. Select the track. The number of objects in each category is shown in parentheses after the category. 6-24 Infotainment System

. Playing a DVD‐V Changing the Audio Stream Cursor RIGHT See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . Cursor LEFT System on page 6‑33 for 2. Select Audio Stream. . Up Menu information about how to control a Use the following actions to Video DVD using the wireless 3. Select Change Audio Stream. navigate the menu on a DVD V remote control. ‐ 4. Press MENU/SEL to change the Disc while playing chapters. selection. Selecting a Chapter . Pause (Play) Select Cancel to exit the menu. Using the control buttons: . Chapter List Pausing a DVD . Press the g SEEK or l SEEK . Title List button to select the previous or 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . DVD/DVD next track. 2. Select Pause, to pause the . DVD/AUX . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. disc. Select Unpause to start playback. . AUX/DVD Using DVD Menu: . AUX/AUX 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu To navigate the menu: 2. Select Chapter List. Use the following actions to navigate the title menu on a 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. 3. Select the chapter. DVD‐V Disc. 2. Select the action. Selecting a Title . Select / Enter 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . Cursor UP 2. Select Title List. . Cursor DOWN 3. Select the title. Infotainment System 6-25

Mass Storage INFO: Press to display additional Recording to MEM information about the MEM track O Media (MEM) that may be available. Press REC, then select Record Current Song or Record All Songs Infotainment systems with MEM k : Press to pause the track storage are able to record up to on Disc. If the track has started currently playing, press again to playing, the system will restart the 1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from resume playback. Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs, track and begin recording from the and USB storage devices. The MEM O REC: Press to record music beginning of the track. When the player can also time shift audio from from a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive. song recording is completed, the AM, FM, and XM™ radio. message Song Recorded to MEM FAV (Favorites): Press to display displays, and there may be a slight Music or content that is stored MEM favorites. pause. in MEM that you did not create, 1‐6: Press to select a track or a Songs recorded to MEM are stored or have the right to distribute, must stored playlist. be deleted before the sale or end of as the current date, disc and track the lease of the vehicle. MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. number. Control Buttons Recording From Audio CDs Re-recording a Previously Recorded Disc The buttons used to control the The infotainment system can record MEM player are: the current song playing or all songs If the disc or track has already been from an audio CD to MEM. A status recorded to MEM, the message MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select bar appears on the top of the The Song(s) is Already Recorded the MEM player. display when the recording process displays. l SEEK or g SEEK : Press to starts and disappears when the select tracks or to fast forward or process has ended. Copy protected rewind within a track. CDs cannot be recorded to MEM. 6-26 Infotainment System

Stopping the Recording Recording From MP3/WMA Re-recording a Previously Discs or USB Storage Devices Recorded Disc Press the O REC button while recording from an audio CD to USB Host Support If the disc or track has already been display the stop recording option. recorded to MEM, the message The USB connector uses the USB Select Stop Recording Song The Song(s) is Already Recorded standards, 1.1 and 2.0. to MEM. displays. USB Supported Devices Renaming Recorded Discs Stopping the Recording . USB Flash Drives Discs that have been recorded to Press the O REC button while MEM can be renamed. . Portable USB Hard Drives recording from an MP3/WMA CD or USB storage device to display the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Recording to MEM stop recording option. Select Stop 2. Select Rename Recorded Discs. Press O REC, then select Record Recording Song to MEM. 3. Select the disc. Current Song or Record Current Deleting Tracks From MEM Folder. 4. Select Album or Artist to rename Individual tracks and all tracks can The information stored by MEM is either one. be deleted from MEM. titled according to the ID3 tag 5. Use the menu knob to enter associated with it. To delete individual tracks, press the character sequence. See and release the DEL button while Operation on page 6‑7 for the track is playing. more information. To delete all tracks from MEM, press and hold the DEL button while a track is playing. Infotainment System 6-27

Playing From MEM To search for tracks: To remove MEM favorites categories: Playing Back a Previously 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Recorded CD 2. Select Search. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, 2. Select Radio Settings. a track if MEM is already playing Song Titles, or Genres. 3. Select MEM Favorites. from the previously recorded disc. 4. Select the track. The search rate 4. Remove the check mark from 1. Select Recorded Disc List. increases if the menu knob is the box to remove that MEM 2. Select the disc. continuously turned while favorites category. searching in a list. 3. Select the track. Replace the check mark to re-add Shuffle Songs the removed category. Searching For a Track Select the Shuffle Songs option Saving MEM Tracks as Tracks can be searched for by: from the MEM menu to randomly Favorites . Playlists play back tracks stored in MEM. Favorites can be saved by . Artists Configuring MEM Favorites pressing and holding one of the 1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can be . Albums During MEM playback, press the stored according to the following list: . Song Titles FAV button to change between favorite categories. The favorite Playlist: Adds currently playing . Genres categories are: track to the playlist selected. The number of objects in each . Playlists Artist: Saves the artist associated category is shown in parentheses with the currently playing track in . Artists after the category. the indicated favorites position. . Albums . Genres 6-28 Infotainment System

Album: Saves the album Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack associated with the currently playing Playback of an audio device that is track in the indicated favorites (Radio with CD) connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary position. The auxiliary input allows portable input jack can only be controlled devices to be connected using the Genre: Saves the genre associated using the controls on the device. with the currently playing track in 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the the indicated favorites position. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume Portable devices are controlled by Creating Playlists Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system To create a playlist using tracks Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set stored in MEM: on the portable audio device. 1. Select Playlist from the MEM favorites. USB Port 2. Select the track to be stored in For vehicles with a USB port, the the playlist. following devices may be connected and controlled by the infotainment 3. Press and hold one of the system. 1 to 6 buttons until the track can be heard again to store the . iPod's track. . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD) 4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to store . USB Drives additional tracks in the playlist. . Zune's The auxiliary input is located in the Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives, center console. and Zune's are compatible with the infotainment system. Infotainment System 6-29

Connecting and Controlling To search for tracks: On: Repeats the current track. an iPod™ 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Off: Playback starts from the Not all iPod's can be controlled by 2. Select Search. beginning of the current track after the Infotainment System. the last track finishes. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Connecting an iPod Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, Connecting and Controlling a Connect the iPod to the USB port. Audiobooks, or Composers. PlaysForSure Device (PFD) 4. Select the track. or Zune™ Searching For a Track Connecting a PFD or Zune Tracks can be searched for by: Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the . Playlists Press the MENU/SEL knob and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or USB port. . Artists Off, then press the 0 BACK button Searching For a Track . Albums to return the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by: . Song Titles On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists . folder in random order. Podcasts . Artists . Genres Off: Plays tracks in the current folder in sequential order. . Albums . Audiobooks . Repeat Song Titles . Composers . Press the MENU/SEL knob and set Podcasts Repeat to On or Off, then press the . Genres 0 BACK button to return the main screen. 6-30 Infotainment System

To search for tracks: Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by: 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB Drive . Playlists* 2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only . Artists play back .mp3 and .wma files from 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, a USB drive. . Albums Song Titles, Podcasts, . Song Titles or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are recognized on the device. . Genres 4. Select the track. When a device is not supported, . Folder View Shuffle Functionality the message No supported data “ *This only displays if a playlist is found. You can safely disconnect Press the MENU/SEL knob and set found on the device. Shuffle Songs (Random) to On the device” appears. To search for tracks: or Off. Connecting a USB Drive 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. On: Plays current tracks in random Connect the USB drive to the order. USB port. 2. Select Search. Off: Plays current tracks in Searching For a Track 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, sequential order. Song Titles, Genres, It is normal for the search feature to or Folder View. Repeat Functionality take some time to display the Press the MENU/SEL knob and set information after reading the disc 4. Select the track. Repeat to On or Off. due to the amount of information stored on the disc. Repeat On: Repeats the current track. Files that do not have any meta data stored in the ID3 tag display as Repeat Off: Playback starts from Unknown. the beginning of the current track after the last track finishes. Infotainment System 6-31

Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack Press the MENU/SEL knob and set with CD/DVD/MEM) Playback of an audio device that is Shuffle Songs (Random) to On connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary The auxiliary input allows portable or Off. input jack can only be controlled devices to be connected using the using the controls on the device. On: Plays current tracks in random 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the order. optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume Off: Plays current tracks in Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the sequential order. using the menu system described in volume of the infotainment system Repeat Functionality Operation on page 6‑7. after the volume level has been set Press the MENU/SEL knob and set on the portable audio device. Repeat to On or Off. USB Port Repeat On: Repeats the current The following devices may be track. connected to the USB port and Repeat Off: Playback starts from controlled by the infotainment the beginning of the current track system. after the last track finishes. . iPod's . USB Mass Storage Devices Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage Devices are compatible with the infotainment system. The auxiliary input is located in the center console. 6-32 Infotainment System

Connecting and Controlling Searching For a Track Connecting and Controlling a an iPod™ Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive Not all iPod's can be controlled by . Playlists Files that are not stored in folders the Infotainment System. are displayed in the root . Artists directory (USB). Connecting an iPod . Albums Connect the iPod to the USB port. Connecting a USB Drive . Song Titles Connect the USB drive to the Selecting a Track . Genres USB port. Using the control buttons: . Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Audiobooks A USB drive should be ejected from select the previous or next track. The number of objects in each the USB port before disconnecting . Turn the MENU/SEL knob to category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive: select the track in the current after the category. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. sub menu. The track will start To search for tracks: to play. 2. Select USB Eject. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order Playing Tracks in Random Order 2. Select Search. Press the MENU/SEL knob and set Press the MENU/SEL knob and Shuffle Songs to On or Off. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, then set Shuffle Songs to On. Albums, Song Titles, Genres, Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in Composers, or Audiobooks. random order. 4. Select the track. The search rate Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in increases if the MENU/SEL knob sequential order. is continuously turned while searching in a list. Infotainment System 6-33

Selecting a Track Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat Using the control buttons: . Playlists Infotainment . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Artists select the previous or next track. . Albums Rear Seat Entertainment . Turn the MENU/SEL knob to . Song Titles (RSE) System select a track in the current sub . Genres The vehicle may have a DVD Rear menu. The track will start to play. Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. Selecting a track in a different The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the folder: category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The after the category. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. DVD player is part of the front radio. To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio 2. Select Folder List. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. with a DVD player, two rear seat 3. Select the folder. video display screens, audio/video 2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones, 4. Select the track. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, and a remote control. See CD/DVD Searching for Tracks Albums, Song Titles, Genres, Player on page 6‑21 or the Composers, or Audiobooks. separate navigation system manual It is normal for the search feature to for more information on the vehicle's take some time to display the 4. Select the track. The search rate DVD system. information after reading the device increases if the MENU/SEL knob due to the amount of information is continuously turned while stored. searching in a list. Files that do not have any meta Recording Tracks to MEM data stored in the ID3 tag display as Unknown. See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on page 6‑25 for more information. 6-34 Infotainment System

Before Driving On some infotainment systems, the Headphones Global Off feature can be turned off The RSE is for rear seat RSE includes two 2-channel by performing one of the following: passengers only. The driver wireless headphones. Channel 1 cannot safely view the video . Press and hold the radio power is dedicated to the DVD player, screen while driving. button for more than and Channel 2 is dedicated to any three seconds. In severe or extreme weather external auxiliary device connected conditions, the RSE system may not . Insert or eject any disc. to the A/V jacks. The headphones are used to listen to various work until the temperature is within . Insert a DVD video disc. the operating range. The operating multi‐media. The wireless range is above −20°C (−4°F) . Press the Remote Control power headphones have an On/Off button, and below 60°C (140°F). If the button. channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. Turn the headphones off temperature is outside of this range, . Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button when not in use. heat or cool the vehicle until it is or the k button when a DVD within the operating range. Push the On/Off button to turn on video disc is in the player. the headphones. A light on the Global Off . Press the SRC button on the headphones comes on. If the light Depending on the infotainment steering wheel when a DVD does not come on, check the system, the RSE system may video disc is in the player. batteries. Intermittent sound or static have a Global Off feature. The . Cycle the ignition. can also indicate weak batteries. Global Off feature disables all RSE See “Battery Replacement” later in system features. Press and hold this section for more information. the radio power button for more than three seconds for Global Off to disable the RSE features. Infotainment System 6-35

Infrared transmitters are on the Notice: Do not store the Remove the batteries if the top of the left seatback video headphones in heat or direct headphones are not going to be screen. The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the used for a long period of time. automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not power if the RSE system is shut be covered by the warranty. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks off or if the headphones are out of Storage in extreme cold can If available, the A/V jacks are range of the transmitters for more weaken the batteries. Keep the located on the rear of the floor than three minutes. Moving too headphones stored in a cool, dry console. They allow audio or video far forward or stepping out of the place. cables to be connected from an vehicle, can cause the headphones If the foam ear pads become worn auxiliary device such as a to lose the signal or have static. or damaged, they can be replaced camcorder or a video game system. The headphones may automatically separately from the headphones. The A/V jacks are color coded: turn off after four hours of See your dealer/retailer for more . Yellow for video input. continuous use. information. . White for left audio input. To adjust the volume on the Battery Replacement headphones, use the volume . Red for right audio input. To change the batteries: control. Power for auxiliary devices is not For best audio performance, the 1. Loosen the screw to the battery supplied by the radio system. headphones must be worn correctly, door located on the left side of the headphones. To use the auxiliary inputs of the with the headband over the top of RSE system: the head. L (Left) and R (Right) 2. Slide the battery door open. 1. Connect the auxiliary device are above the ear pads and 3. Replace the two AAA batteries. are indicators as to how the cables to the A/V jacks. headphones should be placed on 4. Replace the battery door and 2. Power on both the auxiliary the head. tighten the screw. device and the RSE video screen. 6-36 Infotainment System

Changing the Source on the Video 4. Press the AUX button a fourth Audio Output Display Screens time to change the source of Audio from the DVD player or both video screens to the DVD The image from the auxiliary device auxiliary inputs can be heard player. can be switched between the video through the following: display screens. How to Change the RSE Video . Wireless Headphones To change the display: Screen Settings . Vehicle Speakers 1. Press the AUX button on the The screen display mode, The RSE system transmits the remote control to change the brightness, and language can be audio signal to the wireless source of both video screens changed from the setup menu using headphones if an audio signal is from the DVD player to the the remote control. To change a available. See Headphones earlier auxiliary device. setting: “ ” in this section for more information. 2. Press the AUX button a second 1. Press z . The front seat passengers are able time to change the left video n q p o r to listen to playback from the A/V screen source to the DVD player 2. Use , , , and to jacks through the vehicle speakers and the right video screen to the select the settings. by selecting Rear A/V as the source auxiliary device. 3. Press z again to exit the on the radio. 3. Press the AUX button a third setup menu. time to change the left video screen source to the auxiliary device and the right video screen to the DVD player. Infotainment System 6-37

Video Screens Push the video screen down into its Video Screen Input Jack locked position when it is not in use, The video screens are located in the Each video screen is equipped the screen turns off automatically. back of the driver and front with a video input jack to allow passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console video cables to be connected from contains the infrared transmitters for an auxiliary device such as a the wireless headphones, they may camcorder or a video game system. be visible as eight illuminated LEDs. This signal will override any video These LEDs are not on the right provided by the RSE system; either video screen. Both seatback the DVD or Auxiliary A/V jack consoles contain an infrared source. The RSE system must be receiver for the remote control. on for this input to operate. They are located at the top of each console. Remote Control Notice: Avoid directly touching To use the remote control, aim it at the video screen, as damage may the transmitter window at either occur. See “Cleaning the Video seatback console and press the Screen” later in this section for button. Direct sunlight or very bright To use the video screen: more information. light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals 1. Push the release button located from the remote control. Check on the seatback console. the batteries if the remote control 2. Move the screen to the desired does not seem to be working. See viewing position. “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control. 6-38 Infotainment System

If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the v (Title): Press to return to the c (Stop): Press to stop playing, Radio DVD slot, the remote control main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a O button can be used to turn on function could vary for each disc. DVD. Press twice to return to the the video screen display and start y (Main Menu): Press to access beginning of the DVD. the disc. The infotainment system s can also turn on the video screen the DVD menu. The DVD menu is (Play/Pause): Press to start display. See CD/DVD Player on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press to pause a page 6‑21 or the separate navigation arrows to move the DVD while it is playing. Press again navigation system manual for cursor. After making a selection to continue playing. more information. press the enter button. This button Depending on the infotainment only operates when using a DVD. system in the vehicle, DVD Notice: Storing the remote n q p o control in a hot area or in direct , , , (Menu Navigation playback may be slowed down by sunlight can damage it, and the Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to pressing s then [. Reverse navigate through a menu. repairs will not be covered by the slow play by pressing s then r. warranty. Storage in extreme cold r (Enter): Press to select the Press s again to cancel slow play. can weaken the batteries. Keep highlighted choice in any menu. the remote control stored in a t (Previous Track/Chapter): z (Display Menu): Press to cool, dry place. Press to go to the start of the adjust the brightness, screen current track or chapter. Press display mode, and display the Remote Control Buttons again to go to the previous track or language menu. O (Power): Press to turn the chapter. This button may not work video screens on and off. q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the current active menu and return to (Illumination): Press to turn copyright information or the P the previous menu. This button the remote control backlight on. previews. operates only when the display The backlight times out after several menu or a DVD menu is active. seconds if no other button is pressed. Infotainment System 6-39 u (Next Track/Chapter): Press e (Audio): Press to change audio } 10 (Double Digit Entries) to go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this (If Available): Press this button to chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. select chapter or track numbers not work when the DVD is playing { (Subtitles): Press to turn greater than 9. Press this button the copyright information or the ON/OFF subtitles and to move before inputting the number. previews. through subtitle options when a 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): r (Fast Reverse): Press to DVD is playing. The numbered keypad provides the quickly reverse the DVD or CD. AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch capability of direct chapter or track To stop fast reversing a DVD video, number selection. s the video display between the DVD press . To stop fast reversing a player and an auxiliary source. Replacing the Remote Control DVD audio or CD, release r. d (Camera): Press to change If the remote control becomes lost This button might not work when the camera angle on DVDs that or damaged, a new universal the DVD is playing the copyright have this feature when the DVD is remote control can be purchased. information or the previews. playing. Use a Toshiba® code set for [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast \ (Clear) (If Available): Press replacement universal remote forward the DVD or CD. To stop this button within three seconds controls. fast forwarding a DVD video, after inputting a numeric selection, press s To stop fast forwarding to clear all numeric inputs. a DVD audio or CD, release [. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. 6-40 Infotainment System

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action batteries: No power. The ignition might not be turned to 1. Slide back the rear cover on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. remote control. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in 2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the compartment. and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote 3. Replace the battery cover. looks stretched out. control. Remove the batteries from the In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input remote control if unused for an or scrolls. connections at both devices. extended period of time. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window. Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly. After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD. Infotainment System 6-41

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen has. The video screen may display there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode by one of the following: pressing the AUX button on the remote control. Disc Load/Eject Error or Check the auxiliary input Mechanical Error: There are connections at both devices. disc load or eject problems. Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Disc Format Error or Unknown audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and Format: The disc is inserted with interference from cellular telephone the disc label wrong side up, or if towers or by using a cellular the disc is damaged. telephone in the vehicle. Disc Region Error or Disc Error: Check that the headphones are The disc is not from a correct on correctly using the L (left) and region. R (right) on the headphones. Check that the headphones are No Disc Inserted: No disc is positioned properly with the present when the Z EJECT or headband across the top of MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed the head. on the radio. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player by pressing the AUX button on the remote control. 6-42 Infotainment System

DVD Distortion Phone Steering Wheel Controls Video distortion can occur when b / g (Push To Talk): Press to operating cellular phones, scanners, Bluetooth (Overview) answer incoming calls, to confirm CB radios, Global Position Systems system information, and to start (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, Vehicles with a Bluetooth system voice recognition. or walkie talkies. can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to $ / c (Mute/End Call): Press to It might be necessary to turn off the make and receive phone calls. end a call, reject a call, or to cancel DVD player when operating one of The infotainment system and voice an operation. these devices in or near the vehicle. recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls *Excludes the OnStar® System. system. The system can be used while the ignition is in ON/RUN or For information about how to Cleaning the RSE Seatback ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of navigate the menu system using Console the Bluetooth system can be up to the infotainment controls, see 9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support Operation on page 6‑7. Use only a clean cloth dampened 5 with clean water to clean the RSE all functions and not all phones (Phone): Press to enter the seatback console surface. work with the Bluetooth system. Phone main menu. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for Cleaning the Video Screen more information about compatible Voice Recognition phones. Use only a clean cloth dampened The voice recognition system uses with clean water. Use care when Bluetooth Controls commands to control the system touching or cleaning the screen as and dial phone numbers. Use the buttons located on the damage could result. Noise: The system may not infotainment system and the recognize voice commands if there steering wheel to operate the is too much background noise. Bluetooth system. Infotainment System 6-43

When to Speak: A tone sounds to Bluetooth (Infotainment Pairing Information: indicate that the system is ready for Controls) . Up to five cell phones can be a voice command. Wait for the tone paired to the Bluetooth system. and then speak. For information about how to navigate the menu system using the . The pairing process is disabled How to Speak: Speak clearly in a when the vehicle is moving. calm and natural voice. infotainment controls, see Operation on page 6‑7. . The Bluetooth system links with Audio System Pairing the first available paired cell When using the Bluetooth system, phone in the order the phone sound comes through the vehicle's A Bluetooth enabled cell phone was paired. must be paired to the Bluetooth front audio system speakers and . system first and then connected to Only one paired cell phone can overrides the audio system. Use be connected to the Bluetooth O the vehicle before it can be used. the VOL/ knob during a call to See the cell phone manufacturer system at a time. change the volume level. The user guide for Bluetooth functions . Pairing should only need to be adjusted volume level remains in before pairing the cell phone. If a completed once, unless changes memory for later calls. The system Bluetooth phone is not connected, to the pairing information have maintains a minimum volume level. calls will be made using OnStar® been made or the phone is Other Information Hands‐Free Calling, if available. deleted. Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide ® To link to a different paired phone, The Bluetooth word mark and for more information. logos are owned by the Bluetooth® see “Linking to a Different Phone” SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks The pairing process can be started later in this section. by General Motors is under license. by using the voice recognition Other trademarks and trade names system or the controls on the are those of their respective owners. infotainment system. See Radio Frequency Statement on page 12‑16 for FCC information. 6-44 Infotainment System

Pairing a Phone 7. The system responds with Linking to a Different Phone 1. Press the CONFIG button. “ has been To link to a different phone, the new successfully paired” after the 2. Select Phone Settings. phone must be in the vehicle and pairing process is complete. available to be connected to the 3. Select Bluetooth. 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair bluetooth system before the process 4. Select Pair Device (Phone). additional phones. is started. A four digit PIN number appears Listing All Paired and Connected 1. Press the CONFIG button. on the display. Phones 2. Select Phone Settings. 5. Start the pairing process on the 1. Press the CONFIG button. cell phone that will be paired to 3. Select Bluetooth. the vehicle. Reference the cell 2. Select Phone Settings. 4. Select Device List. phone manufacturers user guide 3. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select the new phone to link to for information on this process. 4. Select Device List. and follow the on screen Locate the device named prompts. Deleting a Paired Phone “General Motors” in the list on If delete is selected, the the cell phone and follow the 1. Press the CONFIG button. highlighted phone will be instructions on the cell phone to 2. Select Phone Settings. deleted. enter the four digit PIN number provided by the system. 3. Select Bluetooth. 6. The system prompts for a name 4. Select Device List. for the phone and confirms the 5. Select the phone to delete and name provided. This name is follow the on screen prompts. used to indicate which phone is connected. Infotainment System 6-45

Making a Call Accepting or Declining a Call Declining a Call Radio with CD When a call is received, the Turn the MENU/SEL knob infotainment system mutes and a to Decline and press the 1. Press the 5 / 0 button. ring tone is heard in the vehicle. MENU/SEL knob. 2. Enter the character sequence. Accepting a Call Switching Between Calls See “Entering a Character (Call Waiting Calls Only) Sequence” in Operation on Turn the MENU/SEL knob To switch between calls: page 6‑7 for more information. to Answer and press the MENU/SEL knob. 3. Select Call to start dialing the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. number. Declining a Call 2. Select Switch Call from the menu. Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Decline and press the Conference Calling 1. Press the 5 / 0 button. MENU/SEL knob. Conference calling and three way 2. Select Enter number. Call Waiting calling must be supported on the 3. Enter the character sequence. Call waiting must be supported on bluetooth phone and enabled by the See “Entering a Character the bluetooth phone and enabled by wireless service carrier to work. Sequence” in Operation on the wireless service carrier to work. To start a conference while in a page 6‑7 for more information. Accepting a Call current call: 4. Select Call to start dialing the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. number. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Answer and press the 2. Select Enter Number. MENU/SEL knob. 6-46 Infotainment System

3. Enter the character sequence Muting a Call Bluetooth then select Call. See “Entering (Voice Recognition) a Character Sequence” in To Mute a Call Operation on page 6‑7 for Press the MENU/SEL knob and Pairing more information. select Mute Call. A Bluetooth cell phone must be 4. After the call has been placed, To Cancel Mute paired to the Bluetooth system and press the MENU/SEL knob and then connected to the vehicle before choose Merge Calls. Press the MENU/SEL knob and select Mute Call. it can be used. See the cell phone 5. To add more callers to the manufacturers user guide for conference call, repeat Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Bluetooth functions before pairing Steps 1 through 4. The amount (DTMF) Tones the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone of callers that can be added are is not connected, calls will be made The in vehicle Bluetooth system can ® ‐ using OnStar Hands Free Calling, limited by your wireless service send numbers during a call. This is ‐ if available. Refer to the OnStar carrier. used when calling a menu driven owner's guide for more information. Ending a Call phone system. The pairing process can be started 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob and Press the MENU/SEL knob and by using the voice recognition select Enter Number. select Hang Up. system or the controls on the 2. Enter the character sequence, infotainment system. see “Entering a Character Sequence” in Operation on page 6‑7 for more information. Infotainment System 6-47

Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone 4. Start the pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press b / g. paired to the Bluetooth system. the vehicle. Reference the cell . For vehicles without a phone manufacturers user guide . The pairing process is disabled navigation system, the for information on this process. when the vehicle is moving. system responds “Ready”, Locate the device named . The Bluetooth system links with followed by a tone. “General Motors” in the list on the first available paired cell . For vehicles with a the cell phone and follow the phone in the order the phone navigation system, the instructions on the cell phone to was paired. system responds with a enter the four‐digit PIN number . Only one paired cell phone can tone. After the tone say that was provided in Step 3. be connected to the Bluetooth “Hands Free”. The system 5. The system prompts for a name system at a time. responds “Ready”, followed for the phone. This name will be by a tone. . Pairing only needs to be used to indicate which phone is completed once, unless the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system connected. The system confirms pairing information changes or responds “Bluetooth ready”, the name. the phone is deleted. followed by a tone. 6. The system responds with To link to a different paired phone, 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds “ has been see Linking to a Different Phone with instructions and a four‐digit successfully paired” after the later in this section. PIN number. The PIN number pairing process is complete. will be used in Step 4. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired. 6-48 Infotainment System

Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Say the name of the phone to Phones be deleted. If the phone name 1. Press / . b g is unknown, use the “List” 1. Press / g. b . For vehicles without a command for a list of all paired . For vehicles without a navigation system, the phones. The system responds navigation system, the system responds “Ready”, “Would you like to delete system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. ? Yes or No”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone. . For vehicles with a . For vehicles with a navigation system, the 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. navigation system, the system responds with a The system responds “OK, system responds with a tone. After the tone say deleting ”. tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system Linking to a Different Phone “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 1. Press b / g. by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system . For vehicles without a 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds “Bluetooth ready”, navigation system, the responds “Bluetooth ready”, followed by a tone. system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks followed by a tone. 3. Say “List”. The system lists all which phone to delete followed . For vehicles with a the paired Bluetooth devices. by a tone. navigation system, the The system will respond “is system responds with a connected” if a phone is tone. After the tone say connected to the vehicle. “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. Infotainment System 6-49

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number responds “Bluetooth ready”, The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no followed by a tone. number to be stored without pauses. 3. Say “Change phone”. The entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes system responds “Please wait the number, the response is while I search for other phones”. 1. Press b / g. “OK, Storing”. . If another phone is found, . For vehicles without a . If the system does not the response will be navigation system, the recognize the phone “ is now system responds “Ready”, number, the response is connected”. followed by a tone. “Store ”. . Please say yes or no . . If another phone is not For vehicles with a “ ” found, the original phone navigation system, the If the number is correct, say remains connected. system responds with a “Yes”. If the number is not tone. After the tone say correct, say “No”. The Storing Name Tags “Hands Free”. The system system will ask for the number again. The system can store up to responds “Ready”, followed thirty phone numbers as name by a tone. 4. After the system stores the tags that are shared between the 2. Say “Store”. The system phone number, it responds Bluetooth and OnStar systems. responds “Store, number “Please say the name tag”, followed by a tone. The system uses the following please”, followed by a tone. commands to store and retrieve phone numbers: . Store . Digit Store . Directory 6-50 Infotainment System

5. Say a name tag for the phone . For vehicles with a 4. After the complete number has number. The name tag is navigation system, the been entered, say “Store”. The recorded and the system system responds with a system responds “Please say responds “About to store tone. After the tone say the name tag”, followed by . Does that “Hands Free”. The system a tone. sound OK?”. responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone . If the name tag does not number. The name tag is sound correct, say “No” 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system recorded and the system and repeat Step 5. responds with “Please say the responds “About to store first digit to store”, followed by . Does that . If the name tag sounds a tone. sound OK? . correct, say “Yes” and the ” name tag is stored. After 3. Say the first digit to be stored. . If the name tag does not the number is stored the The system will repeat back the sound correct, say “No” and system returns to the digit it heard followed by a tone. repeat Step 5. main menu. Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete. . If the name tag sounds Using the Digit Store Command correct, say “Yes” and the . If an unwanted number is name tag is stored. After The digit store command allows a recognized by the system, the number is stored the phone number to be stored by say “Clear” at any time to system returns to the entering the digits individually. clear the last number. main menu. 1. Press b / g. . To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, . For vehicles without a say Verify at any time. navigation system, the “ ” system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. Infotainment System 6-51

Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds Delete, please say The directory command lists all of The system uses the following “ the name tag , followed by the name tags stored by the system. commands to delete name tags: ” To use the directory command: a tone. . Delete 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. 1. Press b / g. . Delete all name tags The system responds “Would . you like to delete, ? For vehicles without a Using the Delete Command navigation system, the Please say yes or no”. The delete command is used to system responds “Ready”, . If the name tag is correct, delete specific name tags. followed by a tone. say “Yes” to delete the . For vehicles with a To delete name tags: name tag. The system responds with “OK, deleting navigation system, the 1. Press / g. system responds with a b , returning to tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a the main menu.” “Hands Free”. The system navigation system, the . If the name tag is incorrect, responds “Ready”, followed system responds “Ready”, say “No”. The system by a tone. followed by a tone. responds with “No. OK, let's 2. Say “Directory”. The system . For vehicles with a try again, please say the responds “Directory” and lists all navigation system, the name tag.” stored name tags. The system system responds with a returns to the main menu when tone. After the tone say the list is complete. “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. 6-52 Infotainment System

Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The Using the Dial Command Command system responds “You are about 1. Press b / g. The Delete All Name Tags to delete all name tags stored in command deletes all stored phone your phone directory and your . For vehicles without a book name tags and route name route destination directory. Are navigation system, the tags for OnStar, if stored. you sure you want to do this? system responds “Ready”, Please say yes or no.” followed by a tone. To delete all name tags: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a 1. Press b / g . name tags. navigation system, the system responds with a . For vehicles without a . Say “No” to cancel the navigation system, the function and return to the tone. After the tone say Hands Free . The system system responds “Ready”, main menu. “ ” followed by a tone. responds “Ready”, followed Making a Call by a tone. . For vehicles with a Calls can be made using the navigation system, the 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds following commands: system responds with a “Dial using . tone. After the tone say . Dial “Number please”, followed by a tone. “Hands Free”. The system . Digit Dial responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. . Call . Re‐dial Infotainment System 6-53

3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at pausing. a time. The system repeats back 1. Press b / g. the digit it heard followed by . If the system recognizes the number, it responds . For vehicles without a a tone. with “OK, Dialing” and dials navigation system, the 4. Continue entering digits until the the number. system responds “Ready”, number to be dialed is complete. followed by a tone. After the whole number has . If the system does not recognize the number, it . For vehicles with a been entered, say “Dial”. The confirms the numbers navigation system, the system responds “OK, Dialing” followed by a tone. If the system responds with a and dials the number. number is correct, say tone. After the tone say . If an unwanted number is “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system recognized by the system, “OK, Dialing” and dials the responds “Ready”, followed say “Clear” at any time to number. If the number is by a tone. clear the last number. not correct, say No . The “ ” 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . To hear all of the numbers system will ask for the responds “Digit dial using recognized by the system, number again. , please say the say “Verify” at any time. first digit to dial”, followed by a tone. 6-54 Infotainment System

Using the Call Command 3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command to call. 1. Press b / g. 1. Press b / g. . If the system recognizes . For vehicles without a the name tag it responds . For vehicles without a navigation system, the “OK, calling, ” navigation system, the system responds “Ready”, and dials the number. system responds “Ready”, followed by a tone. followed by a tone. . If the system does not . For vehicles with a recognize the name tag, it . For vehicles with a navigation system, the confirms the name tag navigation system, the system responds with a followed by a tone. If the system responds with a tone. After the tone say name tag is correct, say tone. After the tone say “Hands Free”. The system “Yes”. The system responds “Hands Free”. The system responds “Ready”, followed with “OK, calling, ” and dials the number. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds If the name tag is not 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The “Call using . correct, say “No”. The system responds “Re‐dial using Please say the name tag”, system will ask for the ” and dials the followed by a tone. name tag again. last number called from the Once connected, the person called connected Bluetooth phone. will be heard through the audio Once connected, the person called speakers. will be heard through the audio speakers. Infotainment System 6-55

Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the tone is heard in the vehicle. and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call carrier. cannot hear them. . Press b g to answer the call. 1. While on a call, press b g. The To Mute a call . Press c / $ to ignore a call. system responds with Ready , “ ” 1. Press . The system followed by a tone. b g Call Waiting responds “Ready”, followed by Call waiting must be supported on 2. Say “Three‐way call”. a tone. The system responds with the Bluetooth phone and enabled by 2. Say Mute Call . The system “Three‐way call, please say dial “ ” the wireless service carrier. responds Call muted . or call”. “ ” . Press b g to answer an 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute incoming call when another call dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g. The system is active. The original call is to be called. placed on hold. responds “Ready”, followed by 4. Once the call is connected, a tone. . Press b g again to return to the press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. original call. together. The system responds . To ignore the incoming call, no Ending a Call “Resuming call”. action is required. Press / to end a call. . Press c / $ to disconnect the c $ current call and switch to the call on hold. 6-56 Infotainment System

Transferring a Call For vehicles without a navigation To access contacts stored in the cell phone: Audio can be transferred between system, press b g during a call the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and with the audio on the cell phone, the 1. Press b / g. the cell phone. audio transfers to the vehicle. . For vehicles without a To Transfer Audio to the Cell For vehicles with a navigation navigation system, the Phone system, press b g during a call system responds “Ready”, with the audio on the cell phone. During a call with the audio in the followed by a tone. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle: . For vehicles with a vehicle, use the audio transfer navigation system, the feature on the cell phone. See the 1. Press b g . The system system responds with a responds “Ready”, followed by cell phone manufacturers user guide for more information. tone. After the tone say a tone. “Hands Free”. The system 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system Voice Pass-Thru responds “Ready”, followed responds Transferring call and by a tone. “ ” Voice pass thru allows access to the the audio transfers to the cell ‐ voice recognition commands on the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system phone. cell phone. See the cell phone responds “Bluetooth ready”, To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle manufacturers user guide to see if followed by a tone. Bluetooth System the cell phone supports this feature. 3. Say “Voice”. The system The cell phone must be paired responds “OK, accessing and connected with the Bluetooth ”. system before a call can be . The cell phone's normal transferred. The connection process prompt messages will go can take up to two minutes after the through its cycle according ignition is turned to ON/RUN or to the phone's operating ACC/ACCESSORY. instructions. Infotainment System 6-57

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency . If the system does not . If the system does not (DTMF) Tones recognize the number, it recognize the name tag, it responds “Dial Number, responds “Dial , The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can please say yes or no?”, please say yes or no?”, send numbers and the numbers followed by a tone. If the followed by a tone. If the stored as name tags during a call. number is correct, say name tag is correct, say Use this feature when calling a “Yes”. The system responds “Yes”. The system responds menu driven phone system. Account “OK, Sending Number” and with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are Sending a Number During a Call the call continues. sent and the call continues. Sending a Stored Name Tag 1. Press . The system Clearing the System b g During a Call responds “Ready”, followed by Unless information is deleted out of a tone. 1. Press b g. The system the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This 2. Say Dial . The system responds responds “Ready”, followed by “ ” includes all saved name tags in the Say a number to send tones , a tone. “ ” phone book and phone pairing followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The information. For information on how 3. Say the number to send. system responds “Say a name to delete this information, see the tag to send tones”, followed by previous sections on Deleting a . If the system recognizes a tone. the number, it responds Paired Phone and Deleting “OK, Sending Number” and 3. Say the name tag to send. Name Tags. the dial tones are sent and . If the system recognizes the call continues. the number, it responds “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 6-58 Infotainment System

Bluetooth (Navigation) The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone by using the voice recognition For information about how to 1. Press the CONFIG hard key system or the controls on the repeatedly until the Phone menu navigate the menu system using infotainment system. the infotainment controls, see is shown or touch the Phone tab “Overview” under Introduction, Pairing Information: on the screen. in the Navigation supplement. . Up to five cell phones can be Bluetooth Pairing paired to the Bluetooth system. . The pairing process is disabled To make calls with a Bluetooth cell when the vehicle is moving. phone through your vehicle, it must be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth . The Bluetooth system system first and then connected automatically links with the to the vehicle before it can be paired cell phone in the order used. Refer to the cell phone the phones are listed in the manufacturer's user guide for device list. Bluetooth pairing instructions. . Only one paired cell phone can If a Bluetooth phone is off or not be connected to the vehicle's connected, calls will automatically Bluetooth system at a time. be made using the OnStar® 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Hands‐Free Calling feature, . Pairing should only need to be if available. Refer to the OnStar completed once. owner's guide for more information about OnStar Hands-Free Calling. Infotainment System 6-59

5. The system responds with “phone name has been successfully paired” after the pairing process is complete. Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab displayed on the screen.

3. Select “Add New Phone”, the On the cell phone, locate the pairing process will begin device named “General Motors”. searching for Bluetooth devices Follow the instructions given on on your cellular phone. See the the cell phone or follow the voice cell phone manufacturer's user prompts, to enter the four digit guide for information on this PIN number that has been process. provided. 4. The system voice prompt requests that you say the name you want used for the phone that is being paired. Use a name that best describes the phone. The system voice prompt then 2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. repeats the name you provided for confirmation, say “Yes”. 6-60 Infotainment System

Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab on the screen.

3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phones will be displayed. If there is a currently paired phone, a check mark will appear on the right side of the Phone name.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Infotainment System 6-61

3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deleted 5. Once a phone has been deleted, and then follow the on screen the only way to connect back to prompts to delete the device that phone is to pair the phone from the system. again. See “Bluetooth Pairing” earlier before the process is started. 6-62 Infotainment System

Connecting to a Phone in the Device List In order to connect to another phone in the Device List, make sure the phone you would like to connect to is in the vehicle and available to be connected to the Bluetooth system before the process is started. 1. Press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until the Phone menu is shown or touch the Phone tab 3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be paired on the screen. and then follow the on screen prompts.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu. Infotainment System 6-63

Making a Call Press the 5 on the infotainment system to access the Phone menu.

5. The Phone menu will be 2. Enter the desired phone number displayed with the name of the by touching the appropriate phone paired. buttons on the screen or using the rotary knob. Enter Number 3. Press the Call button to make the call. Use this option to enter a phone number and make a call. To do this: Accepting or Declining an 1. Press the Enter Number Incoming Call selection. A dial pad displays on When an incoming call is received, the navigation screen. the infotainment system mutes any audio being played and sounds a ring tone. 6-64 Infotainment System

Accepting a Call Call Waiting Conference Calling Press b g on the steering wheel Call waiting must be supported on Conference and three-way calling control to answer the incoming call the Bluetooth phone and enabled by must be supported on the Bluetooth or touch the Answer option to the wireless service carrier to work. phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. answer the call. Switching Calls (Only Available with Call Waiting) To start a conference while in a current call: This features allows you to switch between calls making one call 1. Press the 5 hard key on the active and placing the other on hold. faceplate until the Phone main screen is shown with the current active call.

Declining a Call Press c / $ on the steering wheel controls or select the Decline option to decline the call.

2. Select the “Enter Number” option. Infotainment System 6-65

Ending a Call Mute or UnMute a Call 1. Press the 5 hard key. 2. Select the Mute call option to mute the call. 3. Select the Mute call option again to unmute the call. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can 3. Make another call. The first call send numbers during a call for will be placed on hold while the “Dial 1 or 2”, for phone number extensions, or voice mailboxes. second call is dialing and 1. Press the 5 hard key. connected. 1. Press the PHONE hard key. 2. Select Hang Up. 4. To make a conference call, 2. Select “Enter Number” option select the “Merge” option which and enter the number sequence. will merge both calls into one conference call. 5. To add more callers to the conference call, repeat Steps 2 and 4. The amount of callers that can be added are limited by your wireless service carrier. 6-66 Infotainment System

2 NOTES Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled Climate Control Systems with this system. Climate Control Systems ...... 7-1 Automatic Climate Control System ...... 7-3 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 7-6

A. Fan Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase B. Air Delivery Mode Control or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob completely to T to turn the C. Temperature Control fan off. D. Outside Air Temperature Control: Turn to E. Defrost increase or decrease the F. Rear Window Defogger temperature. G. Recirculation H. Air Conditioning 7-2 Climate Controls

Air Delivery Mode Control: Air Conditioning Rear Window Defogger To change the current mode, select (Air Conditioning): Press to (Rear Defogger): Press to one of the following: # < turn the air conditioning on or off. turn the rear window defogger on or F (Vent): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside off. The rear window defogger turns instrument panel outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the off after about 10 minutes. It can * (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the air conditioning will not work. also be turned off by turning the instrument panel outlets and the h (Recirculation): Press to turn ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or floor outlets. on the recirculation. An indicator LOCK/OFF. If turned on again, it light comes on. Air is recirculated runs for about five minutes before 7 (Floor): Air is directed to the turning off. floor outlets. inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle or Do not drive the vehicle until all the W (Defog): Clears the windows of prevent outside air and odors from windows are clear. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the entering. windshield and floor outlets. Notice: Do not use a razor blade % (Outside Air): Press to turn or sharp object to clear the inside 0 (Defrost): Clears the on the outside air. An indicator light rear window. Do not adhere windshield of fog or frost more comes on. Outside air is circulated anything to the defogger grid quickly. Air is directed to the throughout the vehicle. lines in the rear glass. These windshield and side window outlets. actions may damage the rear For best results, clear all snow and defogger. Repairs would not be ice from the windshield before covered by your warranty. defrosting. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. Climate Controls 7-3

Automatic Climate Control System The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled with this system.

Without Heated Seats

A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control B. AUTO G. Power C. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Air Conditioning D. Defrost I. Rear Window Defogger E. Recirculation J. Outside Air 7-4 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning and recirculation to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature. When the AUTO indicator light is on, the system is in full automatic operation. To place the system in automatic mode: With Heated Seats 1. Press AUTO. A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control 2. Set the temperature. Allow the B. AUTO G. Power system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as C. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Driver and Passenger needed. D. Defrost Heated Seats E. Recirculation I. Rear Window Defogger J. Air Conditioning Climate Controls 7-5

Manual Operation Select from the following: Air Conditioning O (Power): Press to turn the F (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): Press to climate control system on or off. instrument panel outlets. turn the air conditioning on or off. 9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase * (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside or decrease the fan speed. instrument panel outlets and the temperature falls below freezing, the Adjusting the fan speed while in floor outlets. air conditioning will not work. When automatic mode places the fan in AUTO, the air conditioning will 7 (Floor): Air is directed to the come on automatically as needed. under manual control. The AUTO floor outlets. indicator light turns off. The air h (Recirculation): Press to delivery mode remains in automatic W (Defog): Clears the windows of turn on the recirculation. Press to control. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the alternate between recirculation and windshield and floor outlets. Temperature Control: Turn outside air, if the vehicle does not to increase or decrease the 0 (Defrost): Clears the have a separate outside air button. temperature inside the vehicle. windshield of fog or frost more The indicator light turns on when H G quickly. Air is directed to the recirculation is selected. Air is / (Air Delivery Mode windshield and side window outlets. Control): Press mode up or mode recirculated inside the vehicle. Selecting defrost disables the It helps quickly cool the air inside down to cycle through the different automatic mode. air delivery modes. The current the vehicle or prevent outside air mode is shown on the display. For best results, clear all snow and and odors from entering. ice from the windshield before % (Outside Air, If Equipped): defrosting. Press to turn on the outside air. An Do not drive the vehicle until all the indicator light comes on. Outside air windows are clear. is circulated throughout the vehicle. 7-6 Climate Controls

Rear Window Defogger L / M (Driver and Passenger Air Vents Heated Seats): For vehicles with < (Rear Defogger): Press to Use the air outlets, located in the turn the rear window defogger on or heated seats, see Heated Front Seats on page 2‑8. center and on the side of the off. The rear window defogger turns instrument panel, to direct the off after about 10 minutes. It can Sensors airflow. Use the thumbwheels also be turned off by turning the The solar sensor, located on top of located near the center air outlets, ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or to open or close off the airflow. LOCK/OFF. If turned on again, it the instrument panel near the runs for about five minutes before windshield, monitors the solar heat. Operation Tips turning off. The climate control system uses . Clear away any ice, snow, Do not drive the vehicle until all the the information to adjust the or leaves from air inlets at the windows are clear. temperature, fan speed, base of the windshield that could recirculation, and air delivery mode. block the flow of air into the Notice: Do not use a razor blade vehicle. or sharp object to clear the inside Do not cover the solar sensor or the rear window. Do not adhere system will not work properly. . Keep the path under the front anything to the defogger grid seats clear of objects to help lines in the rear glass. These circulate the air inside of the actions may damage the rear vehicle more effectively. defogger. Repairs would not be . Use of non‐GM approved hood covered by your warranty. deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting and Operating Brakes Driving and New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-28 Antilock Brake Operating Ignition Positions ...... 8-28 System (ABS) ...... 8-38 Retained Accessory Parking Brake ...... 8-40 Power (RAP) ...... 8-29 Brake Assist ...... 8-40 Driving Information Starting the Engine ...... 8-30 Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...... 8-41 Driving for Better Fuel Engine Coolant Heater ...... 8-31 Shifting Into Park ...... 8-32 Ride Control Systems Economy ...... 8-2 Traction Control Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 Shifting Out of Park ...... 8-33 Parking Over Things System (TCS) ...... 8-41 Drunk Driving ...... 8-3 StabiliTrak System ...... 8-43 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 That Burn ...... 8-33 Braking ...... 8-4 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control Steering ...... 8-5 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-34 Cruise Control ...... 8-44 Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 Running the Vehicle While Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Object Detection Systems Parked ...... 8-34 Off-Road Driving ...... 8-8 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-46 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 8-19 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 8-35 Camera (RVC) ...... 8-49 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 8-20 Manual Mode ...... 8-37 Fuel Winter Driving ...... 8-21 Fuel Economy Mode ...... 8-37 Fuel ...... 8-53 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-23 Recommended Fuel ...... 8-54 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-24 Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-38 Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-54 8-2 Driving and Operating

California Fuel Driving Information . Always follow posted speed Requirements ...... 8-54 limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-54 Driving for Better Fuel Fuel Additives ...... 8-55 . Keep vehicle tires properly Filling the Tank ...... 8-56 Economy inflated. Filling a Portable Fuel Driving habits can affect fuel . Container ...... 8-57 Combine several trips into a mileage. Here are some driving tips single trip. to get the best fuel economy Towing . possible. Replace the vehicle's tires with General Towing the same TPC Spec number Information ...... 8-57 . Avoid fast starts and accelerate molded into the tire's sidewall Driving Characteristics and smoothly. near the size. Towing Tips ...... 8-58 Trailer Towing ...... 8-61 . Brake gradually and avoid . Follow recommended scheduled Towing Equipment ...... 8-63 abrupt stops. maintenance. Trailer Sway . Avoid idling the engine for long Control (TSC) ...... 8-64 periods of time. Conversions and Add-Ons . When road and weather Add-On Electrical conditions are appropriate, use Equipment ...... 8-64 cruise control, if equipped. Driving and Operating 8-3

Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor Defensive driving means “always vehicle-related deaths involve expect the unexpected.” The first { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these step in driving defensively is to wear Drinking and then driving is very deaths are the result of someone your safety belt, see Safety Belts on who was drinking and driving. dangerous. Your reflexes, page 2‑10. In recent years, more than perceptions, attentiveness, and 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related { WARNING judgment can be affected by even deaths have been associated with a small amount of alcohol. You the use of alcohol, with about Assume that other road users can have a serious — or even 250,000 people injured. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other fatal — collision if you drive after For persons under 21, it is against drivers) are going to be careless drinking. Do not drink and drive or the law in every U.S. state to drink and make mistakes. Anticipate ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if alcohol. There are good medical, what they might do and be ready. psychological, and developmental you are with a group, designate a In addition: reasons for these laws. driver who will not drink. . Allow enough following The obvious way to eliminate the distance between you and Death and injury associated with leading highway safety problem is the driver in front of you. drinking and driving is a global for people never to drink alcohol . Focus on the task of driving. tragedy. and then drive. Driver distraction can cause Alcohol affects four things that collisions resulting in injury or anyone needs to drive a vehicle: possible death. These simple judgment, muscular coordination, defensive driving techniques vision, and attentiveness. could save your life. 8-4 Driving and Operating

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping alcohol in a person's system can distances vary greatly with the make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is especially injuries to the brain, on page 4‑21. pavement or gravel; the condition of spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy been drinking. Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a second. But that is braking. Some people drive in only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. a vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means page 8‑43. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. space between the vehicle and Adding non dealer/non retailer ‐ ‐ others is important. accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 9‑3. Driving and Operating 8-5

If the engine ever stops while the steering assist is lost because the Hydraulic Power Steering vehicle is being driven, brake electric power steering system is not (3.0L V6 Engine) normally but do not pump the functioning, the vehicle can be brakes. If the brakes are pumped, steered but it will take more effort. If power steering assist is lost the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the If you turn the steering wheel in power steering system is not down. If the engine stops, there will either direction several times until it still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be stops, or hold the steering wheel in steered but it will take more effort. it will be used when the brake is the stopped position for an applied. Once the power assist is extended amount of time, you may Steering Tips used up, it can take longer to stop notice a reduced amount of power and the brake pedal will be harder It is important to take curves at a steering assist. The normal amount reasonable speed. to push. of power steering assist should Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer return shortly after a few normal Traction in a curve depends on the accessories can affect vehicle steering movements. condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the performance. See Accessories and The electric power steering system Modifications on page 9‑3. curve is banked, and vehicle speed. does not require regular While in a curve, speed is the one maintenance. If you suspect factor that can be controlled. Steering steering system problems, such If there is a need to reduce speed, Electric Power Steering as abnormally high steering effort for a prolonged period of time, do it before entering the curve, while (2.4L L4 Engine) contact your dealer/retailer for the front wheels are straight. If the engine stalls while driving, the service repairs. Try to adjust the speed so you can power steering assist system will drive through the curve. Maintain a continue to operate until you are reasonable, steady speed. Wait to able to stop the vehicle. If power accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 8-6 Driving and Operating

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision. the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock The vehicle can perform very well in positions, it can be turned a full emergencies like these. First apply 180 degrees very quickly without the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only page 8‑4. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there problem, to the left or right is nothing in the way, steer so that depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. Driving and Operating 8-7 pavement. Turn the steering wheel Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of one-eighth turn, until the right front material is on the road. For safety, the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid tire contacts the pavement edge. slow down and adjust your driving to most skids by taking reasonable Then turn the steering wheel to go these conditions. It is important to care suited to existing conditions, straight down the roadway. slow down on slippery surfaces and by not overdriving those because stopping distance is longer conditions. But skids are always and vehicle control more limited. Loss of Control possible. While driving on a surface with Let us review what driving experts The three types of skids correspond reduced traction, try your best to say about what happens when the to the vehicle's three control avoid sudden steering, acceleration, three control systems — brakes, systems. In the braking skid, the or braking, including reducing steering, and acceleration — do not wheels are not rolling. In the vehicle speed by shifting to a lower have enough friction where the tires steering or cornering skid, too much gear. Any sudden changes could meet the road to do what the driver speed or steering in a curve causes cause the tires to slide. You might has asked. tires to slip and lose cornering force. not realize the surface is slippery And in the acceleration skid, too In any emergency, do not give up. until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to much throttle causes the driving Keep trying to steer and constantly recognize warning clues such as wheels to spin. — seek an escape route or area of enough water, ice, or packed snow less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you and quickly steer the way you want have any doubt. the vehicle to go. If you start Remember: Antilock brakes help steering quickly enough, the vehicle avoid only the braking skid. may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. 8-8 Driving and Operating

Off-Road Driving the very time you need special Before You Go Off-Roading alertness and driving skills, your . Have all necessary maintenance Vehicles with all‐wheel drive can be reflexes, perceptions, and judgment and service work done. used for off‐road driving. Vehicles can be affected by even a small without all‐wheel drive should not be amount of alcohol. You could have a . Make sure there is enough fuel, driven off-road except on a level, serious — or even fatal — accident that fluid levels are where they solid surface. if you drink and drive or ride with a should be, and that the spare Many of the vehicle design features driver who has been drinking. tire is fully inflated. that help make the vehicle more Off-roading can be great fun but has . Be sure to read all the responsive on paved roads during some definite hazards. The greatest information about all-wheel-drive poor weather conditions also help of these is the terrain itself. When vehicles in this manual. make it better suited for off‐road use off-road driving, traffic lanes are not . Make sure all underbody than conventional passenger marked, curves are not banked, and vehicles. The vehicle does not have shields, if the vehicle has them, there are no road signs. Surfaces are properly attached. features usually thought to be can be slippery, rough, uphill, necessary for extended or severe or downhill. . Know the local laws that apply to off‐road use such as special off-roading where you will be underbody shielding and transfer Avoid sharp turns and abrupt driving or check with law case low gear range. maneuvers. Failure to operate the enforcement people in the area. vehicle correctly off‐road could The airbag system is designed to result in loss of vehicle control or . Be sure to get the necessary work properly under a wide range of vehicle rollover. permission if you will be on conditions, including off‐road usage. private land. Always wear your safety belt and Off-roading involves some new observe safe driving speeds, skills. That is why it is very especially on rough terrain. important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help Drinking and driving can be very make off-road driving safer and dangerous on any road and this is more enjoyable. certainly true for off-road driving. At Driving and Operating 8-9

Loading Your Vehicle for There are some important things to Off-Road Driving WARNING (Continued) remember about how to load your vehicle. . Heavy loads on the roof raise { WARNING . The heaviest things should be the vehicle's center of gravity, on the floor, forward of the rear . Cargo on the load floor piled making it more likely to roll axle. Put heavier items as far higher than the seatbacks over. You can be seriously or forward as you can. can be thrown forward during fatally injured if the vehicle . a sudden stop. You or your rolls over. Put heavy loads Be sure the load is properly passengers could be injured. inside the cargo area, not on secured, so things are not Keep cargo below the top of the roof. Keep cargo in the tossed around. the seatbacks. cargo area as far forward and You will find other important . Unsecured cargo on the load low as possible. information under Vehicle Load floor can be tossed about Limits on page 8‑24 and Tires on when driving over rough page 9‑43. terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. (Continued) 8-10 Driving and Operating

Environmental Concerns . Always carry a litter bag and For vehicles with a winch, be sure to make sure all refuse is removed read the winch instructions. In a Off-road driving can provide from any campsite before remote area, a winch can be handy wholesome and satisfying leaving. if you get stuck but you will want to recreation. However, it also raises . know how to use it properly. environmental concerns. We Take extreme care with open recognize these concerns and urge fires (where permitted), camp Getting Familiar with Off-Road stoves, and lanterns. every off-roader to follow these Driving basic rules for protecting the . Never park your vehicle over dry environment: grass or other combustible It is a good idea to practice in an materials that could catch fire area that is safe and close to home . Always use established trails, before you go into the wilderness. roads, and areas that have been from the heat of the vehicle's exhaust system. Off-roading requires some new and specially set aside for public different skills. off-road recreational driving and Traveling to Remote Areas obey all posted regulations. Tune your senses to different kinds It makes sense to plan your trip, of signals. Your eyes need to . Avoid any driving practice that especially when going to a remote constantly sweep the terrain for could damage shrubs, flowers, area. Know the terrain and plan unexpected obstacles. Your ears trees, or grasses or disturb your route. Get accurate maps of need to listen for unusual tire or wildlife. This includes trails and terrain. Check to see if engine sounds. Use your arms, wheel-spinning, breaking down there are any blocked or closed hands, feet, and body to respond to trees, or unnecessary driving roads. vibrations and vehicle bounce. through streams or over soft ground. It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one of them. Driving and Operating 8-11

Controlling the vehicle is the key to Surface Conditions: Off-roading successful off-road driving. One of { WARNING surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, the best ways to control the vehicle gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, is to control the speed. At higher When you are driving off-road, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces speeds: bouncing and quick changes in affects the vehicle's steering, direction can easily throw you acceleration, and braking in different . You approach things faster and out of position. This could cause have less time to react. ways. Depending on the surface, you to lose control and crash. slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, . There is less time to scan the So, whether you are driving delayed acceleration, poor traction, terrain for obstacles. on or off the road, you and your and longer braking distances can . The vehicle has more bounce passengers should wear safety occur. when driving over obstacles. belts. Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. . More braking distance is Scanning the Terrain needed, especially on an A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can unpaved surface. Off-road driving can take you over startle you if you are not prepared many different kinds of terrain. Be for them. Often these obstacles are familiar with the terrain and its many hidden by grass, bushes, snow, different features. or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. 8-12 Driving and Operating

Some things to consider: Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved WARNING (Continued) . Is the path ahead clear? roads and highways. There are no . Will the surface texture change road signs, posted speed limits, them, you will roll over. You could abruptly up ahead? or signal lights. Use good judgment be seriously injured or killed. . Does the travel take you uphill or about what is safe and what is not. If you have any doubt about the steepness, do not drive the hill. downhill? Driving on Hills . Will you have to stop suddenly Off-road driving often takes you up, Approaching a Hill or change direction quickly? down, or across a hill. Driving safely When you approach a hill, decide if When driving over obstacles or on hills requires good judgment and it is too steep to climb, descend, rough terrain, keep a firm grip on an understanding of what the or cross. Steepness can be hard to the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, vehicle can and cannot do. There judge. On a very small hill, for or other surface features can jerk are some hills that simply cannot be example, there may be a smooth, the wheel out of your hands. driven, no matter how well built the constant incline with only a small vehicle. When driving over bumps, rocks, change in elevation where you can or other obstacles, the wheels can easily see all the way to the top. On leave the ground. If this happens, { WARNING a large hill, the incline may get even with one or two wheels, you steeper as you near the top, but you cannot control the vehicle as well or Many hills are simply too steep might not see this because the crest at all. for any vehicle. If you drive up of the hill is hidden by bushes, them, you will stall. If you drive grass, or shrubs. Because you will be on an unpaved down them, you cannot control surface, it is especially important to your speed. If you drive across avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-13

Consider this as you approach a hill: Driving Uphill . Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill. . Is there a constant incline, Once you decide it is safe to drive or does the hill get sharply up the hill: . Attach a flag to the vehicle to be steeper in places? more visible to approaching . Use a low gear and get a firm traffic on trails or hills. . Is there good traction on the grip on the steering wheel. hillside, or will the surface cause . Sound the horn as you approach . Get a smooth start up the hill tire slipping? the top of the hill to let opposing and try to maintain speed. Not traffic know you are there. . Is there a straight path up or using more power than needed down the hill so you will not can avoid spinning the wheels or . Use headlamps even during the have to make turning sliding. day to make the vehicle more maneuvers? visible to oncoming traffic. . Are there obstructions on the hill { WARNING that can block your path, such { WARNING as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts? Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could Driving to the top (crest) of a hill . What is beyond the hill? Is there lose traction, slide sideways, and at full speed can cause an a cliff, an embankment, a possibly roll over. You could be accident. There could be a drop-off, a fence? Get out and seriously injured or killed. When drop-off, embankment, cliff, walk the hill if you do not know. or even another vehicle. You It is the smart way to find out. driving up hills, always try to go straight up. could be seriously injured or . Is the hill simply too rough? killed. As you near the top of a Steep hills often have ruts, . Try to drive straight up the hill if hill, slow down and stay alert. gullies, troughs, and exposed at all possible. If the path twists rocks because they are more and turns, you might want to find susceptible to the effects of another route. erosion. 8-14 Driving and Operating

If the vehicle stalls, or is about to . While backing down the hill, put . Never try to turn around if about stall, and you cannot make it up your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill. the hill: wheel at the 12 o'clock position If the hill is steep enough to stall so you can tell if the wheels are the vehicle, it is steep enough to . Push the brake pedal to stop the straight and can maneuver as cause it to roll over. If you vehicle and keep it from rolling you back down. It is best to back cannot make it up the hill, back backwards and apply the down the hill with the wheels straight down the hill. parking brake. straight rather than in the left or If, after stalling, you try to back . If the engine is still running, shift right direction. Turning the wheel down the hill and decide you just the transmission to R (Reverse), too far to the left or right will cannot do it, set the parking brake, release the parking brake, and increase the possibility of a put your transmission in P (Park), slowly back down the hill in rollover. and turn off the engine. Leave the R (Reverse). Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, vehicle and go get some help. Exit . If the engine has stopped or is about to stall, when going up on the uphill side and stay clear of running, you need to restart it. a hill: the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. With the brake pedal pressed . Never attempt to prevent a stall and the parking brake still by shifting into N (Neutral) to applied, shift the transmission to rev-up the engine and regain P (Park) and restart the engine. forward momentum. This will not Then, shift to R (Reverse), work. The vehicle can roll release the parking brake, and backward very quickly and could slowly back down the hill as go out of control. straight as possible in R (Reverse). Driving and Operating 8-15

Driving Downhill Vehicles are much more likely to { WARNING stall when going uphill, but if it When off-roading takes you happens when going downhill: downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going down 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the . How steep is the downhill? Will I a hill can cause your brakes to regular brakes and apply the be able to maintain vehicle overheat and fade. This could parking brake. control? cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still . What is the surface like? brakes lightly when descending a braking, restart the engine. Smooth? Rough? Slippery? hill and use a low gear to keep Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? 3. Shift back to a low gear, release vehicle speed under control. the parking brake, and drive . Are there hidden surface straight down. obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Things not to do when driving down Boulders? a hill: 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help. . What is at the bottom of the hill? . When driving downhill, avoid Is there a hidden creek bank or turns that take you across the even a river bottom with large incline of the hill. A hill that is not rocks? too steep to drive down might be If you decide you can go down a hill too steep to drive across. The safely, try to keep the vehicle vehicle could roll over. headed straight down. Use a low . Never go downhill with the gear so engine drag can help the transmission in N (Neutral), brakes so they do not have to do all called free-wheeling. The brakes the work. Descend slowly, keeping will have to do all the work and the vehicle under control at all could overheat and fade. times. 8-16 Driving and Operating

Driving Across an Incline across an incline, the narrower For these reasons, carefully track width the distance consider whether to try to drive An off-road trail will probably go — between the left and right across an incline. Just because the across the incline of a hill. To decide wheels might not prevent the trail goes across the incline does whether to try to drive across the — vehicle from tilting and rolling not mean you have to drive it. The incline, consider the following: over. Driving across an incline last vehicle to try it might have puts more weight on the downhill rolled over. { WARNING wheels which could cause a If you feel the vehicle starting to downhill slide or a rollover. Driving across an incline that is slide sideways, turn downhill. This too steep will make your vehicle . Surface conditions can be a should help straighten out the roll over. You could be seriously problem. Loose gravel, muddy vehicle and prevent the side injured or killed. If you have any spots, or even wet grass can slipping. The best way to prevent doubt about the steepness of the cause the tires to slip sideways, this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the surface is like incline, do not drive across it. downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something before driving it. Find another route instead. that will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. and roll over. . A hill that can be driven straight — up or down might be too steep . Hidden obstacles can make the to drive across. When going steepness of the incline even straight up or down a hill, the worse. If you drive across a rock length of the wheel base — the with the uphill wheels, or if the distance from the front wheels to downhill wheels drop into a rut the rear wheels — reduces the or depression, the vehicle can tilt likelihood the vehicle will tumble even more. end over end. But when driving Driving and Operating 8-17

Stalling on an Incline Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Hard packed snow and ice offer or Ice the worst tire traction. On these { WARNING surfaces, it is very easy to lose When you drive in mud, snow, control. On wet ice, for example, the or sand, the wheels do not get good traction is so poor that you will have Getting out on the downhill (low) traction. Acceleration is not as side of a vehicle stopped across difficulty accelerating. And, if the quick, turning is more difficult, and vehicle does get moving, poor an incline is dangerous. If the braking distances are longer. vehicle rolls over, you could be steering and difficult braking can crushed or killed. Always get out It is best to use a low gear when in cause it to slide out of control. on the uphill (high) side of the mud — the deeper the mud, the vehicle and stay well clear of the lower the gear. In really deep mud, { WARNING keep the vehicle moving so it does rollover path. not get stuck. Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, If the vehicle stalls when crossing When driving on sand, wheel or rivers can be dangerous. an incline, be sure you, and any traction changes. On loosely packed Underwater springs, currents passengers, get out on the uphill sand, such as on beaches or sand under the ice, or sudden thaws side, even if the door there is harder dunes, the tires will tend to sink into can weaken the ice. Your vehicle to open. If you get out on the the sand. This affects steering, could fall through the ice and you downhill side and the vehicle starts accelerating, and braking. Drive at a and your passengers could to roll over, you will be right in reduced speed and avoid sharp drown. Drive your vehicle on safe its path. turns or abrupt maneuvers. surfaces only. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. 8-18 Driving and Operating

Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving before driving through it. Do not Remove any brush or debris that try it if it is deep enough to cover { WARNING has collected on the underbody, the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust chassis, or under the hood. These pipe you probably will not get Driving through rushing water can — accumulations can be a fire hazard. be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage sweep your vehicle downstream the axle and other vehicle parts. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and and you and your passengers If the water is not too deep, drive checked. These substances can could drown. If it is only shallow slowly through it. At faster speeds, cause glazing and uneven braking. water, it can still wash away the water splashes on the ignition Check the body structure, steering, ground from under your tires, and system and the vehicle can stall. suspension, wheels, tires, axles, Stalling can also occur if you get the you could lose traction and roll and exhaust system for damage and tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is the vehicle over. Do not drive check the fuel lines and cooling under water, you will never be able through rushing water. system for any leakage. to start the engine. When going Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, through water, remember that when The vehicle requires more frequent and flood waters demand extreme the brakes get wet, it might take service due to off-road use. Refer to caution. longer to stop. See Driving on Wet the Maintenance Schedule for Roads on page 8‑19. additional information. Driving and Operating 8-19

Driving on Wet Roads Hydroplaning WARNING (Continued) Rain and wet roads can reduce Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water vehicle traction and affect your After driving through a large can build up under your vehicle's ability to stop and accelerate. puddle of water or a car/vehicle tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is Always drive slower in these types wash, lightly apply the brake wet enough and you are going fast of driving conditions and avoid pedal until the brakes work enough. When your vehicle is driving through large puddles and normally. deep‐standing or flowing water. hydroplaning, it has little or no Flowing or rushing water creates contact with the road. { WARNING strong forces. Driving through There is no hard and fast rule about flowing water could cause your hydroplaning. The best advice is to Wet brakes can cause crashes. vehicle to be carried away. If this slow down when the road is wet. They might not work as well in a happens, you and other vehicle quick stop and could cause occupants could drown. Do not pulling to one side. You could ignore police warnings and be lose control of the vehicle. very cautious about trying to drive (Continued) through flowing water. 8-20 Driving and Operating

Other Rainy Weather Tips Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Besides slowing down, other wet Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through weather driving tips include: your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving . Allow extra following distance. If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include: . Pass with caution. and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in . Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: good shape. equipment in good shape. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, . Keep the windshield washer fluid tires, cooling system, and . Keep interior temperature cool. reservoir filled. transmission. . . Keep your eyes moving scan Have good tires with proper — . the road ahead and to the sides. Going down steep or long hills, tread depth. See Tires on shift to a lower gear. page 9‑43. . Check the rearview mirror and . Turn off cruise control. vehicle instruments often. { WARNING

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Driving and Operating 8-21

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) { WARNING on page 8‑38 improves vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery roads, but apply the brakes or with the ignition off is sooner than when on dry pavement. dangerous. The brakes will have or ice between the tires and the to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for (32°F) when freezing rain begins to they would not work well. You slippery spots. Icy patches can fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in would then have poor braking or Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a even none going down a hill. You freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while on ice. . Stay in your own lane. Do not traction is not lost. Accelerating too swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces. speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less own lane. traction. . Top of hills: Be Try not to break the fragile traction. alert — something could be in If you accelerate too fast, the drive your lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. . Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. 8-22 Driving and Operating

Blizzard Conditions WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 8‑34. Assistance Program on page 12 6. ‑ especially any that is blocking To get help and keep everyone in Snow can trap exhaust gases the exhaust pipe. the vehicle safe: under your vehicle. This can . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon . Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO flashers. not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. . Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so . Open a window about 5 cm mirror. (two inches) on the side of you might not know it is in your the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from { WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed death. to the highest setting. See (Continued) Climate Control System in the Index. (Continued) Driving and Operating 8-23

To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get short periods as needed to warm it Out the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction until help arrives but only when you If stuck too severely for the traction system. Shift back and forth feel really uncomfortable from the system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a forward cold. Moving about to keep warm traction system off and use the gear, spinning the wheels as little as also helps. rocking method. possible. To prevent transmission If it takes some time for help to wear, wait until the wheels stop arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING spinning before shifting gears. the engine, push the accelerator Release the accelerator pedal while pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high shifting, and press lightly on the faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you accelerator pedal when the keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The transmission is in gear. Slowly the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an spinning the wheels in the forward with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other and reverse directions causes a as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little rocking motion that could free the as possible and avoid going vehicle. If that does not get the above 55 km/h (35 mph) as vehicle out after a few tries, it might shown on the speedometer. need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see For information about using tire Towing the Vehicle on page 9‑78. chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 9‑64. 8-24 Driving and Operating

Vehicle Load Limits pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's WARNING (Continued) door open, you will find the label It is very important to know how the way the vehicle handles. attached near the door lock much weight the vehicle can post. The Tire and Loading carry. This weight is called the These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, Information label shows the vehicle capacity weight and number of occupant seating includes the weight of all overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. positions (A), and the maximum occupants, cargo and all vehicle capacity weight (B) in nonfactory‐installed options. kilograms and pounds. Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information how much weight it may Label The Tire and Loading properly carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the Loading Information label and tire size of the original the Certification label. equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation { WARNING pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation Do not load the vehicle any see Tires on page 9‑43 and Tire heavier than the Gross Pressure on page 9‑50 . Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading (GVWR), or either the information on the Certification maximum front or rear Gross label. It tells you the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) If you do, parts on the vehicle and the Gross Axle Weight can break, and it can change A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is (Continued) attached to the vehicle's center Driving and Operating 8-25

Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb rear axle. See “Certification passengers in your vehicle, Label” later in this section. the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity Steps for Determining Correct is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 Load Limit (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 1. Locate the statement The “ 5. Determine the combined combined weight of weight of luggage and cargo occupants and cargo should being loaded on the vehicle. never exceed XXX kg or That weight may not safely XXX lbs on your vehicle's ” exceed the available cargo placard. and luggage load capacity Example 1 2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for weight of the driver and 6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1 = 453 kg passengers that will be riding a trailer, the load from your (1,000 lbs). in your vehicle. trailer will be transferred to B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg weight of the driver and manual to determine how this (300 lbs). passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of C. Available Occupant and your vehicle. Cargo Weight = 317 kg 4. The resulting figure equals (700 lbs). the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing on page 8‑61 and luggage load capacity. for important information on For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips. 8-26 Driving and Operating

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the lower 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar on the driver side of Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the vehicle or on the rear edge Loading Information label for of the driver door. The label tells specific information about the the gross weight capacity of the vehicle's capacity weight and vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The Driving and Operating 8-27

GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) and cargo. Never exceed the These could cause you to lose . Never stack heavier GVWR for the vehicle, or the control and crash. Also, things, like suitcases, Gross Axle Weight Rating overloading can shorten the inside the vehicle so that (GAWR) for either the front or life of the vehicle. some of them are above rear axle. the tops of the seats. If the vehicle is carrying a heavy . Do not leave an { WARNING load, it should be spread out. unsecured child restraint See “Steps for Determining Things you put inside the in the vehicle. Correct Load Limit” earlier in this section. vehicle can strike and injure . When you carry something people in a sudden stop or inside the vehicle, secure turn, or in a crash. { WARNING it whenever you can. . Put things in the cargo . Do not leave a seat folded Do not load the vehicle any area of the vehicle. In the down unless you need to. heavier than the Gross cargo area, put them as Vehicle Weight Rating far forward as you can. (GVWR), or either the Try to spread the weight maximum front or rear Gross evenly. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). (Continued) If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way the vehicle handles. (Continued) 8-28 Driving and Operating

Starting and can be used. Vehicle speeds Ignition Positions above 110 km/h (68 mph) Operating should be limited to five minutes per use. New Vehicle Break-In . Avoid making hard stops for Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 miles) or need an elaborate break-in. But it so. During this time the new will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean . Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier constant speed, fast or slow, replacement. Follow this for the first 805 km breaking-in guideline every (500 miles). Do not make time you get new brake full-throttle starts. Avoid linings. The ignition switch has four different downshifting to brake or . positions. slow the vehicle. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Driving Notice: Using a tool to force the . During the first 1 000 km Characteristics and Towing key to turn in the ignition could (600 miles), avoid using more Tips on page 8‑58 for the cause damage to the switch or than moderate acceleration trailer towing capabilities of break the key. Use the correct in lower gears and avoid your vehicle and more key, make sure it is all the way in, vehicle speeds above information. and turn it only with your hand. 110 km/h (68 mph). Following break‐in, engine speed If the key cannot be turned by . Between the first 1 000 km and load can be gradually hand, see your dealer/retailer. (600 miles) and 5 000 km increased. To shift out of P (Park), turn the (3,000 miles), heavy ignition to ON/RUN and apply the acceleration in lower gears brake pedal. Driving and Operating 8-29

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch Retained Accessory position from which the key can be stays in this position when the removed. This locks the steering engine is running. This position can Power (RAP) wheel, ignition and automatic be used to operate the electrical These vehicle accessories can be transmission. accessories, including the used for up to 10 minutes after the On vehicles with an automatic ventilation fan and 12 volt power engine is turned off: outlet, as well as to display some transmission, the shift lever must be . Audio System in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch warning and indicator lights. . Power Windows to the LOCK/OFF position. The battery could be drained if the . Sunroof (if equipped) The ignition switch can bind in the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY LOCK/OFF position with the wheels or ON/RUN position with the engine Power to the audio system will turned off center. If this happens, off. The vehicle might not start if the continue to operate for up to move the steering wheel from right battery is allowed to drain for an 10 minutes or until the driver door is to left while turning the key to ACC/ extended period of time. opened. ACCESSORY. If this does not work, D (START): This position starts the Power to the power windows and then the vehicle needs service. engine. When the engine starts, sunroof will continue to operate for B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This release the key. The ignition switch up to 10 minutes or until any door is position provides power to some of will return to ON/RUN for normal opened. driving. the electrical accessories. It unlocks All these features will work when the the steering wheel and ignition. The A warning tone sounds when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ transmission is also unlocked in this driver door is opened if the ignition ACCESSORY. position on automatic transmission is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the vehicles. To move the key from key is in the ignition. ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push in the key and then turn it to LOCK/OFF. 8-30 Driving and Operating

Starting the Engine The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for Computer-Controlled Cranking long periods of time, by returning Move the shift lever to P (Park) or System. This feature assists in the key to the START position N (Neutral). The engine will not start starting the engine and protects immediately after cranking has in any other position. To restart the components. If the ignition key is ended, can overheat and damage vehicle when it is already moving, turned to the START position, the cranking motor, and drain the use N (Neutral) only. and then released when the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Notice: Do not try to shift to engine begins cranking, the between each try, to let the P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine will continue cranking for cranking motor cool down. If you do, you could damage the a few seconds or until the 2. If the engine does not start after transmission. Shift to P (Park) vehicle starts. If the engine does 5 to 10 seconds, especially in only when the vehicle is stopped. not start and the key is held in very cold weather (below −18°C START for many seconds, Starting Procedure or 0°F), it could be flooded with cranking will be stopped after too much gasoline. Push the 1. With your foot off the accelerator 15 seconds to prevent cranking accelerator pedal all the way to pedal, turn the ignition key to motor damage. To prevent gear the floor and holding it there as START. When the engine starts, damage, this system also you hold the key in START for a let go of the key. The idle speed prevents cranking if the engine maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at will go down as the engine is already running. Engine least 15 seconds between each warms. Do not race the engine cranking can be stopped by try, to allow the cranking motor immediately after starting it. turning the ignition switch to to cool. When the engine starts, Operate the engine and ACC/ACCESSORY or let go of the key and accelerator. transmission gently to allow the LOCK/OFF. oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. Driving and Operating 8-31

If the vehicle starts briefly but Engine Coolant Heater then stops again, repeat the { WARNING procedure. This clears the extra The engine coolant heater, gasoline from the engine. Do not if available, can help in cold weather Plugging the cord into an race the engine immediately conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) ungrounded outlet could cause an after starting it. Operate the for easier starting and better fuel electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine and transmission gently economy during engine warm-up. kind of extension cord could until the oil warms up and Plug in the coolant heater at least overheat and cause a fire. You lubricates all moving parts. four hours before starting the could be seriously injured. Plug vehicle. An internal thermostat in the cord into a properly grounded Notice: The engine is designed to the plug-end of the cord will prevent three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. work with the electronics in the engine coolant heater operation at If the cord will not reach, use a vehicle. If you add electrical parts temperatures above −18°C (0°F). or accessories, you could change heavy-duty three-prong extension the way the engine operates. To Use The Engine Coolant cord rated for at least 15 amps. Before adding electrical Heater equipment, check with your 4. Before starting the engine, be 1. Turn off the engine. dealer/retailer. If you do not, the sure to unplug and store the engine might not perform 2. Open the hood and unwrap the cord as it was before to keep it properly. Any resulting damage electrical cord. away from moving engine parts. would not be covered by the If you do not it could be The electrical cord is located on damaged. vehicle warranty. the passenger side of the engine compartment, in front of the air The length of time the heater should cleaner. remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded in the area where you will be 110-volt AC outlet. parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. 8-32 Driving and Operating

Shifting Into Park Use this procedure to shift into Leaving the Vehicle With the P (Park): Engine Running { WARNING 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. { WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of See Parking Brake on the vehicle if the shift lever is not It can be dangerous to leave the page 8‑40 for more information. fully in P (Park) with the parking vehicle with the engine running. brake firmly set. The vehicle can 2. Hold the button on the shift lever The vehicle could move suddenly roll. If you have left the engine and push the lever toward the if the shift lever is not fully in running, the vehicle can move front of the vehicle into P (Park). P (Park) with the parking brake suddenly. You or others could be 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it injured. To be sure the vehicle will 4. Remove the key. not move, even when you are on could overheat and even catch fairly level ground, use the steps fire. You or others could be that follow. If you are pulling a injured. Do not leave the vehicle trailer, see Driving Characteristics with the engine running. and Towing Tips on page 8‑58. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set. Release the button and check that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park). Driving and Operating 8-33

Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park Parking Over Things Torque lock is when the weight of To shift out of P (Park): That Burn the vehicle puts too much force on 1. Apply the brake pedal. the parking pawl in the { WARNING transmission. This happens when 2. Press the shift lever button. parking on a hill and shifting the 3. Move the shift lever. Things that can burn could touch transmission into P (Park) is not hot exhaust parts under the done properly and then it is difficult If you still are unable to shift out of vehicle and ignite. Do not park to shift out of P (Park). To prevent P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass, torque lock, set the parking brake 1. Fully release the shift lever or other things that can burn. and then shift into P (Park). To find button. out how, see “Shifting Into Park” listed previously. 2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever button If torque lock does occur, the again. vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve 3. Move the shift lever. the parking pawl pressure, so you If you still cannot move the shift can shift out of P (Park). lever from P (Park), see your dealer/ retailer for service. 8-34 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) While Parked { WARNING . The vehicle’s exhaust system It is better not to park with the has been modified, damaged engine running. But if you ever have Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO . There are holes or openings can cause unconsciousness and in the vehicle body from { WARNING even death. damage or after-market modifications that are not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may . The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or with poor ventilation (parking enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust if it is suspected that exhaust is contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle: that may block underbody which cannot be seen or smelled. airflow or tail pipes). . Drive it only with the windows It can cause unconsciousness completely down. and even death. Never run the . The exhaust smells or engine in an enclosed area that sounds strange or different. . Have the vehicle repaired immediately. has no fresh air ventilation. For . The exhaust system leaks more information, see Engine due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the Exhaust on page 8‑34. engine running in an enclosed (Continued) area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. Driving and Operating 8-35

{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING Transmission It can be dangerous to get out of It is dangerous to get out of the the vehicle if the automatic vehicle if the shift lever is not fully transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do Do not leave the vehicle when the not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and always set the parking brake and The automatic transmission shift move the shift lever to P (Park). move the shift lever to P (Park). lever is located on the console See Shifting Into Park on between the seats. page 8 32. If you are pulling a Follow the proper steps to be sure ‑ the vehicle will not move. See P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics front wheels. Use P (Park) when and Towing Tips on page 8 58. Shifting Into Park on page 8‑32. ‑ starting the engine because the If parking on a hill and pulling a vehicle cannot move easily. The vehicle has an automatic trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission shift lock control and Towing Tips on page 8‑58. system. You must fully apply the regular brake first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from P (Park) when the ignition key 8-36 Driving and Operating is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral): In this position the D (Drive): This position is for of P (Park), ease pressure on the engine and transmission do not normal driving. It provides the best shift lever, then push the shift lever connect. Use N (Neutral) to restart a fuel economy. If you need more all the way into P (Park) as you vehicle that is already moving. power for passing, and you are: maintain brake application. Then . Going less than 56 km/h press the shift lever button and { WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator move the shift lever into another pedal about halfway down. gear. See Shifting Out of Park on Shifting into a drive gear while the page 8‑33. engine is running at high speed is . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all R (Reverse): Use this gear to the way down. back up. firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift while the vehicle is moving people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and forward could damage the you continue to drive the vehicle transmission. The repairs would into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the not be covered by the vehicle transmission. Have the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only serviced right away. You can after the vehicle is stopped. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine drive in L (Low) when you are To rock the vehicle back and forth to running at high speed may driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) get out of snow, ice or sand without damage the transmission. The and D (Drive) for higher speeds damaging the transmission, see If repairs would not be covered by until then. the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the M (Manual Mode): Allows the engine is not running at high driver to select the range of gear speed when shifting the vehicle. positions. If the vehicle has this feature, see Manual Mode on page 8‑37. Driving and Operating 8-37

Manual Mode When shifting to M (Manual Mode), Fuel Economy Mode the transmission will shift to a preset Electronic Range Select lower gear range. For this preset The vehicle may have a Fuel (ERS) Mode range, the highest gear available is Economy Mode. When engaged, displayed next to the M in the DIC. fuel economy mode can improve the ERS or manual mode allows for the See Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle's fuel economy. selection of the range of gear on page 4 27 for more information. positions. Use this mode when ‑ All gears below that number are driving down hill or towing a trailer available to use. For example, to limit the top gear and vehicle when 4 (Fourth) is shown next to speed. The shift position indicator the M, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) within the Driver Information Center gears are shifted automatically. (DIC) will display a number next to To shift to 5 (Fifth) gear, press the M indicating the highest the + (Plus) button or shift into available gear under manual mode D (Drive). and the driving conditions when manual mode was selected. M (Manual Mode) will prevent shifting to a lower gear range if the To use this feature: engine speed is too high. If vehicle 1. Move the shift lever to speed is not reduced within the time M (Manual Mode). allowed, the lower gear range shift Press the “eco” (economy) button by the shift lever to turn this feature on 2. Press the plus/minus button on will not be completed. Slow the vehicle, then press the − (Minus) or off. The “eco” light in the the shift lever, to increase or instrument cluster will come on decrease the gear range button to the desired lower gear range. when engaged. See Fuel Economy available. Light on page 4‑25. For vehicles While using the ERS, cruise control can be used. 8-38 Driving and Operating with a Driver Information Center Drive Systems Brakes (DIC) an “ECO Mode On” message displays. See Fuel System Messages on page 4‑35 for more All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake information. With this feature, engine power is System (ABS) When Fuel Economy Mode is on: always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock Brake fully automatic, and adjusts itself as System (ABS), an advanced . The transmission will upshift needed for road conditions. sooner and downshift later. electronic braking system that helps When using a compact spare tire on prevent a braking skid. . The torque converter clutch will an AWD vehicle, the system apply sooner and stay on longer. When the engine is started and the automatically detects the compact vehicle begins to drive away, ABS . The gas pedal will be less spare and disables AWD. To restore checks itself. A momentary motor or sensitive. AWD operation and prevent clicking noise might be heard while excessive wear on system, replace . The vehicle's computer will more this test is going on, and it might the compact spare with a full-size even be noticed that the brake aggressively shut off fuel to the tire as soon as possible. See engine under deceleration. pedal moves a little. This is normal. Compact Spare Tire on page 9‑73 . The engine idle speed will be for more information. lower. . Driving performance is more conservative. Driving and Operating 8-39

ABS can change the brake pressure Using ABS to each wheel, as required, faster Do not pump the brakes. Just hold than any driver could. This can help the brake pedal down firmly and let the driver steer around the obstacle ABS work. The ABS pump or motor while braking hard. might be heard operating, and the As the brakes are applied, the brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, If there is a problem with ABS, this computer keeps receiving updates but this is normal. warning light stays on. See Antilock on wheel speed and controls Brake System (ABS) Warning Light braking pressure accordingly. Braking in Emergencies on page 4‑22. Remember: ABS does not change ABS allows the driver to steer and If driving safely on a wet road and it the time needed to get a foot up to brake at the same time. In many becomes necessary to slam on the the brake pedal or always decrease emergencies, steering can help brakes and continue braking to stopping distance. If you get too more than even the very best avoid a sudden obstacle, a close to the vehicle in front of you, braking. computer senses that the wheels there will not be enough time to are slowing down. If one of the apply the brakes if that vehicle wheels is about to stop rolling, the suddenly slows or stops. Always computer will separately work the leave enough room up ahead to brakes at each wheel. stop, even with ABS. 8-40 Driving and Operating

Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the driving. stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake To set the parking brake, hold the If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates. a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsations or If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. system warning light will come on. pedal movement during this time is See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are normal and the driver should on page 4‑21. parking on a hill, see Driving continue to apply the brake pedal Characteristics and Towing Tips on as the driving situation dictates. page 8‑58. The brake assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. Driving and Operating 8-41

Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but this is This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist normal. (HSA) feature, which may be useful Traction Control when the vehicle is stopped on a System (TCS) grade. This feature is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling, The vehicle has a Traction Control either forward or rearward, during System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. vehicle drive off. After driver On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the completely stops and holds the system operates if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are vehicle in a complete standstill on a The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light grade, HSA will be automatically spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive will flash to indicate that the traction activated. During the transition control system is active. period between when the driver (AWD) vehicle, the system will releases the brake pedal and starts operate if it senses that any of the This warning light comes on if there to accelerate to drive off on a grade, wheels are spinning or beginning to is a problem with TCS, and the HSA holds the braking pressure to lose traction. When this happens, system will not limit wheel spin. ensure that there is no rolling back. the system brakes the spinning Adjust your driving accordingly. The brakes will automatically wheel(s) and/or reduces engine release when the accelerator pedal power to limit wheel spin. is applied within the two second window. It will not activate if the vehicle is in a drive gear and facing downhill or if the vehicle is facing uphill and in R (Reverse). 8-42 Driving and Operating

TCS automatically comes on On AWD vehicles, when TCS is whenever the vehicle is started. turned off, the system may still To limit wheel spin, especially in make noise. This is normal and slippery road conditions, the system necessary with AWD hardware. should always be left on. But, TCS It may be necessary to turn the can be turned off if needed. system off if the vehicle ever gets Notice: Do not repeatedly brake stuck in sand, mud or snow and Traction control can be turned or accelerate heavily when TCS is rocking the vehicle is required. See off by pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button, on the off. The vehicle's driveline could If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23 be damaged. for more information. See also console, until the TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on the instrument panel Winter Driving on page 8‑21 for information on using TCS when and “Traction Control Off” appears driving in snowy or icy conditions. in the DIC. Press the button again to turn the system back on. For information on turning StabiliTrak off and on, see “StabiliTrak System” following in this section. The TCS off light comes on and Adding non‐GM accessories can “Traction Control Off” is displayed affect the vehicle's performance. on the Driver Information Center See Accessories and Modifications (DIC) to indicate that the traction on page 9‑3 for more information. control system has been turned off. See Ride Control System Messages on page 4‑36. Driving and Operating 8-43

StabiliTrak System This also occurs when traction control is activated. A noise may be The vehicle has a vehicle stability heard or vibration may be felt in the enhancement system called brake pedal. This is normal. StabiliTrak. It is an advanced Continue to steer the vehicle in the computer controlled system that intended direction. assists with directional control of the If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak can be turned vehicle in difficult driving conditions. off by pressing and holding the StabiliTrak, a “Service StabiliTrak” StabiliTrak activates when the message will be displayed on the TCS/StabiliTrak button, on the computer senses a difference Driver Information Center (DIC). console, until the TCS Off and between the intended path and the When this message is displayed StabiliTrak Off lights come on the direction the vehicle is actually and the StabiliTrak light comes on, instrument panel and “StabiliTrak traveling. StabiliTrak selectively the system is not operational. Off” appears in the DIC. For applies braking pressure at any one Driving should be adjusted information on turning TCS off and of the vehicle's brakes to help steer accordingly. See Ride Control on, see “Traction Control System (TCS) earlier in this section. the vehicle in the intended direction. System Messages on page 4‑36. ” StabiliTrak comes on automatically If cruise control is being used when whenever the vehicle is started. To StabiliTrak activates, the cruise assist with directional control of the control will automatically disengage. vehicle, the system should always Press the cruise control button to be left on. reengage when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 8‑44 for more information. When the stability control system activates, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel. 8-44 Driving and Operating

Cruise Control { WARNING With cruise control, the vehicle can maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous (25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic. If the brakes are applied, the cruise Cruise control can be dangerous control shuts off. on slippery roads. On such roads, If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® fast changes in tire traction can or traction control system and cause excessive wheel slip, and The cruise control buttons are begins to limit wheel spin while you could lose control. Do not use located on the steering wheel. using cruise control, the cruise cruise control on slippery roads. control automatically disengages. 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the See StabiliTrak System on Setting Cruise Control cruise control system on and off. page 8‑43 or Traction Control \ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise System (TCS) on page 8‑41. When { WARNING control without erasing the set road conditions allow you to safely speed from memory. use it again, the cruise control can If you leave your cruise control on be turned back on. when you are not using cruise, RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the you might hit a button and go into thumbwheel up to resume a set cruise when you do not want to. speed or to accelerate to a higher You could be startled and even speed. lose control. Keep the cruise SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the control switch off until you want to thumbwheel down toward SET/− to use cruise control. set a speed and activate cruise control or to decrease the speed. Driving and Operating 8-45

To set a speed: Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Cruise Control 1. Press 5 to turn the cruise control system on. If the cruise control system is If the cruise control system is already engaged, already engaged, 2. Get to the speed desired. . Move the thumbwheel up toward . Move the thumbwheel down 3. Move the thumbwheel down RES/+ and hold it until the toward SET/− and hold until the toward SET/− and release it. vehicle accelerates to the desired lower speed is reached, The desired set speed briefly desired speed, and then then release it. appears in the instrument panel release it. cluster. . To slow down in very small . To increase the speed in small amounts, move the thumbwheel 4. Take your foot off the accelerator amounts, move the thumbwheel down toward SET/− briefly and pedal. up toward RES/+ briefly and then release it. Each time this is When the brakes are applied, the then release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about cruise control shuts off. done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Resuming a Set Speed If the brakes are applied or the cancel button is pressed while the cruise control is at a set speed, the cruise control disengages without erasing the set speed from memory. Once the vehicle reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the thumbwheel up toward RES/+ briefly. The vehicle returns to the speed selected previously and stays there. 8-46 Driving and Operating

Passing Another Vehicle While Ending Cruise Control Object Detection Using Cruise Control There are three ways to disengage Use the accelerator pedal to the cruise control: Systems increase the vehicle's speed. When . Step lightly on the brake pedal Ultrasonic Parking Assist you take your foot off the pedal, the or clutch; when cruise control vehicle slows down to the previously disengages, the indicator light For vehicles with the Ultrasonic set cruise control speed. will go off. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, Using Cruise Control on Hills it assists the driver with parking . Press \ . and avoiding objects while in How well the cruise control works R (Reverse). URPA operates at . Press 5 to turn the cruise on hills depends upon the vehicle's speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), speed, load, and the steepness of control system off completely. and the sensors on the rear bumper the hills. When going up steep hills, The cruise control cannot be detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) you might have to step on the resumed. behind the vehicle, and at least accelerator pedal to maintain the Erasing Speed Memory 20 cm (8 in) off the ground. vehicle's speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or The cruise control set speed shift to a lower gear to maintain the memory is erased when the cruise vehicle's speed. When the brakes control or the ignition is turned off. are applied the cruise control shuts off. Driving and Operating 8-47

The display is located in the How the System Works { WARNING headliner. URPA comes on automatically and The Ultrasonic Rear Parking URPA uses three color-coded lights the display briefly illuminates to Assist (URPA) system does not to provide distance and system indicate the system is working when replace driver vision. It cannot information. the shift lever is moved into detect: R (Reverse). . Objects that are below the If the vehicle is traveling faster then bumper, underneath the 8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the red vehicle, or if they are too light on the rear display flashes. close or far from the vehicle Objects must be at least 20 cm (8 in) . Children, pedestrians, off the ground, below liftgate level, bicyclists, or pets. and within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear bumper to be detected. The If you do not use proper care distance may be less during warmer before and while backing; vehicle or humid weather. damage, injury, or death could occur. Even with URPA, always A single beep sounds the first time an object is detected between 0.6 m check behind the vehicle before (23 in) and 2.5 m (8 ft) away. backing up. While backing, be Beeping occurs continuously when sure to look for objects and check the vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in) or closer the vehicle's mirrors. to an object. 8-48 Driving and Operating

The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle When the System Does Not gets closer to a detected object: Seem to Work Properly Description Metric English If the URPA system does not activate due to a temporary amber light 2.5 m 8 ft condition, the message Park Assist amber/amber lights 1.0 m 40 in Off displays on the DIC and a red amber/amber/red lights and light is shown on the rear URPA continuous beeping for 0.6 m 23 in display when the shift lever is five seconds moved into R (Reverse). This can occur under the following amber/amber/red lights flashing conditions: and continuous beeping for 0.3 m 1 ft . The ultrasonic sensors are not five seconds clean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning Park Assist Off displays on the The settings are: instructions, see Exterior Care Driver Information Center (DIC) to . On: Turns URPA on on page 9‑81. indicate that URPA is off, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on . Off: Turns URPA off . A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or an object was page 4‑27 for more information. . Tow Bar: Use when a tow bar is hanging out of the liftgate during System Settings attached to the vehicle the last drive cycle, a red light Each time the vehicle is started Tow Bar may come on in the rear display. Once the attached object is URPA defaults to the On setting. When the tow bar setting is used, removed, URPA will return to an area of 16 cm (6 in) around the Use the Vehicle Personalization on normal operation. page 4‑39 menu to hitch is not detected by the system. configure URPA. Driving and Operating 8-49

. A tow bar is attached to the Rear Vision vehicle and the tow bar setting is WARNING (Continued) not being used, or an odd Camera (RVC) shaped tow bar is attached to The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only the vehicle and the tow bar Camera (RVC) system. Read this looking at the RVC screen, or use setting is being used. entire section before using it. the screen during longer, higher . The vehicle's bumper is The RVC can assist the driver when speed backing maneuvers or damaged. Take the vehicle to backing up by displaying a view of where there could be cross-traffic. your dealer/retailer to repair the the area behind the vehicle. Your judged distances using the system. screen will differ from actual . Other conditions may affect { WARNING distances. system performance, such as So if you do not use proper care vibrations from a jackhammer or The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) before backing up, you could hit a the compression of air brakes on system does not replace driver vehicle, child, pedestrian, a very large truck. vision. RVC does not: bicyclist, or pet, resulting in If the system is still disabled, after . Detect objects that are vehicle damage, injury, or death. driving forward at least 25 km/h outside the camera's field of Even though the vehicle has the (15 mph), take the vehicle to your view, below the bumper, RVC system, always check dealer/retailer. or underneath the vehicle. carefully before backing up by . Detect children, pedestrians, checking behind and around the bicyclists, or pets. vehicle. (Continued) 8-50 Driving and Operating

Vehicles Without a Navigation Vehicles With a Navigation Turning the Rear Vision Camera System System System On or Off When the key is in the ON/RUN An image appears on the navigation To turn the rear vision camera position and the driver shifts the screen with the message “Check system on or off: vehicle into R (Reverse), the video Surroundings for Safety” when the 1. Shift into P (Park). image automatically appears on the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). inside rear view mirror. Once the The navigation screen goes to the 2. Press the CONFIG button. driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the previous screen after approximately 3. Select Display. video image automatically 10 seconds once the vehicle is disappears from the inside rear view shifted out of R (Reverse). mirror. To cancel the delay, do one of the Turning the Rear Vision Camera following: System Off or On . Press a hard key on the To turn off the RVC system, press navigation system. and hold z , located on the inside . Shift into P (Park). rearview mirror, until the left . Reach a vehicle speed of indicator light turns off. The RVC 8 km/h (5 mph). display is now disabled. To turn the RVC system on again, press and hold until the left z 4. Select Camera. When a check indicator light illuminates. The RVC mark appears next to the system display is now enabled and Camera option, then the RVC the display will appear in the mirror system is on. normally. Driving and Operating 8-51

Symbols Guidelines Rear Vision Camera Location The navigation system may have a The RVC system has a guideline feature that lets the driver view overlay that can help the driver align symbols on the navigation screen the vehicle when backing into a while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic parking spot. Rear Park Assist (URPA) system To turn the guidelines on or off: must not be disabled to use the caution symbols. The error message 1. Shift into P (Park). “Rear Parking Assist Symbols 2. Press the CONFIG button. Unavailable” may display if URPA has been disabled and the symbols 3. Select Display. have been turned on. See 4. Select Guidelines. When a Ultrasonic Parking Assist on check mark appears next to the page 8‑46. Guidelines option, guidelines will The symbols appear and may cover appear. The camera is located above the license plate. an object when viewing the Rear Vision Camera Error navigation screen when an object is Messages The area displayed by the camera is detected by the URPA system. limited. SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA To turn the symbols on or off: SYSTEM: This message can It does not display objects that are 1. Shift into P (Park). display on the navigation screen close to either corner or under the when the system is not receiving bumper and can vary depending 2. Press the CONFIG button. information it requires from other on vehicle orientation or road 3. Select Display. vehicle systems. conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the screen is 4. Select Symbols. When a check If any other problem occurs or if a different from the actual distance. mark appears next to the problem persists, see your dealer/ Symbols option, symbols will retailer. appear. 8-52 Driving and Operating

The following illustration shows the A. View displayed by the camera. . The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and field of view that the camera B. Corner of the rear bumper. provides. mounting angle of the camera When the System Does Not can change or the camera can Seem To Work Properly be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and The RVC system may not work mounting angle checked at your properly or display a clear image if: dealer/retailer. . The RVC is turned off. See The RVC system display in the “Turning the Rear Camera rearview mirror may turn off or not System On or Off” earlier in this appear as expected due to one of section. the following conditions. If this . It is dark. occurs the left indicator light on the mirror will flash. . The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into . A slow flash may indicate a loss the camera lens. of video signal, or no video signal present during the reverse . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else cycle. builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. Driving and Operating 8-53

. A fast flash may indicate that the display has been on for the Fuel maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper has reached an over maintenance of this vehicle. To help temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent conditions. Once conditions Gasoline. return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards During any of these fault conditions, developed by auto companies. A list the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com. or until the conditions return to normal. Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light. 8-54 Driving and Operating

Recommended Fuel California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements Countries a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or than 87, an audible knocking noise, designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be commonly referred to as spark meet California specifications. See hard to find. Never use leaded knock, might be heard when driving. the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty. 87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission needs service. To check the fuel availability, ask an control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil be affected. The malfunction Gasoline Specifications company that does business in the indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving. At a minimum, gasoline should meet vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. ASTM specification D 4814 in the See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 page 4‑18. If this occurs, return to or 3.511 in Canada. Some your authorized dealer/retailer for gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the octane-enhancing additive condition is caused by the type of called methylcyclopentadienyl fuel used, repairs might not be manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). covered by the vehicle warranty. We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 8‑55 for additional information. Driving and Operating 8-55

Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at Some gasolines that are However, some gasolines contain your dealer/retailer. only the minimum amount of not reformulated for low additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese injectors and intake valves clean, available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant or if the vehicle experiences recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the problems due to dirty injectors or gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend valves, look for gasoline that is specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER other fuels containing more than the life of spark plugs and the label on the fuel pump to ensure 10% ethanol must not be used in performance of the emission control gasoline meets enhanced vehicles that were not designed for system could be affected. The detergency standards developed by those fuels. malfunction indicator lamp might the auto companies. A list of turn on. If this occurs, return to your marketers providing TOP TIER dealer/retailer for service. Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com. 8-56 Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank The fuel cap is behind the fuel door Do not top off or overfill the tank and on the vehicle's passenger side. wait a few seconds before removing Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted { WARNING to remove. Do not release the cap surfaces as soon as possible. See Fuel vapor burns violently and a too soon or it will spring back. Exterior Care on page 9‑81. Reinstall the cap by turning it fuel fire can cause bad injuries. clockwise until it clicks. To help avoid injuries to you and { WARNING others, read and follow all the If the cap is not properly installed, If a fire starts while you are instructions on the fuel pump the Malfunction Indicator Lamp refueling, do not remove the island. Turn off the engine when come on. See Malfunction Indicator nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by refueling. Do not smoke near fuel Lamp on page 4‑18 for more shutting off the pump or by or when refueling the vehicle. Do information. notifying the station attendant. not use cellular phones. Keep Leave the area immediately. sparks, flames, and smoking { WARNING materials away from fuel. Do not Fuel can spray out on you if you Notice: If a new fuel cap is leave the fuel pump unattended needed, be sure to get the right when refueling the vehicle. This is open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then type of cap from your dealer/ against the law in some places. retailer. The wrong type fuel cap Do not re-enter the vehicle while something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can might not fit properly, might pumping fuel. Keep children away cause the malfunction indicator happen if the tank is nearly full, from the fuel pump; never let lamp to light, and could damage and is more likely in hot weather. children pump fuel. the fuel tank and emissions Open the fuel cap slowly and wait system. See Malfunction Indicator for any hiss noise to stop. Then Lamp on page 4‑18. unscrew the cap all the way. Driving and Operating 8-57

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing Container . Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing { WARNING with the inside of the fill Information opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that has Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be while it is in the vehicle. Static been designed for the vehicle. maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer/retailer or electricity discharge from the complete. container can ignite the fuel trailering retailer for assistance with vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section: . Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while approved containers. towing a trailer, see “Driving Characteristics and . Do not fill a container while it Towing Tips”. is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, . For maximum vehicle and trailer or on any surface other than weights, see “Trailer Towing”. the ground. . For information on equipment to (Continued) tow a trailer, see “Towing Equipment”. 8-58 Driving and Operating

For information on towing a disabled The following information has vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules for page 9‑78. For information on your safety and that of your towing the vehicle behind another the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer passengers. Read this section vehicle — such as a motorhome, only if all the steps in this section carefully before pulling a trailer. see Recreational Vehicle Towing on have been followed. Ask your page 9‑78. dealer/retailer for advice and Pulling A Trailer information about towing a trailer Here are some important points: Driving Characteristics with the vehicle. . There are many laws, including and Towing Tips speed limit restrictions that apply The vehicle can tow a trailer when to trailering. Check for legal equipped with the proper trailer { WARNING requirements with state or towing equipment. For trailering provincial police. capacity, see Trailer Towing The driver can lose control when “ ” following in this section. Trailering . Do not tow a trailer at all during pulling a trailer if the correct changes handling, acceleration, the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles) equipment is not used or the braking, durability and fuel the new vehicle is driven. The vehicle is not driven properly. For economy. With the added weight, engine, axle or other parts could example, if the trailer is too the engine, transmission, wheel be damaged. heavy, the brakes may not work assemblies and tires are forced to . During the first 800 km well — or even at all. The driver work harder and under greater (500 miles) that a trailer is and passengers could be loads. The trailer also adds wind towed, do not drive over 80 km/h seriously injured. The vehicle may resistance, increasing the pulling (50 mph) and do not make starts also be damaged; the resulting requirements. For safe trailering, at full throttle. This reduces wear repairs would not be covered by correctly use the proper trailering on the vehicle. equipment. (Continued) . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Use a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often. Driving and Operating 8-59

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode Check all trailer hitch parts and Following Distance when towing. attachments, safety chains, Stay at least twice as far behind the . electrical connectors, lamps, tires Obey speed limit restrictions. vehicle ahead as you would when and mirror adjustments. If the trailer Do not drive faster than the driving the vehicle without a trailer. has electric brakes, start the vehicle maximum posted speed for This can help to avoid situations and trailer moving and then apply trailers, or no more than 90 km/h that require heavy braking and the trailer brake controller by hand (55 mph), to reduce wear on the sudden turns. vehicle. to be sure the brakes are working. Passing . For vehicles with the Ultra During the trip, check regularly to be Rear Parking Assist (URPA) sure that the load is secure, and the More passing distance is needed system, turn the system off when lamps and trailer brakes are working when towing a trailer. Because the towing a trailer. If the tow bar properly. rig is longer, it is necessary to go is installed while not towing a Towing with a Stability Control farther beyond the passed vehicle trailer, change the URPA system before returning to the lane. System to the “Tow Bar” setting. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on When towing, the sound of the Backing Up page 8‑46 for more information. stability control system might be Hold the bottom of the steering heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. To move the Driving with a Trailer vehicle movement caused by the trailer to the left, move that hand to Towing a trailer requires experience. trailer, which mainly occurs during the left. To move the trailer to the Get familiar with handling and cornering. This is normal when right, move your hand to the right. braking with the added trailer towing heavier trailers. Always back up slowly and, weight. The vehicle is now longer if possible, have someone and not as responsive as the guide you. vehicle is by itself. 8-60 Driving and Operating

Making Turns are burned out. Check occasionally engine off. If the overheat warning to be sure the trailer bulbs are still comes on, see Engine Overheating Notice: Making very sharp turns working. on page 9 19. while trailering could cause the ‑ trailer to come in contact with the Driving On Grades Parking on Hills vehicle. The vehicle could be Reduce speed and shift to a damaged. Avoid making very { WARNING sharp turns while trailering. lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the When turning with a trailer, make transmission is not shifted down, Parking the vehicle on a hill with wider turns than normal so the the brakes might have to be used the trailer attached can be trailer will not strike soft shoulders, so much that they would get hot and dangerous. If something goes curbs, road signs, trees or other no longer work well. wrong, the rig could start to move. objects. Use the turn signal well in People can be injured, and both The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). advance and avoid jerky or sudden the vehicle and the trailer can be Use a lower gear if the transmission maneuvers. damaged. When possible, always shifts too often. park the rig on a flat surface. Turn Signals When Towing a When towing at high altitude on Trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant If parking the rig on a hill: will boil at a lower temperature than The turn signal indicators on the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do at normal altitudes. If the engine is instrument panel flash whenever not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn turned off immediately after towing signaling a turn or lane change. the wheels into the curb if facing at high altitude on steep uphill Properly hooked up, the trailer downhill or into traffic if facing grades, the vehicle may show signs lamps also flash, telling other uphill. drivers the vehicle is turning, similar to engine overheating. To changing lanes or stopping. avoid this, let the engine run while 2. Have someone place chocks parked, preferably on level ground, under the trailer wheels. When towing a trailer, the arrows with the transmission in P (Park) for on the instrument panel flash for a few minutes before turning the turns even if the bulbs on the trailer Driving and Operating 8-61

3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing place, release the brake pedal Towing until the chocks absorb the load. Before pulling a trailer, there are The vehicle needs service more three important considerations that 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this have to do with weight: apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or . The weight of the trailer into P (Park). Index for more information. Things 5. Release the brake pedal. that are especially important in . The weight of the trailer tongue trailer operation are automatic . Leaving After Parking on a Hill The total weight on the vehicle's transmission fluid, engine oil, axle tires 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. Inspect these before Weight of the Trailer 2. Start the engine. and during the trip. How heavy can a trailer safely be? 3. Shift into a gear. Check periodically to see that all Speed, altitude, road grades, hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4. Release the parking brake. outside temperature, special 5. Let up on the brake pedal. Engine Cooling When Trailer equipment, and the amount of Towing tongue weight the vehicle can carry 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is must be considered. See Weight of clear of the chocks. “ The cooling system may temporarily the Trailer Tongue” later in this 7. Stop and have someone pick up overheat during severe operating section for more information. and store the chocks. conditions. See Engine Overheating on page 9‑19. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. 8-62 Driving and Operating

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, If there are a lot of options, based upon the vehicle model and options. equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue Maximum Trailer GCWR* weight the vehicle can carry, which Weight with Trailer will also reduce the trailer weight the Vehicle Brakes† vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs) the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs) be carrying that weight, too. See V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs) Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24. V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs) † For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg (1,000 lbs) and the GCWR is 2 300 kg (5,071 lbs). See Towing Equipment on page 8‑63 for more information.

*The Gross Combination Weight Weight of the Trailer Tongue Rating (GCWR) is the total The tongue load (A) of any trailer is allowable weight of the completely an important weight to measure loaded vehicle and trailer including because it affects the total gross any passengers, cargo, equipment weight of the vehicle. The Gross and conversions. The GCWR for the Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the vehicle should not be exceeded. curb weight of the vehicle, any If a weight-carrying hitch or a Ask your dealer/retailer for our cargo carried in it, and the people weight-distributing hitch is being trailering information or advice. See who will be riding in the vehicle. used, the trailer tongue (A) should Customer Assistance Offices on weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total page 12‑3 for more information. loaded trailer weight (B). Driving and Operating 8-63

After loading the trailer, weigh the Total Weight on the Vehicle's Towing Equipment trailer and then the tongue, Tires separately, to see if the weights are Hitches proper. If they are not, adjustments Inflate the vehicle's tires to the upper limit for cold tires. These Use the correct hitch equipment. might be made by moving some See your dealer/retailer or a hitch items around in the trailer. numbers can be found on the Certification label or see Vehicle dealer for assistance. Trailering may be limited by the Load Limits on page 8‑24 for more . The rear bumper on the vehicle vehicle's ability to carry tongue information. Do not go over the is not intended for hitches. Do weight. Tongue weight cannot cause GVW limit for the vehicle, or the not attach rental hitches or other the vehicle to exceed the GVWR GAWR, including the weight of the bumper-type hitches to it. Use (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or trailer tongue. If using a weight only a frame-mounted hitch that the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle distributing hitch, do not go over the does not attach to the bumper. Weight Rating). The effect of rear axle limit before applying the additional weight may reduce the weight distribution spring bars. . Will any holes be made in the trailering capacity more than the body of the vehicle when the total of the additional weight. trailer hitch is installed? If there are, seal the holes when the It is important that the vehicle hitch is removed. If the holes are does not exceed any of its not sealed, dirt, water, and ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue from the exhaust can get into the Weight. The only way to be sure it is vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on not exceeding any of these ratings page 8‑34. is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. 8-64 Driving and Operating

Safety Chains Trailer Sway Conversions and Always attach chains between the Control (TSC) Add-Ons vehicle and the trailer. Cross the The vehicle has a Trailer Sway safety chains under the tongue Control (TSC) feature as part of the of the trailer to help prevent the Add-On Electrical StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects tongue from contacting the road if it Equipment that the trailer is swaying, the becomes separated from the hitch. vehicle's brakes are automatically Notice: Do not add anything Leave enough slack so the rig can applied. electrical to the vehicle unless turn. Never allow safety chains to you check with your dealer/ drag on the ground. retailer first. Some electrical Trailer Brakes equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would Does the trailer have its own not be covered by the vehicle's brakes? Be sure to read and follow warranty. Some add-on electrical the instructions for the trailer brakes equipment can keep other so they are installed, adjusted and When TSC is applying the brakes, components from working as maintained properly. the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator they should. Because the vehicle has antilock light flashes to notify the driver to Add-on equipment can drain the brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's reduce speed. See Traction Control ® vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is brake system. If this is done, both System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light on not operating. brake systems will not work well, page 4‑23. If the trailer continues to or at all. sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine The vehicle has an airbag system. torque to help slow the vehicle. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is Servicing the Airbag-Equipped turned off. Vehicle on page 2‑38 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑38. Vehicle Care 9-1

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-13 Bulb Replacement Vehicle Care Cooling System ...... 9-15 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-33 Engine Coolant ...... 9-16 Headlamps, Front Turn General Information Engine Overheating ...... 9-19 Signal, Sidemarker, and Power Steering Fluid Parking Lamps ...... 9-34 General Information ...... 9-2 (2.4L L4 Engine) ...... 9-21 Fog Lamps ...... 9-35 California Proposition Power Steering Fluid Taillamps, Turn Signal, 65 Warning ...... 9-3 (3.0L V6 Engine) ...... 9-21 Sidemarker, Stoplamps, California Perchlorate Materials Washer Fluid ...... 9-22 and Back-Up Lamps ...... 9-35 Requirements ...... 9-3 Brakes ...... 9-22 License Plate Lamp ...... 9-36 Accessories and Brake Fluid ...... 9-24 Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-37 Modifications ...... 9-3 Battery ...... 9-25 Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-26 Electrical System Doing Your Own Starter Switch Check ...... 9-27 Fuses ...... 9-37 Service Work ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission Engine Compartment Fuse Hood ...... 9-5 Shift Lock Control System Block ...... 9-38 Engine Compartment Check ...... 9-27 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...... 9-40 Overview ...... 9-6 Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Cover ...... 9-9 Check ...... 9-28 Wheels and Tires Park Brake and P (Park) Engine Oil ...... 9-10 Tires ...... 9-43 Mechanism Check ...... 9-28 Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-12 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-44 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-29 Automatic Transmission Tire Designations ...... 9-46 Fluid ...... 9-13 Headlamp Aiming Tire Terminology and Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Definitions ...... 9-47 9-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure ...... 9-50 Jump Starting General Information Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting ...... 9-74 System ...... 9-51 For service and parts needs, visit Tire Pressure Monitor Towing your dealer/retailer. You will receive Operation ...... 9-53 Towing the Vehicle ...... 9-78 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Tire Inspection ...... 9-56 Recreational Vehicle and supported service people. Towing ...... 9-78 Tire Rotation ...... 9-56 Genuine GM parts have one of When It Is Time for New Appearance Care these marks: Tires ...... 9-58 Exterior Care ...... 9-81 Buying New Tires ...... 9-58 Interior Care ...... 9-85 Different Size Tires and Wheels ...... 9-60 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 9-61 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 9-62 Wheel Replacement ...... 9-63 Tire Chains ...... 9-64 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-64 Tire Changing ...... 9-66 Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-73 Vehicle Care 9-3

California Proposition Accessories and covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect 65 Warning Modifications remaining warranty coverage for Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer affected parts. one, contain and/or emit chemicals accessories to the vehicle can affect GM Accessories are designed to known to the State of California to vehicle performance and safety, complement and function with other cause cancer and birth defects or including such things as airbags, systems on the vehicle. Your GM other reproductive harm. Engine braking, stability, ride and handling, dealer/retailer can accessorize the exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics, vehicle using genuine GM many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems Accessories. When you go to your wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control, GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these Accessories, you will know that accessories could even cause GM-trained and supported service California Perchlorate malfunction or damage not covered technicians will perform the work Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty. using genuine GM Accessories. Damage to vehicle components Certain types of automotive Also, see Adding Equipment to the resulting from the installation or use applications, such as airbag Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on of non GM certified parts, including initiators, seat belt pretensioners, ‐ page 2‑38. control module modifications, is not and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. 9-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system. WARNING (Continued) Before attempting to do your own service work, see Airbag System Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper Check on page 2‑40. nuts, bolts, and other Service Work Keep a record with all parts receipts fasteners. English and metric and list the mileage and the date of { WARNING fasteners can be easily any service work performed. See confused. If the wrong Maintenance Records on You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts can page 10‑10. vehicle could be damaged if you later break or fall off. You try to do service work on a vehicle could be hurt. without knowing enough about it. If doing some of your own service . Be sure you have sufficient work, use the proper service knowledge, experience, manual. It tells you much more the proper replacement about how to service the vehicle parts, and tools before than this manual can. To order the attempting any vehicle proper service manual, see Service maintenance task. Publications Ordering Information on (Continued) page 12‑12. Vehicle Care 9-5

Hood To open the hood:

2. Move the secondary hood release lever to the right to release the striker. The lever is near the middle of the hood. 1. Pull the release handle with the symbol on it. It is below the 3. Lift the hood. instrument panel, to the left of Before closing the hood, check all the steering wheel. filler caps are properly installed. 9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4L L4 Engine Vehicle Care 9-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. page 9‑13. See Jump Starting on page 9 74. B. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. ‑ C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting on See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑74. D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine I. Battery on page 9 25. Oil on page 9‑10. ‑ E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine Brakes on page 9‑22. Coolant on page 9‑16. F. Engine Compartment Fuse K. Windshield Washer Fluid Block on page 9‑38. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page 9‑22. 9-8 Vehicle Care

3.0L V6 Engine Vehicle Care 9-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Cover page 9‑13. Block on page 9‑38. 3.0L V6 Engine Cover B. Power Steering Fluid H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. (2.4L L4 Engine) on page 9‑21 See Jump Starting on or Power Steering Fluid page 9‑74. (3.0L V6 Engine) on page 9‑21. I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on Oil on page 9‑10. page 9‑74. D. Engine Cover on page 9‑9. J. Battery on page 9‑25. E. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view). K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. Pressure Cap. See Engine F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Coolant on page 9‑16. Brakes on page 9‑22. L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page 9‑22. To remove: 1. Remove the oil fill cap. 2. Hold cover on both sides and pull upward. 3. Lift and remove the engine cover. 4. Install cover by aligning on oil fill tube, then firmly pushing down onto the intake manifold. 5. Install the oil fill cap. 9-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add It is a good idea to check the engine at least one liter/quart of the oil level at each fuel fill. In order to recommended oil. This section get an accurate reading, the oil explains what kind of oil to use. For See Engine Compartment Overview must be warm and the vehicle must engine oil crankcase capacity, see on page 9 6 for the location of the be on level ground. Capacities and Specifications on ‑ engine oil fill cap. The engine oil dipstick handle is a page 11‑2. Add enough oil to put the level yellow loop. See Engine Notice: Do not add too much oil. somewhere in the proper operating Compartment Overview on If the engine has so much oil that range. Push the dipstick all the way page 9‑6 for the location of the the oil level gets above the back in when through. engine oil dipstick. cross-hatched area that shows 1. Turn off the engine and give the the proper operating range, the oil several minutes to drain back engine could be damaged. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Vehicle Care 9-11

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Cold Temperature Operation Look for three things: If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −29°C . GM6094M (−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30 Use only an oil that meets GM synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 Standard GM6094M. engine oil. Both provide easier cold Oils meeting these requirements . SAE 5W-30 starting for the engine at extremely should have the starburst low temperatures. Always use an oil SAE 5W-30 is best for the symbol on the container. This that meets the required vehicle. These numbers on an symbol indicates that the oil has specification, GM6094M. oil container show its viscosity, been certified by the American or thickness. Do not use other Petroleum Institute (API). Engine Oil Additives / Engine viscosity oils such as Notice: Use only engine oil Oil Flushes SAE 20W-50. identified as meeting GM Do not add anything to the oil. The . American Petroleum Institute Standard GM6094M and showing recommended oils with the starburst (API) starburst symbol the American Petroleum Institute symbol that meet GM standards Certified For Gasoline Engines are all that is needed for good starburst symbol. Failure to use performance and engine protection. the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by Engine oil system flushes are not the vehicle warranty. recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. 9-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System as possible within the next 1 000 km How to Reset the Engine Oil (600 miles). It is possible that, Life System When to Change Engine Oil if driving under the best conditions, Reset the system whenever the This vehicle has a computer system the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for engine oil is changed so that the that indicates when to change the system can calculate the next engine oil and filter. This is based over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least engine oil change. To reset the on engine revolutions and engine system: temperature, and not on mileage. once a year and at this time the Based on driving conditions, the system must be reset. Your dealer/ 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with mileage at which an oil change is retailer has trained service people the engine off. who will perform this work using indicated can vary considerably. For 2. Fully press and release the genuine parts and reset the system. the oil life system to work properly, accelerator pedal three times It is also important to check the oil the system must be reset every time within five seconds. the oil is changed. regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the vehicle has Driver Information When the system has calculated Center (DIC) buttons: that oil life has been diminished, it If the system is ever reset 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, indicates that an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) with the engine off. necessary. A “Change Engine since the last oil change. Oil Soon” message comes on. 2. Press the DIC menu button until See Engine Oil Messages on Remember to reset the oil life “Remaining Oil Life” displays. system whenever the oil is changed. page 4‑34. Change the oil as soon 3. Press and hold the set/clear button until “100%” is displayed. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. The system is reset when the “Change Engine Oil Soon” message goes off. Vehicle Care 9-13

What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Used engine oil contains elements Fluid Maintenance on page 10 2, and be that can be unhealthy for your skin ‑ sure to use the fluid listed in and could even cause cancer. Do How to Check Automatic Recommended Fluids and not let used oil stay on your skin. Transmission Fluid Lubricants on page 10‑7. Clean your skin and nails with soap It is not necessary to check and water, or a good hand cleaner. the transmission fluid level. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Wash or properly dispose of clothing A transmission fluid leak is the or rags. See the manufacturer's only reason for fluid loss. If a leak See Engine Compartment Overview warnings about the use and occurs, take the vehicle to your on page 9‑6 for the location of the disposal of oil products. dealer/retailer service department engine air cleaner/filter. Used oil can be a threat to the and have it repaired as soon as When to Inspect the Engine Air possible. environment. If you change your Cleaner/Filter own oil, be sure to drain all the oil There is a special procedure for from the filter before disposal. Never checking and changing the Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the dispose of oil by putting it in the transmission fluid. Because this Maintenance II intervals and replace trash, pouring it on the ground, into procedure is difficult, this should be it at the first oil change after each sewers, or into streams or bodies of done at your dealer/retailer service 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. water. Recycle it by taking it to a department. Contact your dealer/ See Scheduled Maintenance on place that collects used oil. retailer for additional information or page 10‑2 for more information. the procedure can be found in the If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, service manual. To purchase a inspect the filter at each engine oil service manual, see Service change. Publications Ordering Information on page 12‑12. 9-14 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine Air How to Reinstall Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 1. Install the air cleaner into the air remove the filter from the vehicle cleaner housing. The outer air and lightly shake the filter to release cleaner filter seal must be fitted loose dust and dirt. If the filter properly in the air cleaner remains caked with dirt, a new filter housing. is required. 2. Align the air cleaner housing To inspect or replace the engine air cover tabs to the air cleaner cleaner/filter: housing. 1. Open the hood. See Hood on 3. Install the air cleaner housing 3. Remove the four air cleaner page 9 5. cover using the four screws. ‑ housing cover screws. 2. Locate the air filter housing on 4. Pull straight up on cover, and the front passenger side of the while holding the cover, remove engine compartment. See the air filter. Engine Compartment Overview on page 9‑6. Vehicle Care 9-15

Cooling System { WARNING

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is 3.0 L V6 Engine off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. 2.4 L L4 Engine A. Engine Cooling Fans Always have the air cleaner/filter A. Engine Cooling Fan B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and in place when you are driving. Pressure Cap B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap { WARNING

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. 9-16 Vehicle Care

If the coolant inside the coolant If there seems to be no leak, with Engine Coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do the engine on, check to see if The cooling system in the vehicle anything else until it cools down. the electric engine cooling fan ® Park the vehicle on a level surface. is running. If the engine is is filled with DEX-COOL engine overheating, the fan should be coolant. This coolant is designed to The coolant level should be at the remain in the vehicle for five years COLD FILL line. If it is not, there running. If it is not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), might be a leak at the radiator whichever occurs first. hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water Notice: Using coolant other pump, or somewhere else in the than DEX-COOL® can cause The following explains the cooling cooling system. premature engine, heater core, system and how to check and add or radiator corrosion. In addition, coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, { WARNING the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 50 000 km see Engine Overheating on Heater and radiator hoses, and (30,000 miles) or 24 months, page 9‑19. other engine parts, can be very whichever occurs first. Any hot. Do not touch them. If you do, repairs would not be covered by you can be burned. the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant Do not run the engine if there is a in the vehicle. leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. Vehicle Care 9-17

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant drinkable water and DEX-COOL® The vehicle must be on a level coolant. If using this mixture, { WARNING surface when checking the coolant nothing else needs to be added. level. Adding only plain water to This mixture: Check to see if coolant is visible in the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down the coolant surge tank. If the coolant dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside inside the coolant surge tank is other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. boil before the proper coolant boiling, do not do anything else . Gives boiling protection up to until it cools down. If coolant is mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine visible but the coolant level is not warning system is set for the temperature. at or above the COLD mark, add a proper coolant mixture. With plain . 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water or the wrong mixture, the Protects against rust and ® corrosion. water and DEX-COOL coolant at engine could get too hot but you the coolant surge tank, but be would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. sure the cooling system is cool warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine before this is done. See Engine fire and you or others could be temperature. Overheating on page 9‑19 for more burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of information. clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant The coolant surge tank is located in DEX-COOL® coolant. mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. the engine compartment on the The repair cost would not be driver side of the vehicle. See covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Compartment Overview on Too much water in the mixture page 9‑6 for more information on can freeze and crack the engine, location. radiator, heater core, and other parts. 9-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to the If coolant is needed, add the proper Coolant Surge Tank { WARNING DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank. An electric engine cooling fan { WARNING under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running You can be burned if you spill and can cause injury. Keep coolant on hot engine parts. hands, clothing, and tools away Coolant contains ethylene glycol from any underhood electric fan. and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill The coolant surge tank pressure coolant on a hot engine. { WARNING cap can be removed when the cooling system, including the surge Notice: This vehicle has a Steam and scalding liquids from a specific coolant fill procedure. tank pressure cap and upper hot cooling system can blow out Failure to follow this procedure radiator hose, is no longer hot. and burn you badly. They are could cause the engine to 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly under pressure, and if you turn overheat and be severely counterclockwise. If a hiss is damaged. the surge tank pressure heard, wait for that to stop. cap — even a little — they can A hiss means there is still some come out at high speed. Never pressure left. turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank 2. Keep turning the cap and pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the remove it. cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Vehicle Care 9-19

engine cooling fan(s). By this Engine Overheating time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be The vehicle has an indicator to warn lower. If the level is lower, add of engine overheating. There is an more of the proper mixture to the engine coolant temperature warning coolant surge tank until the level light on the vehicle's instrument reaches the line pointed to on panel. See Engine Coolant the front of the coolant Temperature Gage on page 4‑15. surge tank. Decide whether to lift the hood 5. Replace the pressure cap. when this warning appears, or get Be sure the pressure cap is service help instead. hand–tight and full seated. If lifting the hood , make sure the 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with Notice: If the pressure cap is not vehicle is parked on a level surface. the proper mixture to the COLD tightly installed, coolant loss and FILL line. Then check to see if the engine possible engine damage may cooling fans are running. If the 4. With the coolant surge tank occur. Be sure the cap is properly engine is overheating, both fans pressure cap off, start the and tightly secured. should be running. If they are not, engine and let it run until the If coolant is needed, add the proper do not continue to run the engine upper radiator hose starts DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the and have the vehicle serviced. getting hot. Watch out for the coolant surge tank. Notice: Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty. 9-20 Vehicle Care

If Steam Is Coming From The If No Steam Is Coming From If the temperature overheat gage Engine Compartment The Engine Compartment is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer If an engine overheat warning is { WARNING displays, the vehicle can be driven. displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slow or heard, the problem may not be Steam from an overheated engine for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe too serious. Sometimes the engine vehicle distance from the vehicle in can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the just open the hood. Stay away front. If the warning does not come vehicle: back on, continue to drive normally. from the engine if you see or hear . steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over, off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. stop, and park the vehicle right away. the vehicle until it cools down. . Idles for long periods in traffic. Wait until there is no sign of If there is no sign of steam, idle the . Tows a trailer. steam or coolant before you open engine for three minutes while the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed parked. If the warning is still with no sign of steam: If you keep driving when your displayed, turn off the engine until it engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air conditioning off. cools down. in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest could be badly burned. Stop your temperature and to the highest engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as of the vehicle until the engine necessary. is cool. 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle. Vehicle Care 9-21

Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the (2.4L L4 Engine) Fluid dipstick with a clean rag. The power steering fluid does not 5. Replace the cap and completely The vehicle has electric power tighten it. steering and does not use power need to be checked unless there is steering fluid. a leak in the system. Have the 6. Remove the cap again and system inspected and repaired if look at the fluid level on the Power Steering Fluid there is a fluid loss. dipstick. (3.0L V6 Engine) How to Check Power Steering The fluid level should be between Fluid MAX and MIN line at room temperature. If the fluid is on or To check: below MIN line, add fluid. 1. Turn the engine off and let it cool down. What to Use 2. Remove the engine cover. Refer For the proper fluid, see to Engine Cover on page 9‑9. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 10‑7. The power steering fluid reservoir 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the is to the rear of the engine reservoir clean. compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 9‑6. 9-22 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes . What to Use When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear Read the manufacturer's manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched instructions before refilling the for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads windshield washer fluid. If operating . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. the vehicle in an area where the ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be temperature may fall below freezing, Water can cause the solution heard all the time the vehicle is use a fluid that has sufficient to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the protection against freezing. washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly. Adding Washer Fluid parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as { WARNING well as washer fluid. The brake wear warning sound . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is means that soon the brakes will very cold. This allows for not work well. That could lead to fluid expansion if freezing an accident. When the brake occurs, which could damage wear warning sound is heard, Open the cap with the washer the tank if it is have the vehicle serviced. symbol on it and add washer fluid completely full. until full. See Engine Compartment Notice: Continuing to drive with . Do not use engine coolant Overview on page 9‑6 for worn-out brake pads could result reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield in costly brake repair. washer. It can damage the vehicle's windshield washer system and paint. Vehicle Care 9-23

Some driving conditions or climates Brake Pedal Travel Replacing Brake System Parts can cause a brake squeal when the See your dealer/retailer if the brake The braking system on a vehicle is brakes are first applied or lightly pedal does not return to normal complex. Its many parts have to be applied. This does not mean height, or if there is a rapid increase of top quality and work well together something is wrong with the brakes. in pedal travel. This could be a sign if the vehicle is to have really good Properly torqued wheel nuts are that brake service might be braking. The vehicle was designed necessary to help prevent brake required. and tested with top-quality brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking inspect brake pads for wear and Brake Adjustment system are replaced, be sure to get evenly tighten wheel nuts in the Every time the brakes are applied, new, approved replacement parts. proper sequence to torque with or without the vehicle moving, If this is not done, the brakes might specifications in Capacities and the brakes adjust for wear. not work properly. For example, Specifications on page 11‑2. installing disc brake pads that are Brake linings should always be wrong for the vehicle, can change replaced as complete axle sets. the balance between the front and rear brakes — for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. 9-24 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the installed. Add or remove brake fluid, brake fluid level in the reservoir as necessary, only when work is might go down: done on the brake hydraulic system. . The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining { WARNING wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes If too much brake fluid is added, it back up. can spill on the engine and burn, The brake master cylinder reservoir if the engine is hot enough. You . A fluid leak in the brake is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as or others could be burned, and hydraulic system can also indicated on the reservoir cap. See the vehicle could be damaged. cause a low fluid level. Have the Engine Compartment Overview on Add brake fluid only when work is brake hydraulic system fixed, page 9 6 for the location of the done on the brake hydraulic ‑ since a leak means that sooner reservoir. or later the brakes will not system. work well. When the brake fluid falls to a low Do not top off the brake fluid. level, the brake warning light comes Adding fluid does not correct a leak. on. See Brake System Warning If fluid is added when the linings are Light on page 4‑21. worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are Vehicle Care 9-25

What to Add Notice: Battery Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid can Refer to the replacement number on from a sealed container. See badly damage brake the original battery label when a Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. For new battery is needed. Lubricants on page 10‑7. example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as Always clean the brake fluid { DANGER reservoir cap and the area around engine oil, in the brake the cap before removing it. This hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and damage brake hydraulic helps keep dirt from entering the related accessories contain lead system parts so badly that reservoir. and lead compounds, chemicals they will have to be replaced. known to the State of California to Do not let someone put in { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on brake hydraulic system, the the vehicle's painted brakes might not work well. This surfaces, the paint finish can could cause a crash. Always use be damaged. Be careful not the proper brake fluid. to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. 9-26 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on { WARNING Transfer Case the transfer case, you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough When to Check and Change lubricant to raise the level to the Batteries have acid that can burn Lubricant you and gas that can explode. bottom of the filler plug hole. You can be badly hurt if you are Refer to the Maintenance Schedule A fluid loss could indicate a not careful. See Jump Starting on to determine how often to check the problem; check and have it page 9 74 for tips on working lubricant and when to change it. repaired, if needed. ‑ See Scheduled Maintenance on around a battery without page 10 2. What to Use getting hurt. ‑ Refer to the Maintenance Schedule How to Check Lubricant Infrequent Usage: Remove the to determine what kind of lubricant black, negative (−) cable from the to use. See Recommended Fluids battery to keep the battery from and Lubricants on page 10‑7. running down. Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. Vehicle Care 9-27

Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 8 40. { WARNING ‑ If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular When you are doing this position, contact your dealer/ brake immediately if the vehicle retailer for service. inspection, the vehicle could begins to move. move suddenly. If the vehicle Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the moves, you or others could be ignition to ON/RUN, but do not injured. Shift Lock Control start the engine. Without System Check applying the regular brake, try to 1. Before starting this check, be move the shift lever out of sure there is enough room { WARNING P (Park) with normal effort. If the around the vehicle. shift lever moves out of P (Park), 2. Firmly apply both the parking When you are doing this contact your dealer/retailer for brake and the regular brake. inspection, the vehicle could service. See Parking Brake on move suddenly. If the vehicle page 8‑40. moves, you or others could be Do not use the accelerator injured. pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it 1. Before starting this check, be starts. sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 9-28 Vehicle Care

Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set While parked, and with the parking the parking brake. { WARNING brake set, try to turn the ignition to . To check the parking brake's LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine position. When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in . The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake LOCK/OFF only when the shift and property could be damaged. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is lever is in P (Park). Make sure there is room in front held by the parking brake only. . The ignition key should come of the vehicle in case it begins to out only in LOCK/OFF. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: Contact your dealer/retailer if brake at once should the vehicle With the engine running, shift to service is required. begin to move. P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Vehicle Care 9-29

Wiper Blade Replacement Front Wiper Blade 3. Install the wiper blade connector Replacement by sliding into the end of the Windshield wiper blades should be wiper arm until the square button inspected for wear and cracking. To replace the front wiper blades: on the wiper blade clicks into See Scheduled Maintenance on 1. Lift the wiper arm from the place with the wiper arm. page 10‑2 for more information. windshield until no further 4. Place the wiper arm with the Replacement blades come in movement is possible. wiper blade in place back on the different types and are removed in windshield. different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 10‑9. Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any 2. Press the square button on the damage that occurs would not be top side, at the end of the wiper covered by your warranty. Do not arm, and pull the wiper blade out allow the wiper blade arm to of the end of the wiper arm. touch the windshield. 9-30 Vehicle Care

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement 5. Align the wiper blade with the arm and hold both ends of the To replace the rear wiper blade: arm while gently squeezing until 1. Lift the wiper arm from the the blade snaps into place. liftgate glass until no further Do not apply excessive force movement is possible. during this operation. 2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip with Reposition the blade in the arm one hand and hold the wiper and repeat, if blade is not blade at the tip with the correctly positioned. other hand. 6. Place the wiper arm with the 3. Pull down on the wiper blade. wiper blade attached back on The blade will pull away from 4. Place the wiper blade into the the liftgate glass. the arm. wiper arm aligning the blade attachment rivet with the arm attachment. Vehicle Care 9-31

Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should be properly . Should be fully assembled and prepared as follows. The vehicle: all other work stopped while The headlamp aiming system has headlamp aiming is being . Should be placed so the been preset at the factory. performed. headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) from If the vehicle is damaged in an a light colored wall. . Should be normally loaded with accident, the aim of the headlamps a full tank of fuel and one person . Must have all four tires on a may be affected and adjustment or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the level surface which is level all may be necessary. driver's seat. the way to the wall. It is recommended that a dealer/ . Tires should be properly inflated. . Should be placed so it is retailer adjust the headlamps. To perpendicular to the wall or other Headlamp aiming is done with the re-aim the headlamps yourself, use flat surface. vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The the following procedure. high-beam headlamps will be . Should not have any snow, ice, correctly aimed if the low-beam or mud on it. headlamps are aimed properly. 9-32 Vehicle Care

To adjust the vertical aim, do the Notice: Do not cover a headlamp following: to improve beam cut-off when 1. Open the hood. See Hood on aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up page 9‑5 for more information. which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp 4. At the wall measure from the being adjusted to be seen on the ground upward (A) to the flat surface. recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of on the wall the width of the the low‐beam headlamp. vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. 3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low‐beam headlamp. Record the distance. Vehicle Care 9-33

Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 9‑37. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer.

7. Locate the vertical headlamp 9. Make sure that the light from the aiming screws, which are under headlamp is positioned at the the hood near each headlamp bottom edge of the horizontal assembly. tape line. The lamp on the The adjustment screw can be left (A) shows the correct turned with a E8 Torx® socket. headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw headlamp aim. until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for line. Turn it clockwise or the opposite headlamp. counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam. 9-34 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front Turn To replace: 3. If replacing low/high headlamp 1. Turn the tire to reach the access bulb, remove the dust cover cap Signal, Sidemarker, and from the back of the headlamp Parking Lamps port cap located on front of wheel well cover. housing by turning the cap counterclockwise. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from lamp assembly. 5. Remove the bulb from the socket or disconnect bulb assembly from harness connector. 6. Install new bulb. 7. Reinstall the lamp socket to lamp assembly turning A. Low Beam Headlamp clockwise. A. Screw B. High Beam headlamp 8. Replace the dust cover cap on B. Access Port Cap headlamps. C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp 2. Remove screw (A) and turn 9. Reinstall the wheel well cover D. Side Marker Lamp access port cap (B) access port cap and secure by counterclockwise to remove. installing screw. Vehicle Care 9-35

Fog Lamps 4. Push the bulb socket into the To replace one of these lamps: fog lamp assembly and turn 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate To replace one of these bulbs: clockwise to lock it into place. (Manual) on page 1‑8 or 5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑9. electrical connector. Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps

1. Locate the fog lamp assembly under the front facia. A. Screw 2. Disconnect the bulb socket from the electrical connector, turn and B. Screw Cover pull out the bulb assembly. 2. Remove the two screw 3. Remove the old bulb from the covers (B) from the taillamp bulb socket and push the new assembly. bulb straight into the bulb socket A. Sidemarker 3. Remove the two screws (A) until it connects. B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/ securing the taillamp assembly. Taillamp 4. Pull taillamp assembly out of C. Back-up Lamp vehicle body. 9-36 Vehicle Care

5. Disconnect the lamp wiring License Plate Lamp harness. To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate partway. See Liftgate (Manual) on page 1‑8 or Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑9 for more information.

A. Bulb Socket B. Bulb C. Lamp Assembly 6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it out. 4. Turn the bulb socket (A) counterclockwise to remove from 7. Pull the bulb straight out of the lamp assembly (C). socket. 5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of 8. Install the new bulb. Passenger side shown, driver side similar the bulb socket. 9. Push the bulb socket in and turn it clockwise. 2. Push the left end of the lamp assembly towards the right. 10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 to reinstall lamp assembly. 3. Pull the lamp assembly down to remove from liftgate. Vehicle Care 9-37

6. Push the replacement bulb Replacement Bulbs Electrical System straight into the bulb socket Bulb and turn the bulb socket Exterior Lamp clockwise to install into lamp Number Fuses assembly. Back-Up Lamp 921 The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by 7. Turn the lamp assembly into the Fog Lamp Front H11 liftgate engaging the clip side fuses. This greatly reduces the Headlamp first. HB3 chance of damage caused by High Beam electrical problems. 8. Push on the lamp side opposite Headlamp Look at the silver-colored band the clip until the lamp assembly H11 snaps into place. Low Beam inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure License Plate Lamp W5WLL to replace a bad fuse with a new Parking Lamp/Turn one of the identical size and rating. T20 Signal Front There are two fuse blocks in the Sidemarker Front vehicle: one in the engine 194 and Rear compartment and one in the instrument panel. Taillamp/Turn Signal 3157K Lamp/Stop Lamp There is a fuse puller located in the engine compartment fuse block. For replacement bulbs not listed See Engine Compartment Fuse here, contact your dealer/retailer. Block on page 9‑38. It can be used to easily remove fuses from the fuse block. 9-38 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover, squeeze the clips on the cover and Engine Compartment Fuse Block lift it straight up. The vehicle may not be equipped J-Case Usage J-Case Usage with all of the fuses and relays Fuses Fuses shown. 1 Cool Fan 1 Memory Seat 5 Notice: Spilling liquid on any Module electrical components on the 2 Cool Fan 2 6 Power Seat Left vehicle may damage it. Always 3 Rear Defog – keep the covers on any electrical Instrument Panel Power 7 component. 4 Fuse Block 1 Windows – Right Vehicle Care 9-39

J-Case Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Fuses Engine Control 32 Horn 18 Instrument Panel Module Battery 8 Right High Beam Fuse Block 2 33 ‐ 19 Heated Mirror Headlamp 9 Starter 20 Trailer Left Left High Beam 34 ‐ 10 Brake Booster Headlamp 21 Lift Gate Module 11 Sunroof 35 Ignition Even Coil 22 Power Lumbar Antilock Brake 36 Ignition Odd Coil 12 23 Trailer Right System Pump 37 Windshield Washer 24 Canister Vent Instrument Panel 13 38 Front Fog Lamps Fuse Block 3 Memory Mirror 25 Module Post Catalytic Power 14 39 Converter Oxygen Windows Left Regulated Voltage – Sensor 26 Control Battery Antilock Brake 15 Sensor Engine Control System Module 40 Module Rear Accessory 27 Mini Fuses Usage Power Outlet Pre–Catalytic 41 Converter Oxygen 28 Wiper Transmission Sensor 16 Control Module 29 Rear Wiper Transmission Battery 42 Air Conditioning Control Module 30 17 Trailer Parking Light Compressor 43 Mirror 31 Rear Latch 9-40 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse Relays Chassis Control Block 44 Module Ignition 54 Rear Defogger 45 Spare 55 Cooling Fan Low 46 Rear Drive Module Head Lamp 56 High Beam Lift Gate Module 47 Logic 57 Cooling Fan Control Instrument Panel Wiper On/Off 48 58 Fuse Block Ignition Control 49 Heated Seat Front Air Conditioning – 59 Compressor Chassis Control 50 Module 60 Wiper Speed Engine Control 61 Fog Lamp The instrument panel fuse block is 51 Module located on the passenger side panel 62 Engine Control of the center console. To access the 52 Rear Vision Camera 63 Starter fuses, open the fuse panel door from the passenger side by pulling Midi Fuse Usage 64 Run/Crank it out. Electric Power To reinstall the door, insert the tabs 53 Mini Relays Usage Steering on the bottom of the door into the 65 Cooling Fan High console first, then push the door back into its original location. 66 Brake Booster Vehicle Care 9-41

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Mini Fuses Usage Noise Control 7 Module Body Control 8 Module 4 9 Radio 10 SEO Battery Ultrasonic Rear 11 Parking Aid Module Heater, Ventilation 12 and Air Conditioning Battery Auxiliary Power 13 Front

Instrument Panel Fuse Block Heater, Ventilation 14 and Air Conditioning Ignition Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage 15 Display 1 Steering Wheel DM Body Control 4 Body Control Module 1 16 2 Spare Module 5 5 Infotainment 3 Spare Auxiliary Body Control 17 6 Power Rear Module 7 9-42 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J‐Case Usage Fuses Instrument Panel 31 Amplifier 18 Cluster Ignition 29 Front Blower Motor Discrete Logic 32 19 PDI Module Ignition Switch Body Control 40 Module 8 Body Control Communications 20 33 Module 6 Integration Module Relays Usage SEO Retained Body Control 21 34 Accessory Power Module 2 41 LOG Relay Retained Accessory 22 SDM Ignition 35 SDM Battery 42 Power Relay 23 Spare Data Link 36 Connection 24 Spare Instrument Panel 25 PRNDL 37 Cluster Battery 26 Spare IOS Module 27 Spare 38 (Passenger Sensing 28 Spare System) 39 Spare Body Control 30 Module 3 Vehicle Care 9-43

Wheels and Tires { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Tires Poorly maintained and improperly . Overinflated tires are more used tires are dangerous. Your new vehicle comes with likely to be cut, punctured high-quality tires made by a . Overloading your tires can or broken by a sudden leading tire manufacturer. If you cause overheating as a result impact — such as when ever have questions about your of too much flexing. You you hit a pothole. Keep could have an air-out and a tire warranty and where to tires at the recommended serious accident. See Vehicle pressure. obtain service, see your vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24. Warranty booklet for details. For . Worn, old tires can cause additional information refer to . Underinflated tires pose the accidents. If your tread is the tire manufacturer. same danger as overloaded badly worn, or if your tires tires. The resulting accident have been damaged, could cause serious injury. replace them. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑50. (Continued) 9-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the Tire Identification Number “Tire Size” illustration later in this (TIN). The TIN shows the Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code, molded into its sidewall. The tire size, and date the tire was examples below show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is passenger vehicle tire and a molded onto both sides of the compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture. criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material: The type code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in GM's TPC specifications meet or the sidewall and under the tread. exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire (C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to Transportation): The grade tires based on three Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear, (DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance with resistance. For more information the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 9‑61 . combination of letters and Safety Standards. numbers used to define a (G) Maximum Cold Inflation particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to of Transportation) code is the support that load. Vehicle Care 9-45

regular road tire has lost air (E) Tire Inflation: The and gone flat. If your vehicle temporary use tire or compact has a compact spare tire, spare tire should be inflated to see Compact Spare Tire on 420 kPa (60 psi). For more page 9‑73 and If a Tire Goes Flat information on tire pressure and on page 9‑64 . inflation see Tire Pressure on (C) Tire Identification Number page 9‑50 . (TIN): The letters and numbers (F) Tire Size: A combination of following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a of Transportation) code is tire's width, height, aspect ratio, the Tire Identification Number construction type, and service Compact Spare Tire Example (TIN). The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the (A) Tire Ply Material: The type manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size of cord and number of plies in tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary the sidewall and under the tread. manufactured. The TIN is use only. molded onto both sides of the (B) Temporary Use Only: The (G) TPC Spec (Tire tire, although only one side may Performance Criteria compact spare tire or temporary have the date of manufacture. use tire has a tread life of Specification): Original approximately 5 000 km (D) Maximum Cold Inflation equipment tires designed to (3,000 miles) and should not be Load Limit: Maximum load that GM's specific tire performance driven at speeds over 105 km/h can be carried and the criteria have a TPC specification (65 mph). The compact spare maximum pressure needed to code molded onto the sidewall. tire is for emergency use when a support that load. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. 9-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. Tire Size width in millimeters from (F) Service Description: The following illustration shows sidewall to sidewall. These characters represent an example of a typical (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit the load index and speed rating passenger vehicle tire size. number that indicates the tire of the tire. The load index height‐to‐width measurements. represents the load carry For example, if the tire size capacity a tire is certified to aspect ratio is 60, as shown in carry. The speed rating is the item C of the illustration, it would maximum speed a tire is mean that the tire's sidewall is certified to carry a load. 60 percent as high as it is wide. (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: A The United States version of a letter code is used to indicate metric tire sizing system. The the type of ply construction in letter P as the first character in the tire. The letter R means the tire size means a passenger radial ply construction; the vehicle tire engineered to letter D means diagonal or bias standards set by the U.S. Tire ply construction; and the letter B and Rim Association. means belted‐bias ply construction. Vehicle Care 9-47

Tire Terminology and Belt: A rubber coated layer of Curb Weight: The weight of a Definitions cords that is located between motor vehicle with standard and the plies and the tread. Cords optional equipment including the Air Pressure: The amount of may be made from steel or other maximum capacity of fuel, oil, air inside the tire pressing reinforcing materials. and coolant, but without outward on each square inch passengers and cargo. of the tire. Air pressure is Bead: The tire bead contains expressed in psi (pounds per steel wires wrapped by steel DOT Markings: A code molded square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). cords that hold the tire onto into the sidewall of a tire the rim. signifying that the tire is in Accessory Weight: This Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire compliance with the U.S. means the combined weight Department of Transportation of optional accessories. in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than (DOT) motor vehicle safety Some examples of optional standards. The DOT code accessories are, automatic 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. includes the Tire Identification transmission, power steering, Number (TIN), an alphanumeric power brakes, power windows, Cold Tire Pressure: The designator which can also power seats, and air amount of air pressure in a tire, identify the tire manufacturer, conditioning. measured in psi (pounds per production plant, brand, and Aspect Ratio: The relationship square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) date of production. of a tire's height to its width. before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑50 . on page 8‑24 . 9-48 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces page 8‑24 . The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or page 8‑24 . maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. model name molding that is Intended Outboard Sidewall: higher or deeper than the same The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire. when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Kilopascal (kPa): The metric vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. tire used on passenger cars and unit for air pressure. some light duty trucks and Normal Occupant Weight: The Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: multipurpose vehicles. number of occupants a vehicle A tire used on light duty trucks Recommended Inflation and some multipurpose is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Pressure: Vehicle passenger vehicles. manufacturer's recommended Load Limits on page 8‑24 . Load Index: An assigned tire inflation pressure as shown number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution: on the tire placard. See Tire that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 9‑50 and carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24 . Vehicle Care 9-49

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by 90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 8‑24 . and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 9‑58 . Vehicle Maximum Load on the are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): due to curb weight, accessory between the tread and the bead. A tire information system that weight, occupant weight, and provides consumers with cargo weight. Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction, Vehicle Placard: A label alphanumeric code assigned temperature, and treadwear. to a tire indicating the maximum permanently attached to a Ratings are determined by vehicle showing the vehicle's speed at which a tire can tire manufacturers using operate. capacity weight and the original government testing procedures. equipment tire size and Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the recommended inflation pressure. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform the tire and the road surface. See “Tire and Loading Tire Quality Grading on The amount of grip provided. Information Label” under Vehicle page 9‑61 . Tread: The portion of a tire that Load Limits on page 8‑24 . comes into contact with the road. 9-50 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information (over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight Tires need the correct amount of the following: your vehicle can carry, and an air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading . Unusual wear effectively. Information label, see Vehicle Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 8‑24 . How you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride you load your vehicle affects over inflation is all right. It is vehicle handling and ride ‐ . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle road hazards enough air (under‐inflation), with more weight than it was you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and designed to carry. Loading Information label is . Too much flexing attached to your vehicle. This When to Check . Too much heat label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the . Premature or your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact irregular wear The recommended cold tire spare should be at 60 psi . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on carrying capacity. page 9‑73 . Vehicle Care 9-51

How to Check If the cold tire inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Use a good quality pocket-type matches the recommended System gage to check tire pressure. pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no The Tire Pressure Monitor System You cannot tell if your tires (TPMS) uses radio and sensor are properly inflated simply by further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, technology to check tire pressure looking at them. Radial tires may levels. The TPMS sensors monitor look properly inflated even when add air until you reach the the air pressure in your vehicle's recommended amount. they are under‐inflated. Check tires and transmit tire pressure the tire's inflation pressure when If you overfill the tire, release air readings to a receiver located in the the tires are cold. Cold means by pushing on the metal stem vehicle. your vehicle has been sitting for in the center of the tire valve. Each tire, including the spare at least three hours or driven no Re‐check the tire pressure with (if provided), should be checked more than 1.6 km (1 mile). the tire gage. monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended Remove the valve cap from the Be sure to put the valve caps by the vehicle manufacturer on the tire valve stem. Press the tire back on the valve stems. They vehicle placard or tire inflation gage firmly onto the valve to help prevent leaks by keeping pressure label. (If your vehicle has get a pressure measurement. out dirt and moisture. tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 9-52 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to (TPMS) that illuminates a low system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or tire pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow the more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure TPMS to continue to function under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly. Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor approximately one minute and then pressure telltale illuminates, you Operation on page 9‑53 for should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information. soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications long as the malfunction exists. significantly under‐inflated tire Commission (FCC) and causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is Industry and Science Canada lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be See Radio Frequency Statement on also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire page 12‑16 for information tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC) ability. of reasons, including the installation Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or and Science Canada. not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Vehicle Care 9-53

Tire Pressure Monitor At the same time a message to See Vehicle Load Limits on check the pressure in a specific tire page 8‑24, for an example of the Operation appears on the Driver Information Tire and Loading Information label This vehicle may have a Tire Center (DIC) display. The low tire and its location on your vehicle. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). pressure warning light and the DIC Also see Tire Pressure on The TPMS is designed to warn the warning message come on at each page 9‑50. driver when a low tire pressure ignition cycle until the tires are Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you condition exists. TPMS sensors are inflated to the correct inflation about a low tire pressure condition mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure. Using the DIC, tire but it does not replace normal tire assembly, excluding the spare tire pressure levels can be viewed by maintenance. See Tire Inspection and wheel assembly. The TPMS the driver. For additional information on page 9‑56, Tire Rotation on sensors monitor the air pressure in and details about the DIC operation page 9‑56 and Tires on page 9‑43. the vehicle's tires and transmit the and displays see Driver Information tire pressure readings to a receiver Center (DIC) on page 4‑27. Notice: Liquid tire sealants could located in the vehicle. damage the Tire Pressure Monitor The low tire pressure warning light System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor may come on in cool weather when damage caused by using a tire the vehicle is first started, and then sealant is not covered by your turn off as you start to drive. This warranty. Do not use liquid tire could be an early indicator that the sealants. air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates A Tire and Loading Information the low tire pressure warning light label, attached to your vehicle, located on the instrument panel shows the size of your vehicle's cluster. original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are cold. 9-54 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do Message process was started but not not match your vehicle's original completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message recommended for your vehicle are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is New Tires on page 9‑58. about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See . for the remainder of the ignition Operating electronic devices or “TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. also displayed. The low tire warning wave frequencies similar to the . light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS could cause the TPMS come on at each ignition cycle until missing or damaged. The DIC sensors to malfunction. the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS If the TPMS is not functioning it the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off cannot detect or signal a low tire malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are condition. See your dealer/retailer to come on are: installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction matching process is performed light and DIC message comes on . One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer/ and stays on. replaced with the spare tire. The retailer for service. spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re‐install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. Vehicle Care 9-55

TPMS Sensor Matching tire's air pressure, do not exceed The TPMS sensor matching process Process the maximum inflation pressure is outlined below: indicated on the tire's sidewall. Each TPMS sensor has a unique 1. Set the parking brake. identification code. Any time you To decrease air-pressure out of a 2. Turn the ignition switch to rotate your vehicle's tires or replace tire you can use the pointed end of ON/RUN with the engine off. one or more of the TPMS sensors, the valve cap, a pencil-style air the identification codes will need to pressure gage, or a key. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry be matched to the new tire/wheel (RKE) transmitter's lock and You have two minutes to match unlock buttons at the same time position. The sensors are matched the first tire/wheel position, and to the tire/wheel positions in the for approximately five seconds. five minutes overall to match all four The horn sounds twice to signal following order: driver side front tire, tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer passenger side front tire, passenger the receiver is in relearn mode than two minutes, to match the first and Tire Learning Active side rear tire, and driver side rear tire and wheel, or more than tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. message displays on the DIC five minutes to match all four tire screen. See your dealer/retailer for service. and wheel positions the matching The TPMS sensors can also be process stops and you need to 4. Start with the driver side matched to each tire/wheel position start over. front tire. by increasing or decreasing the tire's air pressure. If increasing the 9-56 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the valve cap from the 8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection valve cap stem. Activate the tire, and repeat the procedure TPMS sensor by increasing or in Step 5. The horn sounds We recommend that you decreasing the tire's air pressure two times to indicate the sensor regularly inspect your vehicle's for five seconds, or until a identification code has been tires, including the spare tire, horn chirp sounds. The horn matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs chirp, which may take up to tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage. See When It 30 seconds to sound, confirms matching process is no longer Is Time for New Tires on that the sensor identification active. The Tire Learning Active page 9‑58 for more information. code has been matched to this message on the DIC display tire and wheel position. screen goes off. Tire Rotation 6. Proceed to the passenger side 9. Turn the ignition switch to front tire, and repeat the LOCK/OFF. Tires should be rotated every procedure in Step 5. 8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to 10. Set all four tires to the 8,000 miles). See Scheduled 7. Proceed to the passenger side recommended air pressure rear tire, and repeat the level as indicated on the Tire Maintenance on page 10‑2 . procedure in Step 5. and Loading Information label. The purpose of a regular tire 11. Put the valve caps back on the rotation is to achieve a uniform valve stems. wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. Vehicle Care 9-57

Any time you notice unusual Do not include the compact wear, rotate the tires as soon as spare tire in the tire rotation. { WARNING possible and check wheel After the tires have been Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the alignment. Also check for rotated, adjust the front and rear parts to which it is fastened, can damaged tires or wheels. See inflation pressures as shown on make wheel nuts become loose When It Is Time for New Tires the Tire and Loading Information after time. The wheel could come on page 9‑58 and Wheel label. See Tire Pressure on off and cause an accident. When Replacement on page 9 63 . ‑ page 9‑50 and Vehicle Load changing a wheel, remove any Limits on page 8‑24 . rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor an emergency, use a cloth or a System. See Tire Pressure paper towel to do this; but be sure Monitor Operation on page 9‑53 . to use a scraper or wire brush Make certain that all wheel nuts later, if needed, to get all the rust are properly tightened. See or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 9 64. “Wheel Nut Torque” under ‑ Capacities and Specifications on page 11‑2 .

When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. 9-58 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any wear out before they degrade due to of the following statements are true: age. If you are unsure about the Tires need to replace the tires as they get . You can see the indicators at Various factors, such as three or more places around older, consult the tire manufacturer maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. for more information. speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric Buying New Tires new tires. showing through the tire's rubber. GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. . The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to The original equipment tires show cord or fabric. installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to . The tire has a bump, bulge, meet General Motors Tire or split. Performance Criteria . The tire has a puncture, cut, Specification (TPC Spec) or other damage that cannot be system rating. If you need repaired well because of the size replacement tires, GM strongly or location of the damage. recommends that you get tires The rubber in tires degrades over with the same TPC Spec rating. time. This is also true for the spare One way to tell when it is time for This way, your vehicle will tire, if the vehicle has one, even continue to have tires that are new tires is to check the treadwear if it is not being used. Multiple indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this aging designed to give the same tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or takes place, including temperatures, performance and vehicle safety, less of tread remaining. loading conditions, and inflation during normal use, as the pressure maintenance. With proper original tires. care and maintenance tires typically Vehicle Care 9-59

GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 9‑56 { WARNING system considers over a and Tire Rotation on page 9‑56 dozen critical specifications that for information on proper tire If you use bias-ply tires on the impact the overall performance rotation. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges of your vehicle, including brake could develop cracks after system performance, ride and { WARNING many miles of driving. A tire handling, traction control, and Mixing tires could cause you and/or wheel could fail tire pressure monitoring suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM's TPC Spec to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different Use only radial-ply tires with number is molded onto the tire's the wheels on the vehicle. sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types (radial tires have an all‐season tread and bias-belted tires), the If you must replace your design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle vehicle's tires with those that do will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have not have a TPC Spec number, mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different make sure they are the same Sidewall Labeling on page 9‑44 sizes, brands, or types may size, load range, speed rating, for additional information. also cause damage to your and construction type (radial and vehicle. Be sure to use the GM recommends replacing tires bias‐belted tires) as your correct size, brand, and type vehicle's original tires. in sets of four. This is because of tires on all wheels. It is uniform tread depth on all tires all right to drive with your will help keep your vehicle compact spare temporarily, as performing most like it did when it was developed for use on the tires were new. Replacing your vehicle. See Compact less than a full set of tires can Spare Tire on page 9‑73 . affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. 9-60 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and { WARNING pressure monitoring system Wheels could give an inaccurate If you add different sized low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not Spec rated tires are installed provide an acceptable level of on your vehicle. Non TPC equipment wheels and tires, this ‐ could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not Spec rated tires may give a performs, including its braking, ride recommended for those wheels low‐pressure warning that is and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase higher or lower than the proper stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and warning level you would get with Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire electronic systems such as anti‐lock specific wheel and tire systems Pressure Monitor System on brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and page 9‑51 . control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a control, the performance of these GM certified technician. Your vehicle's original systems can be affected. equipment tires are listed on See Buying New Tires on the Tire and Loading Information page 9‑58 and Accessories and Label. See Vehicle Load Limits Modifications on page 9‑3 for on page 8‑24 , for more additional information. information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle. Vehicle Care 9-61

Uniform Tire Quality most passenger car tires. The Treadwear Grading Uniform Tire Quality Grading The treadwear grade is a (UTQG) system does not apply Quality grades can be found comparative rating based on the to deep tread, winter-type snow wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire tires, space-saver, or temporary sidewall between tread shoulder under controlled conditions on use spare tires, tires with a specified government test and maximum section width. For nominal rim diameters of example: course. For example, a tire 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches), graded 150 would wear one and Treadwear 200 Traction AA or to some limited-production a half (1.5) times as well on the Temperature A tires. government course as a tire The following information relates While the tires available on graded 100. The relative to the system developed by the General Motors passenger cars performance of tires depends United States National Highway and light trucks may vary with upon the actual conditions of Traffic Safety Administration respect to these grades, they their use, however, and may (NHTSA), which grades tires must also conform to federal depart significantly from the by treadwear, traction, and safety requirements and norm due to variations in temperature performance. This additional General Motors Tire driving habits, service practices, applies only to vehicles sold in Performance Criteria (TPC) and differences in road the United States. The grades standards. characteristics and climate. are molded on the sidewalls of 9-62 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C material of the tire to degenerate Wheel Alignment and Tire The traction grades, from and reduce tire life, and Balance highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The The tires and wheels on the vehicle and C. Those grades represent were aligned and balanced carefully the tire's ability to stop on wet grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all at the factory to give the longest tire pavement as measured under life and best overall performance. controlled conditions on passenger car tires must meet Adjustments to wheel alignment and specified government test under the Federal Motor Vehicle tire balancing will not be necessary surfaces of asphalt and Safety Standard No. 109. on a regular basis. However, if there concrete. A tire marked C may Grades B and A represent is unusual tire wear or the vehicle have poor traction performance. higher levels of performance on pulls to one side or the other, the the laboratory test wheel than alignment should be checked. If the Temperature – A, B, C the minimum required by law. vehicle vibrates when driving on a It should be noted that the smooth road, the tires and wheels The temperature grades are might need to be rebalanced. See A (the highest), B, and C, temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is your dealer/retailer for proper representing the tire's resistance diagnosis. to the generation of heat and its properly inflated and not ability to dissipate heat when overloaded. Excessive speed, tested under controlled underinflation, or excessive conditions on a specified indoor loading, either separately or in laboratory test wheel. Sustained combination, can cause heat high temperature can cause the buildup and possible tire failure. Vehicle Care 9-63

Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels { WARNING Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Putting a used wheel on the loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts on your vehicle can be vehicle is dangerous. You cannot wheel nuts should be replaced. dangerous. It could affect the know how it has been used or If the wheel leaks air, replace it braking and handling of your how far it has been driven. (except some aluminum wheels, vehicle, make your tires lose air It could fail suddenly and cause a which can sometimes be repaired). and make you lose control. You crash. If you have to replace a See your dealer/retailer if any of could have a collision in which wheel, use a new GM original these conditions exist. you or others could be injured. equipment wheel. Your dealer/retailer will know the Always use the correct wheel, kind of wheel you need. wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for Each new wheel should have the replacement. same load-carrying capacity, Notice: The wrong wheel can diameter, width, offset, and be also cause problems with bearing mounted the same way as the one it life, brake cooling, speedometer replaces. or odometer calibration, If you need to replace any of the headlamp aim, bumper height, wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or Tire Pressure Monitor System or tire chain clearance to the (TPMS) sensors, replace them only body and chassis. with new GM original equipment See If a Tire Goes Flat on parts. This way, you will be sure to page 9 64 for more information. have the right wheel, wheel bolts, ‑ wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for the vehicle. 9-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains A rear blowout, particularly on a WARNING (Continued) curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction { WARNING vehicle's wheels. If you do find you would use in a skid. In any rear traction devices that will fit, install Do not use tire chains. There is blowout remove your foot from the them on the front tires. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle not enough clearance. Tire chains under control by steering the way used on a vehicle without the If a Tire Goes Flat you want the vehicle to go. It may proper amount of clearance can be very bumpy and noisy, but you cause damage to the brakes, It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if can still steer. Gently brake to a suspension or other vehicle parts. stop, well off the road if possible. The area damaged by the tire you maintain your vehicle's tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is chains could cause you to lose { WARNING control of the vehicle and you or much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a others may be injured in a crash. blowout, here are a few tips about Lifting a vehicle and getting Use another type of traction what to expect and what to do: under it to do maintenance or device only if its manufacturer repairs is dangerous without the If a front tire fails, the flat tire appropriate safety equipment and recommends it for use on the creates a drag that pulls the vehicle training. If a jack is provided with vehicle and tire size combination toward that side. Take your foot off the vehicle, it is designed only for and road conditions. Follow that the accelerator pedal and grip the manufacturer's instructions. To steering wheel firmly. Steer to changing a flat tire. If it is used for help avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain lane position, and then anything else, you or others could drive slowly, readjust or remove gently brake to a stop well out of the be badly injured or killed if the the device if it is contacting the traffic lane. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack vehicle, and do not spin the is provided with the vehicle, only (Continued) use it for changing a flat tire. Vehicle Care 9-65

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly WARNING (Continued) to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard 3. Turn off the engine and do Warning Flashers on page 5‑2. not restart while the vehicle is raised. { WARNING 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip To be certain the vehicle will not off the jack and roll over or fall on move, put blocks at the front and you or other people. You and they rear of the tire farthest away from could be badly injured or even the one being changed. That A. Wheel Block killed. Find a level place to would be the tire on the other B. Flat Tire change your tire. To help prevent side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. The following information explains the vehicle from moving: how to repair or change a tire. 1. Set the parking brake firmly. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), 2. Put an automatic use the following example as a transmission shift lever in guide to assist you in the placement P (Park), or shift a manual of wheel blocks (A). transmission to 1 (First) or R (Reverse). (Continued) 9-66 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes To access the spare tire and tools: Flat on page 9‑64 for more 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate information. (Manual) on page 1‑8 or 2. For vehicles with wheel nut Liftgate (Power) on page 1‑9. caps, turn the wheel wrench 2. Lift the load floor up. counterclockwise to loosen and remove them. Do not try to remove plastic caps 4. Turn the retainer nut from the cover or center cap. counterclockwise and remove the spare tire. 3. For vehicles with a wheel cover or center cap, pull the cover or 5. Place the spare tire next to the center cap away from the wheel tire being changed. to remove it. Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

3. Remove the extension (A), wheel wrench (B) and jack (C). Place the tools next to the tire being changed. Vehicle Care 9-67

Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the correct position or you may damage your vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

4. Turn the wheel wrench Rear counterclockwise to loosen all 6. Position the jack lift head at the the wheel nuts, but do not jack location nearest the flat tire. remove them yet. The location is indicated by a 5. Place the jack near the flat tire. mark on the bottom edge of the Front front and rear door plastic molding. The jack must not be used in any other position. 9-68 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

Place the jack notch (A) under 8. Fit the jack handle extension the frame rail seam (B). { WARNING onto the jack by sliding the hook through the end of the jack. 7. Put the compact spare tire Lifting a vehicle and getting near you. under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the { WARNING appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with Getting under a vehicle when it is the vehicle, it is designed only for jacked up is dangerous. If the changing a flat tire. If it is used for vehicle slips off the jack, you anything else, you or others could could be badly injured or killed. be badly injured or killed if the Never get under a vehicle when it vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is supported only by a jack. is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. Vehicle Care 9-69

9. Insert the other end of the jack 10. Place the jack under the 11. Raise the vehicle by turning the handle into the wrench. vehicle. jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the road tire to clear the ground. 9-70 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

paper towel to do this; but be sure Never use oil or grease on bolts to use a scraper or wire brush or nuts because the nuts might later, if needed, to get all the rust come loose. The vehicle's wheel or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat could fall off, causing a crash. on page 9‑64. 16. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. 12. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 17. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle 13. Remove the flat tire. counterclockwise.

{ WARNING { WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Wheel nuts that are improperly or parts to which it is fastened, can incorrectly tightened can cause make wheel nuts become loose the wheels to become loose or after time. The wheel could come 14. Remove any rust or dirt from come off. The wheel nuts should off and cause an accident. When be tightened with a torque wrench changing a wheel, remove any the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. to the proper torque specification rust or dirt from places where the after replacing. Follow the torque 15. Place the compact spare tire wheel attaches to the vehicle. In specification supplied by the an emergency, use a cloth or a on the wheel-mounting surface. (Continued) (Continued) Vehicle Care 9-71

When reinstalling the wheel cover or WARNING (Continued) center cap on the full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand aftermarket manufacturer when snug with the aid of the wheel using accessory locking wheel wrench and tighten them with the nuts. See Capacities and wheel wrench an additional one‐ Specifications on page 11‑2 for quarter of a turn. original equipment wheel nut torque specifications. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's compact spare. Notice: Improperly tightened If you try to put a wheel cover on wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or pulsation and rotor damage. To the spare could be damaged. 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in avoid expensive brake repairs, a crisscross sequence, as evenly tighten the wheel nuts in shown. the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See 19. Lower the jack all the way and Capacities and Specifications on remove the jack from under the page 11‑2 for the wheel nut vehicle. torque specification. 20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench. 9-72 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat tire: 3. Put the flat tire in the rear and Tools storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the { WARNING vehicle.

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

1. Remove the cable package. The cable is stored in a plastic bag under the compact spare tire. 2. Remove the small center cap by 4. Pull the cable (A) through the tapping the back of the cap with door striker (D) then the center the extension of the shaft, if the of the wheel (C). vehicle has aluminum wheels. Vehicle Care 9-73

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling. This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at a time.

5. Hook the cable onto the outside 8. Make sure the metal tube is If this vehicle has a compact spare portion of the liftgate hinges (B). centered at the striker. Push the tire it was fully inflated when the 6. Hook the other end of the cable tube toward the front of the vehicle was new, however, it can onto the outside portion of the vehicle. lose air after a time. Check the liftgate hinge on the other side of 9. Close the liftgate and make sure inflation pressure regularly. It should the vehicle. it is latched properly. be 420 kPa (60 psi). 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it The compact spare is for temporary After installing the compact spare is secure. use only. Replace the compact on the vehicle, stop as soon as spare tire with a full-size tire as possible and make sure the spare soon as you can. tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 105 km/h (65 mph) for distances up to 5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your 9-74 Vehicle Care convenience. Of course, it is best to Jump Starting replace the spare with a full-size tire { WARNING as soon as possible. The spare tire Jump starting can be used on will last longer and be in good vehicles with run‐down batteries by Using an open flame near a shape in case it is needed again. using jumper cables and another battery can cause battery gas to vehicle. explode. People have been hurt Notice: When the compact doing this, and some have been spare is installed, do not take { WARNING blinded. Use a flashlight if you the vehicle through an automatic need more light. car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on Batteries can hurt you. They can Be sure the battery has enough the rails which can damage the be dangerous because: water. You do not need to add tire, wheel and other parts of the . They contain acid that can water to the battery installed in vehicle. burn you. your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right Do not use the compact spare on . They contain gas that can other vehicles. explode or ignite. amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that Do not mix the compact spare tire or . They contain enough first. If you do not, explosive gas wheel with other wheels or tires. electricity to burn you. could be present. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. If you do not follow these steps Battery fluid contains acid that exactly, some or all of these can burn you. Do not get it on Notice: Tire chains will not fit the things can hurt you. compact spare. Using them can you. If you accidentally get it in damage the vehicle and can your eyes or on your skin, flush damage the chains too. Do not the place with water and get use tire chains on the compact medical help immediately. spare. Vehicle Care 9-75

Be sure to use the following steps to Notice: If the jumper cables are 2. The vehicles should be close do it safely. Ignoring these steps connected or removed in the enough for the jumper cables to could result in costly damage to the wrong order, electrical shorting reach, but the vehicles should vehicle that would not be covered may occur and damage the not be touching. Touching could by the warranty. vehicle. The repairs would not be cause grounding and possible Trying to start the vehicle by covered by the vehicle warranty. electrical system damage. pushing or pulling it will not work, Always connect and remove the Put both vehicles in P (Park) and it could damage the vehicle. jumper cables in the correct and set the parking brake firmly. order, making sure that the Notice: If you leave the radio or cables do not touch each other or 3. Unplug accessories plugged into other accessories on during the other metal. the cigarette lighter or the jump starting procedure, they accessory power outlet. Turn off could be damaged. The repairs 1. The vehicle used to jump start the radio and all lamps that are would not be covered by the must have 12-volt battery with a not needed. Turn off the ignition warranty. Always turn off the negative ground. on both vehicles. radio and other accessories when Notice: If the other vehicle's jump starting the vehicle. system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. 9-76 Vehicle Care

4. Locate the positive (+) and 5. The remote positive (+) 8. Do not let the other end negative (−) terminals on both terminal (A) is located on the touch metal. Connect it to vehicles. Some vehicles have underhood fuse block, on the the positive (+) terminal of the remote jump starting terminals. driver side. Lift the red cap to good battery. Use a remote uncover the terminal. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle The remote negative (−) has one. terminal (B) is a stud behind the 9. Connect the black negative (−) metal tab stamped with GND (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal near the driver side strut tower. of the good battery. Use a 6. The jumper cables should be in remote negative (−) terminal if good working condition with no the vehicle has one. loose or missing insulation. The Do not let the other end touch vehicles could be damaged if anything until the next step. The they are not. other end of the negative (−) 7. Connect the red positive (+) cable does not go to the dead cable to the positive (+) terminal battery. It goes to a heavy, on the vehicle with the dead unpainted metal engine part or { WARNING battery. Use a remote to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead An electric fan can start up even positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. battery. when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Vehicle Care 9-77

10. Connect the other end of the To disconnect the jumper cables negative (−) cable away from from both vehicles: the dead battery, but not near 1. Disconnect the black engine parts that move. negative (−) cable from the 11. Start the vehicle with the good vehicle that had the dead battery and run the engine. battery. 12. Press the unlock symbol on 2. Disconnect the black the remote keyless entry negative (−) cable from the transmitter to disarm the vehicle with the good battery. security system, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) 13. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle with the the dead battery. If it will not Jumper Cable Removal good battery. start after a few tries, it needs A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) service. Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle. Notice: If the jumper cables are Terminal 5. Return the underhood fuse block connected or removed in the B. Good Battery or Remote cover to its original position, wrong order, electrical shorting Positive (+) and Remote if applicable. may occur and damage the Negative (−) Terminals vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. C. Dead Battery or Remote Always connect and remove the Positive (+) Terminal jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. 9-78 Vehicle Care

Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Towing consider before recreational vehicle Towing the Vehicle towing: Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity To avoid damage, the disabled towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? Be vehicle should be towed with all vehicle – such as behind a sure to read the tow four wheels off the ground. Consult motorhome. The two most common vehicle manufacturer's your dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations. towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and vehicle must be towed. See dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be Roadside Assistance Program on towing the vehicle with all four travelled? Some vehicles have page 12‑6. wheels on the ground. Dolly towing restrictions on how far and how is towing the vehicle with two long they can tow. To tow the vehicle behind wheels on the ground and two . another vehicle for recreational Is the proper towing equipment wheels up on a device known as a purposes such as behind a going to be used? See your — dolly. motorhome, see Recreational dealer/retailer or trailering Vehicle Towing following. professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. . Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. Vehicle Care 9-79

Dinghy Towing 4. Turn all accessories off. Front-wheel‐drive and 5. To prevent the battery from all-wheel-drive vehicles may be draining while the vehicle is dinghy towed from the front. These being towed, remove fuse 32, vehicles can also be towed by the Discrete Logic Ignition placing them on a platform trailer Switch fuse, from the instrument with all four wheels off of the panel fuse block and store it in a ground. For other towing options, safe location. See Instrument see “Dolly Towing” following in this Panel Fuse Block on page 9‑40. section. Notice: If the vehicle is towed For vehicles being dinghy towed, without performing each of the steps listed under Dinghy the vehicle should be run at the To tow the vehicle from the front “ Towing, the automatic beginning of each day and at each with all four wheels on the ground: ” RV fuel stop for about five minutes. transmission could be damaged. This will ensure proper lubrication of 1. Position the vehicle that will be Be sure to follow all steps of the transmission components. towed and secure it to the dinghy towing procedure prior to towing vehicle. and after towing the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition key to Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is ACC/ACCESSORY. exceeded while towing the 3. Shift the transmission to vehicle, it could be damaged. N (Neutral). Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle. 9-80 Vehicle Care

Once the destination has been Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with Dolly Towing reached: the front drive wheels on the (Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles) 1. Set the parking brake. ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with 2. Shift the transmission to two different tire sizes on the P (Park). front of the vehicle can cause 3. Turn the ignition key to severe damage to the LOCK/OFF. transmission. 4. Install fuse 32, the Discrete Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive Logic Ignition Switch fuse. See Vehicles) Instrument Panel Fuse Block on All-wheel drive vehicles should not page 9 40. ‐ ‑ be towed with two wheels on the 5. Start the engine and let it idle for ground. To properly tow these more than three minutes before vehicles, they should be placed on driving the vehicle. a platform trailer with all four wheels To tow the vehicle from the front Notice: Too much or too off of the ground or dinghy towed with the rear wheels on the ground, little fluid can damage the from the front. do the following: transmission. Be sure that the 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. transmission fluid is at the proper level before towing with all four 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). wheels on the ground. 3. Set the parking brake. Vehicle Care 9-81

4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Appearance Care 5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's instructions for preparing the Exterior Care vehicle and dolly for towing. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ 6. Release the parking brake. Lenses Towing the Vehicle From Use only lukewarm or cold water, a the Rear soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing the Vehicle” later in this section. Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, Finish Care repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. 9-82 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are Washing the Vehicle clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and To preserve the vehicle's finish, gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their keep it clean by washing it often. colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep Do not wash the vehicle in non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered direct sunlight and use a car basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. washing soap. Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Certain cleaners contain aggressive polishing on a Parts chemicals that can damage the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish emblems or nameplates on the Bright metal parts should be may damage it. Use only vehicle. Check the cleaning cleaned regularly to keep their non-abrasive waxes and polishes product label. If it states that it luster. Wash with water or use that are made for a basecoat/ should not be used on plastic chrome polish on chrome or clearcoat paint finish on the parts, do not use it on the vehicle stainless steel trim, if necessary. vehicle. or damage may occur and it Use special care with aluminum would not be covered by the Foreign materials such as calcium warranty. chloride and other salts, ice melting trim. To avoid damaging protective agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, trim, never use auto or chrome Do not use cleaning agents that are bird droppings, chemicals from polish, steam or caustic soap to petroleum based or that contain industrial chimneys, etc., can clean aluminum. A coating of acid or abrasives, as they can damage the vehicle's finish if they wax, rubbed to high polish, is damage the paint, metal or plastic remain on painted surfaces. Wash recommended for all bright metal on the vehicle. Approved cleaning parts. the vehicle as soon as possible. products can be obtained from If necessary, use non-abrasive your dealer/retailer. Follow all cleaners that are marked safe for manufacturer directions regarding painted surfaces to remove foreign correct product usage, necessary matter. Vehicle Care 9-83 safety precautions and appropriate Weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other disposal of any vehicle care chrome trim may be damaged if Silicone grease on weatherstrips will product. the vehicle is not washed after make them last longer, seal better, driving on roads that have been Rinse the vehicle well, before and not stick or squeak. Apply sprayed with magnesium, calcium washing and after to remove all silicone grease with a clean cloth. or sodium chloride. These cleaning agents completely. If they During very cold, damp weather chlorides are used on roads for are allowed to dry on the surface, frequent application may be conditions such as ice and dust. they could stain. required. See Recommended Fluids Always wash the vehicle's and Lubricants on page 10 7. Dry the finish with a soft, clean ‑ chrome with soap and water after chamois or an all-cotton towel to Wheels and Trim — Aluminum exposure. avoid surface scratches and water or Chrome spotting. Notice: Using strong soaps, The vehicle may have either chemicals, abrasive polishes, High pressure car washes could aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners cause water to enter the vehicle. that contain acid on aluminum or Avoid using high pressure washes Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels, could closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the clean cloth with mild soap and damage the surface of the surface of the vehicle. Use of power water. Rinse with clean water. After wheel(s). The repairs would not washers exceeding 8,274 kPa rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft be covered by the vehicle (1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean towel. A wax may then be warranty. Use only approved removal of paint and decals. applied. cleaners on aluminum or Notice: Conveyor systems on chrome-plated wheels. some automatic car washes could The surface of these wheels is damage the vehicle. There may similar to the painted surface of the not be enough clearance for the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, undercarriage. Check with the car chemicals, abrasive polishes, wash manager before using the abrasive cleaners, cleaners with automatic car wash. acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes 9-84 Vehicle Care on them because the surface could Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires be damaged. Do not use chrome Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to polish on aluminum wheels. with glass cleaner. clean the tires. Notice: Using chrome polish on Clean the rubber blades using a lint Notice: Using petroleum-based aluminum wheels could damage free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the the wheels. The repairs would with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint not be covered by the vehicle mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying warranty. Use chrome polish on thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome wheels only. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted Use chrome polish only on a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. chrome-plated wheels, but avoid treatments may cause wiper any painted surface of the wheel, streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage and buff off immediately after if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and application. Wipers can be damaged by: requires sheet metal repair or Notice: Driving the vehicle replacement, make sure the body . Extreme dusty conditions through an automatic car wash repair shop applies anti-corrosion that has silicone carbide tire . Sand and salt material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion cleaning brushes, could damage . Heat and sun the aluminum or chrome-plated protection. . wheels. The repairs would not be Snow and ice, without proper Original manufacturer replacement covered by the vehicle warranty. removal parts will provide the corrosion Never drive a vehicle that has protection while maintaining the aluminum or chrome-plated vehicle warranty. wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Vehicle Care 9-85

Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these Interior Care materials from the underbody with Any stone chips, fractures or deep plain water. Clean any areas where The vehicle's interior will continue to scratches in the finish should be mud and debris can collect. Dirt look its best if it is cleaned often. repaired right away. Bare metal will packed in close areas of the frame Dust and dirt can accumulate on the corrode quickly and may develop should be loosened before being upholstery and cause damage to into major repair expense. flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be repaired with touch-up materials do this. removed quickly as extreme heat available from your dealer/retailer. could cause them to set rapidly. Chemical Paint Spotting Larger areas of finish damage can Lighter colored interiors may be corrected in your dealer's/ Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. retailer's body and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can Underbody Maintenance fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior. removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Remove dust from small buttons on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular and knobs with a small brush with removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint soft bristles. develop on the underbody parts surface. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. 9-86 Vehicle Care

Your dealer/retailer has products for Cleaners can contain solvents that . Never apply heavy pressure or cleaning the vehicle's interior. When can become concentrated in the rub aggressively with a cleaning cleaning the vehicle's interior, only vehicle's interior. Before using cloth. Use of heavy pressure can use cleaners specifically designed cleaners, read and adhere to all damage the interior and does for the surfaces that are being safety instructions on the label. not improve the effectiveness of cleaned. Permanent damage can While cleaning the vehicle's interior, soil removal. result from using cleaners on maintain adequate ventilation by . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. surfaces for which they were not opening the vehicle's doors and Avoid laundry detergents or intended. Apply the cleaner directly windows. dishwashing soaps with to the cleaning cloth to prevent Do not clean the interior using the degreasers. Using too much over-spray. Remove any accidental following cleaners or techniques: soap will leave a residue that over-spray from other surfaces leaves streaks and attracts dirt. immediately. . Never use a knife or any other For liquid cleaners, about sharp object to remove a soil 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of Notice: Using abrasive cleaners from any interior surface. when cleaning glass surfaces on water is a good guide. . the vehicle, could scratch the Never use a stiff brush. It can . Do not heavily saturate the glass and/or cause damage to the cause damage to the vehicle's upholstery while cleaning. rear window defogger. When interior surfaces. . cleaning the glass on the vehicle, Damage to the vehicle's interior use only a soft cloth and glass may result from the use of many cleaner. organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. Vehicle Care 9-87

Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the Leather soil and gently rub toward the Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft To remove dust, a soft cloth center. Continue cleaning, using brush attachment to remove dust dampened with water can be used. a clean area of the cloth each and loose dirt. A canister vacuum If a more thorough cleaning is time it becomes soiled. with a beater bar in the nozzle may necessary, a soft cloth dampened only be used on floor carpet and 4. Continue to gently rub the with a mild soap solution can be carpeted floor mats. For soils, soiled area. used. Allow the leather to dry always try to remove them first with 5. If the soil is not completely naturally. Do not use heat, steam, plain water or club soda. Before removed, use a mild soap or spot lifters or spot removers, cleaning, gently remove as much of solution and repeat the cleaning or shoe polish on leather. Many the soil as possible using one of the process with plain water. commercial leather cleaners following techniques: and coatings that are sold to If any of the soil remains, a preserve and protect leather . For liquids: gently blot the commercial fabric cleaner or spot may permanently change the remaining soil with a paper lifter may be necessary. Test a small towel. Allow the soil to absorb appearance and feel of the leather hidden area for colorfastness before and are not recommended. Do not into the paper towel until no using a commercial upholstery more can be removed. use silicone or wax-based products, cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally or those containing organic solvents . For solid dry soils: remove as cleaned area gives any impression to clean the vehicle's interior much as possible and then that a ring formation may result, because they can alter the vacuum. clean the entire surface. appearance by increasing the gloss To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot in a non-uniform manner. excess moisture from the fabric or 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white carpet after the cleaning process. cloth with water or club soda. 2. Remove excess moisture. 9-88 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult If a more thorough cleaning is to see through the windshield under necessary, a clean soft cloth certain conditions. dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust Care of Safety Belts and dirt. Never use spot lifters or Keep belts clean and dry. removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection. or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water. because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Service and Maintenance 10-1

General Information Because of all the different ways Service and people use vehicles, maintenance Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals, needs vary. The vehicle might need checks, inspections, more frequent checks and services. recommended fluids, and Please read the information under General Information lubricants are necessary to keep Scheduled Maintenance. To keep General Information ...... 10-1 this vehicle in good working the vehicle in good condition, see condition. Damage caused by your dealer/retailer. Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled The maintenance schedule is for Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2 maintenance might not be vehicles that: covered by the vehicle warranty. Recommended Fluids, . Carry passengers and cargo Proper vehicle maintenance helps to Lubricants, and Parts within recommended limits on keep the vehicle in good working Recommended Fluids and the Tire and Loading Information condition, improves fuel economy, Lubricants ...... 10-7 label. See Vehicle Load Limits and reduces vehicle emissions for Maintenance Replacement on page 8‑24. Parts ...... 10-9 better air quality. . Are driven on reasonable road Maintenance Records surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 limits. 10-2 Service and Maintenance

. Are driven off-road in the dealer/retailer has specially trained Scheduled recommended manner. See service technicians, uses genuine Off-Road Driving on page 8‑8. GM replacement parts, as well as, Maintenance . up to date tools and equipment to Use the recommended fuel. See When the Change Engine Oil Recommended Fuel on ensure fast and accurate Soon Message Displays page 8‑54. diagnostics. The proper replacement parts, Change engine oil and filter. See { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are Engine Oil on page 9‑10. An listed in Recommended Fluids and Emission Control Service. Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 10‑7 and When the Change Engine Oil Soon be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on message displays, service is cause serious injury. Perform page 10‑9. We recommend the use required for the vehicle as soon maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your as possible, within the next have the required know-how dealer/retailer. 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under and the proper tools and Rotation of New Tires the best conditions, the engine oil equipment. If in doubt, see your life system might not indicate the dealer/retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and need for vehicle service for more technician do the work. See performance of the vehicle, it is than a year. The engine oil and filter Doing Your Own Service Work on important that the first rotation must be changed at least once a service for new tires be performed page 9‑4. year and the oil life system must when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km be reset. Your dealer/retailer has At your General Motors (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire trained service technicians who will dealer/retailer, you can be certain Rotation on page 9‑56. perform this work and reset the that you will receive the highest system. If the engine oil life system level of service available. Your is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the oil Service and Maintenance 10-3 life system whenever the oil is . Windshield washer fluid level Maintenance II changed. See Engine Oil Life check. See Washer Fluid on . Perform all services described in System on page 9 12. page 9‑22. ‑ Maintenance I. When the Change Engine Oil Soon . Tire inflation check. See Tire . Steering and suspension message displays, certain services, Pressure on page 9‑50. inspection. Visual inspection for checks, and inspections are . Tire wear inspection. See Tire damaged, loose, or missing required. The services described for Inspection on page 9‑56. parts or signs of wear. Maintenance I should be performed . at every engine oil change. The Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation . Engine cooling system services described for Maintenance on page 9‑56. inspection. Visual inspection II should be performed when: . Fluids visual leak check of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and replacement, . Maintenance I was performed (or every 12 months, whichever if needed. the last time the engine oil was occurs first). A leak in any changed. system must be repaired and the . Windshield wiper blade fluid level checked. inspection for wear, cracking, . It has been 10 months or more . or contamination and windshield since the Change Engine Oil Engine air cleaner filter and wiper blade cleaning, Soon message has displayed or inspection (vehicles driven in if contaminated. See Exterior since the last service. dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Care on page 9‑81. Worn Maintenance I page 9‑13. or damaged wiper blade replacement. See Wiper Blade . Change engine oil and filter. . Brake system inspection (or Replacement on page 9‑29. See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. every 12 months, whichever An Emission Control Service. occurs first). . Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on page 9‑16. 10-4 Service and Maintenance

. Body hinges and latches, Additional Required Services Once a Year key lock cylinders, folding seat hardware, and sunroof At Each Fuel Stop . See Starter Switch Check on page 9‑27. (if equipped) lubrication. . Engine oil level check. See Recommended Fluids and See Engine Oil on page 9‑10. . See Automatic Transmission Lubricants on page 10‑7. Shift Lock Control System . More frequent lubrication may Engine coolant level check. Check on page 9‑27. be required when vehicle is See Engine Coolant on . See Ignition Transmission Lock exposed to a corrosive page 9‑16. Check on page 9‑28. environment. Applying silicone . Windshield washer fluid level grease on weatherstrips with a check. See Washer Fluid on . See Park Brake and P (Park) clean cloth makes them last page 9‑22. Mechanism Check on longer, seal better, and not stick page 9‑28. Once a Month or squeak. . Engine cooling system and . Restraint system component . Tire inflation check. See Tire pressure cap pressure check. check. See Safety System Pressure on page 9‑50. Radiator and air conditioning Check on page 2‑24. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire condenser outside cleaning. See Cooling System on . Automatic transmission fluid Inspection on page 9‑56. page 9 15. level check and adding fluid, ‑ if needed. See Automatic . Exhaust system and nearby heat Transmission Fluid on shields inspection for loose or page 9‑13. damaged components. . Engine air cleaner filter . Accelerator pedal check for inspection. See Engine Air damage, high effort, or binding. Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13. Replace if needed. Service and Maintenance 10-5

First Engine Oil Change After . Transfer case fluid change First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles (severe service) for vehicles Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles mainly driven in hilly or . Fuel system inspection for mountainous terrain, when . Engine cooling system drain, damage or leaks. frequently towing a trailer, flush, and refill, cooling system and cap pressure check, and First Engine Oil Change After or used for taxi, police, or delivery service. cleaning of outside of radiator Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles and air conditioning condenser . Engine air cleaner filter First Engine Oil Change After (or every 5 years, whichever replacement. See Engine Air Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles occurs first). See Cooling Cleaner/Filter on page 9‑13. . Automatic transmission fluid System on page 9‑15. An . Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See Emission Control Service. change (severe service) for Automatic Transmission Fluid on . Engine accessory drive belt vehicles mainly driven in heavy page 9‑13. inspection for fraying, excessive city traffic in hot weather, in hilly . Transfer case fluid change cracks, or obvious damage and or mountainous terrain, when (normal service). replacement, if needed. An frequently towing a trailer, Emission Control Service. or used for taxi, police, . Spark plug replacement. An or delivery service. See Emission Control Service. Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13. 10-6 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Service Maintenance I II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission fluid level check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Service and Maintenance 10-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 9‑10. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 9‑16. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 89021320). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. (V6 engines only) Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. 10-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951). Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges in Canada 10953474). Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668, Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint in Canada 89021674). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Service and Maintenance 10-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C Engine Oil Filter 2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G 3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48 Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 CF177 Spark Plugs 2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108 3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109 Wiper Blades Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 — Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 — Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 — 10-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 10-11

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 10-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 11-1 on page 11‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 11-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the inside of the glove the left side of the vehicle. It can be box, has the following information: seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Engine Cooling System 2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt 3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt Engine Oil with Filter 2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt 3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt Fuel Tank 2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal 3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal Technical Data 11-3

Capacities Application Metric English Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill) 2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt 3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt Wheel Nut Torque 170 Y 125 ft lb *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 2.4L L4 W Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in) 3.0L V6 Y Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in) 11-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.0L V6 Engine 2.4L L4 Engine Customer Information 12-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 12-13 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 12-14 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 12-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns General Motors ...... 12-14 Customer Assistance with the sales transaction or the Offices ...... 12-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4 Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes, Online Owner Center ...... 12-5 however, despite the best intentions GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy ...... 12-15 Event Data Recorders ...... 12-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings Program ...... 12-6 ® can occur. If your concern has not Roadside Assistance OnStar ...... 12-16 Navigation System ...... 12-16 been resolved to your satisfaction, Program ...... 12-6 the following steps should be taken: Scheduling Service Radio Frequency Appointments ...... 12-8 Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership Program ...... 12-8 Statement ...... 12-16 management. Normally, concerns Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10 can be quickly resolved at that level. Service Publications If the matter has already been Ordering Information ...... 12-12 reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 12-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available Chevrolet Customer Assistance to you. STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Line Program using the toll-free Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, at the following address: or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc. inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to Suite 800 give the Customer Assistance enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 . Vehicle Identification Number out of court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto (VIN). This is available from the by the Council of Better Business vehicle registration or title, or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all the plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves . Dealership name and location. dispute resolution program prior to the right to change eligibility . Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program. Customer Information 12-3

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), Offices addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, the General Motors Customer to call the toll-free number for General Motors of Canada Limited Communication Centre, assistance. However, if a customer wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to: Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to: General Motors of Canada Limited United States — Customer The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Motor Division factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Customer Assistance claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Center the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive P.O. Box 33170 an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 may include an informal hearing Chevrolet.com before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-222-1020 settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). 1-800-833-2438 (For Text you file your complaint to the final Telephone devices (TTYs)) decision, should be completed in Roadside Assistance: about 70 days. We believe our 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872) impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 12-4 Customer Information

From Puerto Rico: Overseas — Customer Customer Assistance for 1-800-496-9992 (English) Assistance Text Telephone (TTY) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Please contact the local General Users From U.S. Virgin Islands: Motors Business Unit. To assist customers who are deaf, 1-800-496-9994 Mexico, Central America and hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Caribbean Islands/Countries and who use Text Telephones Canada Customer — (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY Assistance Virgin Islands) — Customer equipment available at its Customer General Motors of Canada Limited Assistance Assistance Center. Any TTY user Customer Communication Centre, in the U.S. can communicate CA1-163-005 General Motors de Mexico, S. with Chevrolet by dialing: 1908 Colonel Sam Drive de R.L. de C.V. 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Assistance Center (TTY users in Canada can dial gmcanada.com Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 1-800-263-3830.) Col. Lomas de Bezares 1-800-263-3777 (English) C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-508-0000 Telephone devices (TTYs)) Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800 Customer Information 12-5

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com Online Owner Center (U.S.) — access to: Chevrolet Merchandise www.gmownercenter.com/ — . www.chevymall.com My Showroom: Find and save chevrolet information on vehicles and Information and services Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area. helpcenter customized for your specific . My Dealers/Retailers: Save vehicle — all in one convenient . FAQ details such as address and place. . Contact Us phone number for each of your . Digital owner manual, warranty preferred GM dealers/retailers. My GM Canada information, and more . My Driveway: Access quick (Canada) www.gm.ca . Online service and maintenance — links to parts and service records My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in password-protected section of values, or schedule a service . Find Chevrolet dealers for www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the service nationwide information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your . Exclusive privileges and offers personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. tools and forms with greater ease. . Recall notices for your specific . My Preferences: Manage your vehicle profile and use tools and forms ® with greater ease. . OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within www.gm.ca. 12-6 Customer Information

GM Mobility Roadside Assistance . Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and Reimbursement Program Program delivery date of the vehicle For U.S. purchased vehicles, . Description of the problem call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA (1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone Coverage (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). Services are provided up to For Canadian purchased vehicles, 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), call 1-800-268-6800. whichever comes first. This program, available to qualified Service is available 24 hours a day, In the U.S., anyone driving the applicants for cost reimbursement 365 days a year. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a of eligible aftermarket adaptive person driving the vehicle without equipment required for your Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not vehicle, such as hand controls or a When calling Roadside Assistance, covered. wheelchair/scooter lift for the have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of vehicle. ready: the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For more information on the limited . Your name, home address, and Chevrolet and General Motors of offer visit gmmobility.com or call the home telephone number Canada Limited reserve the right to GM Mobility Assistance Center at make any changes or discontinue . Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone location (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. any time without notification. . Location of the vehicle General Motors of Canada also Chevrolet and General Motors of has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license Canada Limited reserve the right 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) plate number of the vehicle to limit services or payment to an for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. Customer Information 12-7 owner or driver if they decide the . Flat Tire Change: Service is Services Specific to Canadian claims are made too often, or the provided to change a flat tire Purchased Vehicles same type of claim is made many with the spare tire. The spare times. tire, if equipped, must be in good . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement condition and properly inflated. is approximately $5 Canadian. Services Provided It is the owner's responsibility for Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other . Emergency Fuel Delivery: the repair or replacement of the fuels are not provided through Delivery of enough fuel for the tire if it is not covered by the this service. vehicle to get to the nearest warranty. service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service is . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle provided to jump start a dead registration is required. . Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if battery. . Trip Routing Service: Detailed you are locked out. A remote Services Not Included in maps of North America are unlock may be available if you Roadside Assistance provided when requested either have OnStar®. For security with the most direct route or the reasons, the driver must present . Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a identification before this service violation of any laws. limit of six requests per year. is given. . Legal fines. Additional travel information is also available. Allow three . Emergency Tow From a Public . Mounting, dismounting or weeks for delivery. Road or Highway: Tow to the changing of snow tires, chains, nearest Chevrolet dealer for or other traction devices. warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be . Towing or services for vehicles driven. Assistance is also given driven on a non-public road or when the vehicle is stuck in the highway. sand, mud, or snow. 12-8 Customer Information

. Trip Interruption Benefits Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation and Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometres from Appointments Program where your trip was started to When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an dealers are proud to offer Courtesy pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a Transportation, a customer support detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising program for vehicles with the New of the repair orders. Once your service consultant of your Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base authorization has been received, transportation needs, your Warranty Coverage period in the Roadside Assistance advisor dealer/retailer can help minimize Canada) and extended powertrain, will help you make arrangements your inconvenience. and hybrid specific warranty in both and explain how to receive the U.S. and Canada. payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department Several courtesy transportation . Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until options are available to assist in assistance cannot be provided it can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. Assistance advisor may give safety-related. If it is, please call you permission to get local Courtesy Transportation is not a your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited emergency road service. You will know this, and ask for instructions. receive payment, up to $100, Warranty. A separate booklet after sending the original If the dealer/retailer requests you to entitled “Warranty and Owner receipt to Roadside Assistance. bring the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. information. covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. Customer Information 12-9

Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Reimbursement Warranty service can generally be Your dealer may arrange to provide completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle to minimize your inconvenience by transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is providing several transportation dealer's shuttle service, the expense kept for an overnight warranty options. Depending on the must be supported by original repair. Rental reimbursement will be circumstances, your dealer can receipts and can only be up to the limited and must be supported by offer you one of the following: maximum amount allowed by GM original receipts. This requires for shuttle service. In addition, for that you sign and complete a Shuttle Service U.S. customers, should you arrange rental agreement and meet Shuttle service is the preferred transportation through a friend or state/provincial, local, and rental means of offering Courtesy relative, limited reimbursement for vehicle provider requirements. Transportation. Dealers may provide reasonable fuel expenses may Requirements vary and may include you with shuttle service to get you be available. Claim amounts minimum age requirements, to your destination with minimal should reflect actual costs and be insurance coverage, credit card, interruption of your daily schedule. supported by original receipts. etc. You are responsible for fuel This includes one‐way or round trip See your dealer for information usage charges and may also be shuttle service within reasonable regarding the allowance amounts responsible for taxes, levies, usage time and distance parameters of the for reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental dealer's area. transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. 12-10 Customer Information

Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts Information may also be used for repair. These If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged, have the vehicles that were total losses in service, may not be available at damage repaired by a qualified prior crashes. In most cases, the every dealer. Please contact your technician using the proper parts being recycled are from dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM Transportation arrangements will repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice be administered by appropriate resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally dealer personnel. performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety General Motors reserves the in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of right to unilaterally modify, Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts change or discontinue Courtesy are not covered by your GM New Transportation at any time and to Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any resolve all questions of claim parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by eligibility pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the that warranty. parts with which your vehicle conditions described herein at its Aftermarket collision parts are also sole discretion. was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice available. These are made by to ensure that your vehicle's companies other than GM and designed appearance, durability, may not have been tested for your and safety are preserved. The use vehicle. As a result, these parts of Genuine GM parts can help may fit poorly, exhibit premature maintain your GM New Vehicle durability/corrosion problems, Limited Warranty. and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Customer Information 12-11

Aftermarket parts are not covered Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs by your GM New Vehicle Limited reduced protection to your GM If there has been an injury, call Warranty, and any vehicle failure vehicle by limiting compensation emergency services for help. Do not related to such parts are not for damage repairs by using leave the scene of a crash until all covered by that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. Some matters have been taken care of. insurance companies will not Move the vehicle only if its position Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts. puts you in danger, or you are When purchasing insurance, we We recommend that you choose a instructed to move it by a police recommend that you assure your collision repair facility that meets officer. your needs before you ever need vehicle will be repaired with GM collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information may have a collision repair center If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved with GM-trained technicians and available from your current in the crash. state of the art equipment, or be insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see able to recommend a collision to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on repair center that has GM-trained If your vehicle is leased, the leasing page 12‑6. technicians and comparable company may require you to have Gather the following information: equipment. insurance that assures repairs with . Insuring Your Vehicle Genuine GM Original Equipment Driver's name, address, phone Manufacturer (OEM) parts or number Protect your investment in your GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver's license number vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read your lease carefully, as collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of . Owner's name, address, phone are significant differences in the your lease for poor quality repairs. number quality of coverage afforded by . Vehicle license plate various insurance policy terms. . Vehicle make, model and model year 12-12 Customer Information

. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications Number (VIN) recycled parts will not be covered Ordering Information . Insurance company and policy by your GM vehicle warranty. number Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals . General description of the but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis damage to the other vehicle Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on engines, your insurance company may transmission, axle, suspension, Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using that uses quality replacement parts. brakes, electrical, steering, aftermarket parts. Discuss this with body, etc. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your repair professional, and insist section. on Genuine GM parts. Remember if Service Bulletins If the airbag has inflated, see What your vehicle is leased you may be Service Bulletins give additional Will You See After an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle technical service information Inflates? on page 2‑32. repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost. Repair Process Each bulletin contains instructions If another party's insurance to assist in the diagnosis and In the event that your vehicle company is paying for the repairs, service of your vehicle. requires damage repairs, GM you are not obligated to accept a recommends that you take an repair valuation based on that Owner Information active role in its repair. If you have insurance company's collision Owner publications are written a pre-determined repair facility of policy repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended choice, take your vehicle there, contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational or have it towed there. Specify In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle. to the facility that any required of the repair and parts choices as The owner manual includes the replacement collision parts be long as cost stays within reasonable Maintenance Schedule for all original equipment parts, either new limits. models. Genuine GM parts or recycled Customer Information 12-13

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety Owner Manual, and Warranty 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Booklet. 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects RETAIL SELL PRICE: For Credit Card Orders Only $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), Reporting Safety Defects visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Without Portfolio: Owner to the United States Web at: helminc.com Manual only. Government Or you can write to: RETAIL SELL PRICE: If you believe that your vehicle $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause P.O. Box 07130 a crash or could cause injury or Current and Past Model Detroit, MI 48207 Order Forms death, you should immediately Prices are subject to change without inform the National Highway Technical Service Bulletins and notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration Manuals are available for current obligation. Allow ample time for (NHTSA) in addition to notifying and past model GM vehicles. delivery. To request an order form, specify General Motors. year and model name of the vehicle. Note to Canadian Customers: If NHTSA receives similar All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. 12-14 Customer Information

However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects become involved in individual to the Canadian to General Motors problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation To contact NHTSA, you may If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a like this, please notify General call the Vehicle Safety Hotline safety defect, notify Transport Motors. toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, in addition Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to notifying General Motors of Chevrolet Motor Division to http://www.safecar.gov; or Canada Limited. Call them at Chevrolet Customer Assistance write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Center Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada P.O. Box 33170 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch Detroit, MI 48232-5170 2780 Sheffield Road Washington D.C. 20590 In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 You can also obtain other (English) or 1-800-263-7854 information about motor (French), or write: vehicle safety from General Motors of Canada Limited http://www.safecar.gov. Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Customer Information 12-15

Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial Your GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age, For example, your vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded. computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: acquired during a crash if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation. braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, data to help your dealer/retailer special equipment is required, and . technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such as such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal information if they have access to preferences, such as radio pre-sets, the vehicle or the EDR. . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. 12-16 Customer Information

GM will not access this data or Navigation System Radio Frequency share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, If your vehicle has a navigation Statement if the vehicle is leased, with the system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that consent of the lessee; in response result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that to an official request of police or addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal similar government office; as part of other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC) GM's defense of litigation through navigation system operating manual Rules and with RSS-210/211 of the discovery process; or, as for information on stored data and Industry and Science Canada. required by law. Data that GM for deletion instructions. Operation is subject to the following collects or receives may also be two conditions: used for GM research needs or may Radio Frequency be made available to others for Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause research purposes, where a need is interference. RFID technology is used in some shown and the data is not tied to a 2. The device must accept any specific vehicle or vehicle owner. vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including interference that may cause OnStar® system security, as well as in connection with conveniences undesired operation of the If your vehicle has OnStar and you such as key fobs for remote door device. subscribe to the OnStar services, locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of please refer to the OnStar Terms in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an and Conditions for information on door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void data collection and use. See also GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment. OnStar® System on page 4‑44 in personal information or link with any this manual for more information. other GM system containing personal information. INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake What Will You See After System (ABS) ...... 8-38 Accessories and an Airbag Inflates? ...... 2-32 Warning Light ...... 4-22 Modifications ...... 9-3 When Should an Airbag Appearance Care Accessory Power ...... 8-29 Inflate? ...... 2-29 Exterior ...... 9-81 Add-On Electrical Where Are the Airbags? ...... 2-27 Interior ...... 9-85 Equipment ...... 8-64 Airbags Assistance Program, Adding Equipment to the Adding Equipment to the Roadside ...... 12-6 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38 Vehicle ...... 2-38 Audio Players ...... 6-19 Adjustments Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-17 CD ...... 6-19 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 2-6 Readiness Light ...... 4-16 Audio System Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 9-13 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Radio Reception ...... 6-18 Air Vents ...... 7-6 Vehicles ...... 2-38 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-2 Airbag System System Check ...... 2-25 Automatic Climate Control Check ...... 2-40 Alarm System System ...... 7-3 How Does an Airbag Anti-Theft ...... 1-12 Automatic Transmission ...... 8-35 Restrain? ...... 2-31 All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-38, 9-26 Fluid ...... 9-13 Passenger Sensing AM-FM Radio ...... 6-11 Manual Mode ...... 8-37 System ...... 2-33 Antenna Shiftlock Control System What Makes an Airbag Multi-Band ...... 6-18 Check ...... 9-27 Inflate? ...... 2-31 Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices ...... 6-28, 6-31 Alarm System ...... 1-12 Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-37 i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cautions, Danger, and Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings ...... v Battery ...... 9-25 Sidemarker, Stoplamps, CD Jump Starting ...... 9-74 and Backup Lamps ...... 9-35 DVD Player ...... 6-21 Voltage and Charging Buying New Tires ...... 9-58 CD Player ...... 6-19 Messages ...... 4-32 Center Console Storage ...... 3-1 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-29 Chains, Tire ...... 9-64 Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58 C Charging System Light ...... 4-18 Brakes ...... 9-22 Calibration ...... 4-9 Check Antilock ...... 8-38 California Engine Lamp ...... 4-18 Assist ...... 8-40 Fuel Requirements ...... 8-54 Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-28 Fluid ...... 9-24 Perchlorate Materials Child Restraints Parking ...... 8-40 Requirements ...... 9-3 Infants and Young System Messages ...... 4-32 Warning ...... 9-3 Children ...... 2-43 Braking ...... 8-4 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 8-49 Lower Anchors and Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 8-28 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iv Tethers for Children ...... 2-50 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-37 Capacities and Older Children ...... 2-41 Fog Lamps ...... 5-3, 9-35 Specifications ...... 11-2 Securing ...... 2-56, 2-58 Headlamp Aiming ...... 9-31 Carbon Monoxide Systems ...... 2-46 Headlamps ...... 9-33 Engine Exhaust ...... 8-34 Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-48 Headlamps, Front Turn Liftgate ...... 1-8, 1-9 Cleaning Signal, Sidemarker, and Winter Driving ...... 8-21 Exterior Care ...... 9-81 Parking Lamps ...... 9-34 Cargo Interior Care ...... 9-85 License Plate Lamps ...... 9-36 Cover ...... 3-1 INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems ...... 7-1 Customer Assistance ...... 12-4 Drive Systems Automatic ...... 7-3 Offices ...... 12-3 All-Wheel Drive ...... 8-38, 9-26 Clock ...... 4-10, 4-11 Text Telephone (TTY) Driver Information Cluster, IP ...... 4-13 Users ...... 12-4 Center (DIC) ...... 4-27 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10 Customer Information Driving Compact Spare Tire ...... 9-73 Service Publications Better Fuel Economy ...... 8-2 Compass ...... 4-9 Ordering Information ...... 12-12 Characteristics and Compass Messages ...... 4-32 Customer Satisfaction Towing Tips ...... 8-58 Control of a Vehicle ...... 8-4 Procedure ...... 12-1 Defensive ...... 8-3 Convenience Net ...... 3-1 Drunk ...... 8-3 Convex Mirrors ...... 1-14 D Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-20 Coolant Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-20 Engine ...... 9-16 Danger, Warnings, and If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 8-23 Engine Temperature Gage . . . .4-15 Cautions ...... v Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Cooling System ...... 9-15 Data Recorders, Event ...... 12-15 Off-Road ...... 8-8 Engine Messages ...... 4-33 Daytime Running Off-Road Recovery ...... 8-6 Courtesy Transportation Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 8-24 Program ...... 12-8 Defensive Driving ...... 8-3 Winter ...... 8-21 Covers Devices, Auxiliary ...... 6-28, 6-31 DVD Cargo ...... 3-1 Dome Lamps ...... 5-4 Rear Seat Entertainment Engine ...... 9-9 Door System ...... 6-33 Cruise Control ...... 8-44 Ajar Messages ...... 4-33 DVD/CD Player ...... 6-21 Light ...... 4-27 Locks ...... 1-6 Messages ...... 4-32 Power Locks ...... 1-7 Cupholders ...... 3-1 i-4 INDEX

E Engine (cont.) Fog Lamps Power Messages ...... 4-34 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-3, 9-35 ECO Button ...... 8-37 Pressure Light ...... 4-24 Light ...... 4-26 Economy Mode Running While Parked ...... 8-34 Front Seats Fuel ...... 8-37 Starting ...... 8-30 Adjustment ...... 2-3 Electrical Equipment, Engine Oil Heated ...... 2-8 Add-On ...... 8-64 Life System ...... 9-12 Fuel ...... 8-53 Electrical System Messages ...... 4-34 Additives ...... 8-55 Engine Compartment Fuse Entry Lighting ...... 5-4 Economy Driving ...... 8-2 Block ...... 9-38 Equipment, Towing ...... 8-63 Economy Light ...... 4-25 Fuses ...... 9-37 Event Data Recorders ...... 12-15 Filling a Portable Fuel Instrument Panel Fuse Extender, Safety Belt ...... 2-23 Container ...... 8-57 Block ...... 9-40 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 5-1 Filling the Tank ...... 8-56 Engine Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-54 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 9-13 Gage ...... 4-14 Check and Service Engine F Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-54 Soon Lamp ...... 4-18 Filter Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-25 Compartment Overview ...... 9-6 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 9-13 Recommended ...... 8-54 Coolant ...... 9-16 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Requirements, California . . . . .8-54 Coolant Heater ...... 8-31 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 5-2 System Messages ...... 4-35 Coolant Temperature Gage . . .4-15 Flat Tire ...... 9-64 Fuel Economy Mode ...... 8-37 Cooling System ...... 9-15 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 9-66 Fuses ...... 9-37 Cooling System Messages . . .4-33 Fluid Engine Compartment Fuse Cover ...... 9-9 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-13 Block ...... 9-38 Drive Belt Routing ...... 11-4 Brakes ...... 9-24 Instrument Panel Fuse Exhaust ...... 8-34 Power Steering ...... 9-21 Block ...... 9-40 Overheating ...... 9-19 Washer ...... 9-22 INDEX i-5

G H Highway Hypnosis ...... 8-20 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 8-20 Gages Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 5-2 Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...... 8-41 Engine Coolant Head Restraints ...... 2-2 Hood ...... 9-5 Temperature ...... 4-15 Headlamps Horn ...... 4-7 Fuel ...... 4-14 Aiming ...... 9-31 How to Wear Safety Belts Odometer ...... 4-14 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-33 Properly ...... 2-13 Speedometer ...... 4-14 Daytime Running Tachometer ...... 4-14 Lamps (DRL) ...... 5-2 Warning Lights and Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 I Indicators ...... 4-12 Headlamps, Front Turn Ignition Positions ...... 8-28 Gasoline Signal, Sidemarker, and Ignition Transmission Lock Specifications ...... 8-54 Parking Lamps ...... 9-34 Check ...... 9-28 General Information High-Beam On Light ...... 4-26 Illumination Control ...... 5-4 Service and Maintenance . . . . .10-1 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Towing ...... 8-57 Lamps On Reminder ...... 4-27 Infants and Young Children, Vehicle Care ...... 9-2 Heated Front Seats ...... 2-8 Restraints ...... 2-43 Glove Box ...... 3-1 Heated Mirrors ...... 1-15 Instrument Cluster ...... 4-13 GM Mobility Reimbursement Heater Instrument Panel ...... 5-4 Program ...... 12-6 Engine Coolant ...... 8-31 Storage Area ...... 3-1 High-Beam On Light ...... 4-26 Introduction ...... iii, 6-1 i-6 INDEX

J LATCH System Lights (cont.) Replacing Parts After a High/Low Beam Changer ...... 5-2 Jump Starting ...... 9-74 Crash ...... 2-55 Low Fuel Warning ...... 4-25 Latch, Lower Anchors and Safety Belt Reminders ...... 4-15 K Tethers for Children ...... 2-50 Security ...... 4-26 Key and Lock Messages ...... 4-35 Liftgate Tire Pressure ...... 4-24 Keyless Entry Carbon Monoxide ...... 1-8, 1-9 Traction Control System Remote (RKE) System ...... 1-3 Light (TCS)/StabiliTrak® ...... 4-23 Keyless Entry System ...... 1-3 StabiliTrak® OFF ...... 4-23 Traction Off ...... 4-22 Keys ...... 1-2 Lighting Locks Entry ...... 5-4 Door ...... 1-6 L Lights Power Door ...... 1-7 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 9-44 Airbag Readiness ...... 4-16 Safety ...... 1-7 Lamps Antilock Brake System Loss of Control ...... 8-7 Daytime Running (DRL) ...... 5-2 (ABS) Warning ...... 4-22 Low Fuel Warning Light ...... 4-25 Dome ...... 5-4 Charging System ...... 4-18 Lower Anchors and Tethers Exterior Controls ...... 5-1 Cruise Control ...... 4-27 for Children (LATCH License Plate ...... 9-36 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 4-24 SYSTEM) ...... 2-50 Malfunction Indicator ...... 4-18 Flash-to-Pass ...... 5-2 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 2-6 On Reminder ...... 4-27 Fog Lamps ...... 4-26 Front Seats ...... 2-6 Reading ...... 5-4 Fuel Economy ...... 4-25 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 High-Beam On ...... 4-26 INDEX i-7

M Messages (cont.) N Key and Lock ...... 4-35 Maintenance Navigation System Object Detection System . . . . .4-35 Records ...... 10-10 Vehicle Data Recording Ride Control System ...... 4-36 Maintenance Schedule and Privacy ...... 12-16 Safety Belt ...... 4-37 Recommended Fluids and Net, Convenience ...... 3-1 Service Vehicle ...... 4-37 Lubricants ...... 10-7 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 8-28 Tire ...... 4-37 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Transmission ...... 4-38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-18 Vehicle ...... 4-31 O Manual Mode ...... 8-37 Vehicle Reminder ...... 4-38 Object Detection System Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25 Mirrors Messages ...... 4-35 Messages Automatic Dimming Odometer ...... 4-14 Airbag System ...... 4-37 Rearview ...... 1-16 Off-Road ...... 8-8 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 4-37 Convex ...... 1-14 Driving ...... 8-8 Battery Voltage and Heated ...... 1-15 Recovery ...... 8-6 Charging ...... 4-32 Manual Rearview ...... 1-15 Oil Brake System ...... 4-32 Park Tilt ...... 1-15 Engine ...... 9-10 Compass ...... 4-32 Power ...... 1-14 Engine Oil Life System ...... 9-12 Door Ajar ...... 4-33 Monitor System, Tire Messages ...... 4-34 Engine Cooling System ...... 4-33 Pressure ...... 9-51 Pressure Light ...... 4-24 Engine Oil ...... 4-34 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 6-18 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-41 Engine Power ...... 4-34 Online Owner Center ...... 12-5 Fuel System ...... 4-35 i-8 INDEX

OnStar® System ...... 4-44 Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-33 R Operation, Infotainment Perchlorate Materials Radio Frequency System ...... 6-7 Requirements, California ...... 9-3 Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 Outlets Phone Statement ...... 12-16 Power ...... 4-11 Bluetooth ...... 6-42, 6-43, Radios Overheating, Engine ...... 9-19 6-46, 6-58 AM-FM Radio ...... 6-11 Overview, Infotainment Power CD/DVD Player ...... 6-21 System ...... 6-3, 6-5 Door Locks ...... 1-7 Reception ...... 6-18 Mirrors ...... 1-14 Satellite ...... 6-14 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-29 P Reading Lamps ...... 5-4 Seat Adjustment ...... 2-4 Park Rear Seat Entertainment Steering Fluid ...... 9-21 Shifting Into ...... 8-32 System ...... 6-33 Windows ...... 1-17 Shifting Out of ...... 8-33 Rear Seats ...... 2-9 Power Outlets ...... 4-11 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 1-15 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-49 Pregnancy, Using Safety Parking Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-8 Belts ...... 2-23 Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 8-46 Rearview Mirrors ...... 1-15 Privacy Brake ...... 8-40 Automatic Dimming ...... 1-16 Radio Frequency Brake and P (Park) Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 Identification (RFID) ...... 12-16 Mechanism Check ...... 9-28 Recommended Fluids and Program Over Things That Burn ...... 8-33 Lubricants ...... 10-7 Courtesy Transportation ...... 12-8 Passenger Airbag Status Recommended Fuel ...... 8-54 Proposition 65 Warning, Indicator ...... 4-17 California ...... 9-3 INDEX i-9

Records Retained Accessory Safety Belts (cont.) Maintenance ...... 10-10 Power (RAP) ...... 8-29 Reminders ...... 4-15 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-78 Ride Control Systems Replacing After a Crash ...... 2-24 Reimbursement Program, Messages ...... 4-36 Use During Pregnancy ...... 2-23 GM Mobility ...... 12-6 Roadside Assistance Safety Defects Reporting Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program ...... 12-6 Canadian Government ...... 12-14 System ...... 1-3 Roof General Motors ...... 12-14 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-5 Sunroof ...... 1-19 U.S. Government ...... 12-13 Replacement Bulbs ...... 9-37 Roof Rack System ...... 3-2 Safety Locks ...... 1-7 Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires ...... 9-56 Safety System Check ...... 2-24 Airbags ...... 2-40 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4 Satellite Radio ...... 6-14 Maintenance ...... 10-9 Running the Vehicle While Scheduled Maintenance ...... 10-2 Replacing Airbag System ...... 2-40 Parked ...... 8-34 Scheduling Appointments ...... 12-8 Replacing LATCH System Seats Parts After a Crash ...... 2-55 S Adjustment, Front ...... 2-3 Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts ...... 2-10 Head Restraints ...... 2-2 System Parts After a Care ...... 2-24 Heated Front ...... 2-8 Crash ...... 2-24 Extender ...... 2-23 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6 Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts Power Adjustment, Front ...... 2-4 Canadian Government ...... 12-14 Properly ...... 2-13 Rear ...... 2-9 General Motors ...... 12-14 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 2-19 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 2-6 U.S. Government ...... 12-13 Messages ...... 4-37 Securing Child Restraints ...... 2-56, 2-58 i-10 INDEX

Security Sidemarker Storage Light ...... 4-26 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-35 Mass Media (MEM) ...... 6-25 Vehicle ...... 1-12 Signals, Turn and Storage Areas Service Lane-Change ...... 5-3 Cargo Cover ...... 3-1 Accessories and Spare Tire Center Console ...... 3-1 Modifications ...... 9-3 Compact ...... 9-73 Convenience Net ...... 3-1 Doing Your Own Work ...... 9-4 Specifications and Glove Box ...... 3-1 Engine Soon Lamp ...... 4-18 Capacities ...... 11-2 Instrument Panel ...... 3-1 Maintenance Records ...... 10-10 Speedometer ...... 4-14 Roof Rack System ...... 3-2 Maintenance, General StabiliTrak System ...... 8-43 Stuck Vehicle ...... 8-23 Information ...... 10-1 StabiliTrak® OFF Light ...... 4-23 Sun Visors ...... 1-18 Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1 Start Assist, Hills ...... 8-41 Sunroof ...... 1-19 Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 1-5 Symbols ...... v Information ...... 12-12 Starter Switch Check ...... 9-27 System Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8 Starting the Engine ...... 8-30 Roof Rack ...... 3-2 Vehicle Messages ...... 4-37 Steering ...... 8-5 System Check Servicing the Fluid, Power ...... 9-21 Automatic Transmission Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38 Wheel Adjustment ...... 4-6 Shiftlock Control ...... 9-27 Shifting Wheel Controls ...... 4-6 Into Park ...... 8-32 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps Out of Park ...... 8-33 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-35 INDEX i-11

T Tires (cont.) Traction Rotation ...... 9-56 Control System (TCS) ...... 8-41 Tachometer ...... 4-14 Sidewall Labeling ...... 9-44 Control System (TCS)/ Taillamps Terminology and StabiliTrak® Light ...... 4-23 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-35 Definitions ...... 9-47 Off Light ...... 4-22 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4 Uniform Tire Quality Trailer Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 1-13 Grading ...... 9-61 Sway Control (TSC) ...... 8-64 Immobilizer ...... 1-13 Wheel Alignment and Tire Trailer Towing ...... 8-61 Time ...... 4-10, 4-11 Balance ...... 9-62 Transmission Tires Wheel Replacement ...... 9-63 Automatic ...... 8-35 Buying New Tires ...... 9-58 When It Is Time for New Fluid, Automatic ...... 9-13 Chains ...... 9-64 Tires ...... 9-58 Messages ...... 4-38 Changing ...... 9-66 Towing Transportation Program, Compact Spare ...... 9-73 Driving Characteristics ...... 8-58 Courtesy ...... 12-8 Designations ...... 9-46 Equipment ...... 8-63 Turn and Lane-Change Different Size ...... 9-60 General Information ...... 8-57 Signals ...... 5-3 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 9-64 Recreational Vehicle ...... 9-78 Turn Signal Inflation Monitor System ...... 9-53 Trailer ...... 8-61 Bulb Replacement ...... 9-35 Inspection ...... 9-56 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-64 Messages ...... 4-37 Vehicle ...... 9-78 Pressure Light ...... 4-24 Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-51 i-12 INDEX

U W Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 8-46 Warning Lights, Gages, and Uniform Tire Quality Indicators ...... 4-12 Grading ...... 9-61 Warnings ...... v Using this Manual ...... v Cautions and Danger ...... v Hazard Flashers ...... 5-2 V Washer Fluid ...... 9-22 Vehicle Wheels Canadian Owners ...... iv Alignment and Tire Control ...... 8-4 Balance ...... 9-62 Load Limits ...... 8-24 Different Size ...... 9-60 Messages ...... 4-31 Replacement ...... 9-63 Personalization ...... 4-39 When It Is Time for New Remote Start ...... 1-5 Tires ...... 9-58 Security ...... 1-12 Where to Put the Child Towing ...... 9-78 Restraint ...... 2-48 Vehicle Care Windows ...... 1-16 Tire Pressure ...... 9-50 Power ...... 1-17 Vehicle Identification Windshield Number (VIN) ...... 11-1 Wiper/Washer ...... 4-7 Service Parts Identification Winter Driving ...... 8-21 Label ...... 11-1 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-29 Vehicle Reminder Wipers Messages ...... 4-38 Rear Washer ...... 4-8 Ventilation, Air ...... 7-6 Visors ...... 1-18